700-0023-10-00 - (Z-Series R10.0 Engineering and Planning Guide) - Issue - 1.1

Ciena Z-Series
Packet-Optical Transport Networking Platform
Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide

CyOS Release 10.0
Planet Operate Release 17.08
700-0023-10-00 – Issue 1.1
June 2018
Copyright© 2018 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide Release 10.0/17.08
Legal Notices, Copyright, and Trademark

LEGAL NOTICES
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND TRADE SECRET INFORMATION OF CIENA
CORPORATION AND ITS RECEIPT OR POSSESSION DOES NOT CONVEY ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE
OR DISCLOSE ITS CONTENTS, OR TO MANUFACTURE, USE, OR SELL ANYTHING THAT IT MAY
DESCRIBE. REPRODUCTION, DISCLOSURE, OR USE IN WHOLE OR IN PART WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC
WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION OF CIENA CORPORATION IS STRICTLY FORBIDDEN.
EVERY EFFORT HAS BEEN MADE TO ENSURE THAT THE INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS
COMPLETE AND ACCURATE AT THE TIME OF PUBLISHING; HOWEVER, THE INFORMATION
CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE.
While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise
expressly agreed to in writing CIENA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OR
CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described
in this document are subject to change without notice. For the most up-to-date technical
publications, visit www.ciena.com http://www.ciena.com.
Copyright© 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved

The material contained in this document is also protected by copyright laws of the United States of
America and other countries. It may not be reproduced or distributed in any form by any means,
altered in any fashion, or stored in a data base or retrieval system, without express written
permission of the Ciena Corporation.
Ciena®, the Ciena logo, Z22™, Z33®, Z77®, Blue Planet® and other trademarks and service marks of
Ciena appearing in this publication are the property of Ciena. Trade names, trademarks, and service
marks of other companies appearing in this publication are the property of the respective holders.
Security
Ciena cannot be responsible for unauthorized use of equipment and will not make allowance or
credit for unauthorized use or access.
© 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved.
700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. Page 2
Contacting Ciena
Corporate headquarters 410-694-5700 or 800-921-1144 www.ciena.com
http://www.ciena.com
Customer technical support/warranty
In North America 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)

410-865-4961
In Europe, Middle East, and Africa 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-243-6224-7)

+44-207-012-5508
00 0800 77 454 (Slovenia)
In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-243-6224-7)

+81-3-6367-3989
+91-124-4340-600
120 11104 (Vietnam)
000 8004401369 (India)
In Caribbean and Latin America 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-243-6224-7)
1230-020-0845 (Chile)
009 800-2436-2247 (Colombia)
0800-77-454 (Mexico and Peru)
00 008000442510 (Panama)
Sales and General Information North America: 1-800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com

International: +44 20 7012 5555
In North America 410-694-5700 or 800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In India +91-22-42419600 E-mail: sales@ciena.com
In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com
Training E-mail: learning@ciena.com
For additional office locations and phone numbers, visit the Ciena website at www.ciena.com
http://www.ciena.com.
Naming Conventions
The following graphical icons identify specific features or functions to stress importance:
Important! — Information that must be seriously considered.
Note: Special suggestions, advice, or information that should be

seriously considered.
Safety Symbols and Labels

Read and understand all warning labels before working with equipment.
Warning
This warning symbol means danger. You are in a situation that could cause bodily
injury.
Caution
Environment requires a moderate level of awareness. There is a moderate level of
danger to yourself or others.
Laser Equipment Present
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Equipment
Safety and Compliance Information

SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Before you work on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical
circuitry and familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents.
Warning Before working on the equipment, remove conductive clothing and jewelry (for
example: rings, necklaces, bracelets, key chains, metal wristwatches, and apparel with
metal buttons). Conductive items can cause serious burns or weld the metal object to
the terminals.
Warning Only trained and qualified personnel (as defined in IEC 60950-1 and AS/NZS 3260) should
be allowed to install, replace, or service this equipment.
Warning Installation of the equipment must comply with local and national electrical codes.
Warning This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted access area
can be accessed only through the use of a special tool, lock and key, or other means of
security.
Warning Read the installation directions before connecting the system to the power source or
installing the modules and the accessories which are intended to be used only with
Optical/Packet system.
Warning Do not perform cabling on an electrically live system. Before performing any of the
following procedures, ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
Warning A readily accessible two-poled disconnect device must be incorporated in the fixed
wiring.
Warning No user serviceable parts are contained inside. Contact the manufacturer regarding
service of this equipment.
Warning This device requires short-circuit protection to be provided as part of the facility. Install
only in accordance with national and local wiring regulations.
Warning The copper RJ-45 SFP modules are suitable for connection only to shielded Ethernet
intra-building cabling grounded at both ends.
Warning Do not work on the system, or connect or disconnect cables during periods of lightning
activity.
Warning Do not stack the chassis on any other equipment. If the chassis falls, it can cause severe
bodily injury and equipment damage.
Warning Stability hazard. The rack must be stabilized or bolted to the floor before you mount
this shelf assembly. Failure to ensure rack stability may cause the rack to tip over.
Warning To prevent bodily harm when mounting or servicing this device in a rack, you must
ensure that the shelf remains stable. The following guidelines are provided to ensure
your safety:
• This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is the only unit in the
rack.
• When mounting this unit in a partially filled rack, load the rack from bottom to
the top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
• If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before
mounting or servicing the unit in the rack.
Warning Never use the cable management guide to lift the chassis. This is NOT the intended
purpose of the cable guide. Personal injury and/or damage to the shelf assembly may
result.
Warning Ensure that all power wiring is sufficient for the load carried to the shelf assembly. All
wiring and installation must be in accordance with local building and electrical codes
acceptable to the authorities in the countries where the equipment is installed and
used.
Warning This equipment must be grounded. Never defeat the ground conductor or
operate the equipment in the absence of a suitably installed ground
conductor. Contact the appropriate electrical inspection authority or an
electrician if you are uncertain that suitable grounding is available.
Warning When installing or replacing the unit, the ground connection must always be made first
and disconnected last.
Warning This unit might have more than one power supply connection. All connections must be
removed to de-energize the unit.
Warning For connections outside the building where the equipment is installed, the 10/100/1000
Ethernet ports must be connected through an approved network termination unit with
integral circuit protection.
Warning Operating this equipment in an area that exceeds ambient air temperature of 50° C /
120° F will result in machinery overheating.
Warning Operating I-Temp equipment in an area that exceeds ambient air temperature of 65° C
/ 149° F will result in overheating.
Warning Ultimate disposal of this product should be handled according to all national laws and
regulations.
Warning Connect the unit only to DC power source that complies with the safety extra-low
voltage (SELV) requirements in IEC 60950-based safety standards.
Warning This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Warning This is a Class A product based on the standard of the VCCI Council. If this equipment is
used in a domestic environment, radio interference may occur, in which case, the user
may be required to take corrective actions.
Warning This equipment is a class A product and should be used and installed properly
according to the Hungarian EMC Class A requirements (MSZEN55022). Class A
equipment is designed for typical commercial establishments for which special
conditions of installation and protection distance are used.
Warning This is a Class A Information Product. When used in residential environment, it may
cause radio frequency interference, under such circumstances, the user may be
requested to take appropriate countermeasures.
Warning This is a Class A Device and is registered for EMC requirements for industrial use. The
seller or buyer should be aware of this. If this type was sold or purchased by mistake, it
should be replaced with a residential-use type.
Warning Air Management Boards are required to meet EMI certification standards. Air
Management Boards must be installed to cover all unused slots.
Caution
Environment requires a moderate level of awareness. There is a moderate level of
danger to yourself or others.
Caution To avoid damage to the Z22 shelf, do not remove the fan module from an operating
system for longer than 60 seconds.
Caution Keep all ventilation openings clear and unobstructed.
Caution To prevent damage, do NOT install or remove XFP/SFP transceivers with

cables attached.
Caution The Air Management Boards are essential to proper cooling of the shelf assembly.
Air Management Boards must be installed over all unused slot openings to prevent
damage from overheating.
Caution Do not apply power to the unit until you complete all installation steps and check the
continuity of the battery and battery return. When terminating power, return, and
frame ground, do not use soldering lug connectors, push-in connectors, quick-connect
connectors, or other friction-fit connectors.
Caution Star washers must be used for anti-rotation on all power and ground fasteners.
Caution Use copper conductors only.
Caution This equipment is suitable for installation in Network Telecommunications Facilities,

Customer Premises, and OSPs. If this equipment is installed in a Customer Premise or
an OSP environment, the appropriate hardened modules must be used and DC power
interfaces must be connected to DC power via a proper fuse panel.
Caution The intra-building port(s) of the equipment or sub-assembly is suitable for connection
to intra building or unexposed wiring or cabling only. The intra-building port(s) of the
equipment or sub-assembly MUST NOT be metallically connected to interfaces that
connect to the Outside Plant (OSP) or its wiring. These interfaces are designed for use
as intra-building interfaces only (Type 2 or Type 4 ports as described in GR-1089-CORE,
Issue 4) and require isolation from the exposed OSP cabling. The addition of Primary
Protectors is not sufficient protection in order to connect these interfaces metallically
to OSP wiring.
Caution This equipment is intended to be grounded to a Common Bonding Network per

GR-CORE-1089. Ensure that the host is connected to earth ground during normal use.
Caution Hazard Level 1M Laser radiation. Do not view directly with non-attenuating optical
instruments.
Caution This product may employ Class 1M SFP or XFP. Check pluggable transceiver label for
laser classification.
Caution Some Z-Series shelf components are Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) sensitive devices.
Conform to the following rules:
• Observe standard precautions for handling ESD-sensitive devices.
• Assume that all solid-state electronic devices are ESD-sensitive.
• Ensure that you are grounded with a grounded wrist strap or equivalent while
working with ESD-sensitive devices.
• Transport, store, and handle ESD-sensitive devices in static-safe environments.
Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A
digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in
a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case,
the user will be required to correct the interference at own expense.
Note The battery return connection is treated as DC-isolated (DC-I), as defined in Telcordia
GR-1089-CORE Issue 3.
Note This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Contents
Safety and Compliance Information ................................................................................................. 5
New in this Release / About this Guide ............................................................................................27
Z-Series Shelves ..................................................................................................................................35
Z22 Shelf ....................................................................................................................................................... 35
Z22 Shelf Description .............................................................................................................................. 36
Z22 Card Installation Guidelines ........................................................................................................... 38
CEMi Module: +24 Volt ............................................................................................................................ 41
Z22 Physical .............................................................................................................................................. 42
Z22 External Timing ................................................................................................................................ 42
Z22 Alarms................................................................................................................................................ 43
Z22 Shelf Power ....................................................................................................................................... 44
Z33 Shelf ....................................................................................................................................................... 44
Z33 Shelf Description .............................................................................................................................. 47
Common Equipment Module (CEMi) .................................................................................................... 50
Z33 Timing ................................................................................................................................................ 53
Z33 Alarms................................................................................................................................................ 54
Z33 Shelf Power ....................................................................................................................................... 54
Z33 Physical .............................................................................................................................................. 55
Z77 Shelf v2 .................................................................................................................................................. 55
Z77 Power ................................................................................................................................................. 60
Z77 Physical .............................................................................................................................................. 61
Z77 Timing ................................................................................................................................................ 61
Z77 Management .................................................................................................................................... 61
L-AMP Shelf................................................................................................................................................... 61
700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 10

L-AMP Shelf Pinouts ................................................................................................................................ 63

L-AMP Interfaces...................................................................................................................................... 64
L-AMP OSC Specifications....................................................................................................................... 65
L-AMP Features ........................................................................................................................................ 65
L-AMP Applications ................................................................................................................................. 65
L-AMP Physical ......................................................................................................................................... 65
L-AMP Power ............................................................................................................................................ 66
L-AMP Compliance .................................................................................................................................. 66
Line Cards, Modules, Optics, and Optical Protection .....................................................................67
Line Cards Overview and Hardware and CyOS Compatibility ............................................................... 68
BOSS Termination Module ......................................................................................................................... 73
Shelf Compatibility .................................................................................................................................. 76
Physical ..................................................................................................................................................... 76
Timing ....................................................................................................................................................... 76
Broadband Operating System Supervisor ............................................................................................... 77
Shelf Compatibility .................................................................................................................................. 78
CPU ............................................................................................................................................................ 78
RAM ........................................................................................................................................................... 78
Timing ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
Craft ........................................................................................................................................................... 79
Physical ..................................................................................................................................................... 79
Power ........................................................................................................................................................ 79
Electrical .................................................................................................................................................... 79
Compliance............................................................................................................................................... 79
LAD Modules ................................................................................................................................................ 80
System Requirements ............................................................................................................................. 88
Functional Interfaces .............................................................................................................................. 88
LAD OSC Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 89
Management ............................................................................................................................................ 89
Physical ..................................................................................................................................................... 90
Power ........................................................................................................................................................ 91
Environmental.......................................................................................................................................... 91
Compliance / Safety ................................................................................................................................ 91

LAD Module Wavelength Assignments................................................................................................. 92

DTM-8 and DTM-8G Transponder Modules ............................................................................................. 93
Applications .............................................................................................................................................. 97
DTM-8/DTM-8G System Requirements ................................................................................................ 97
DTM-8 Interfaces ..................................................................................................................................... 98
DTM-8G Interfaces .................................................................................................................................. 98
DTM-8/DTM-8G Management ............................................................................................................... 98
DTM-8/DTM-8G Physical ......................................................................................................................... 99
DTM-8/DTM-8G Power ............................................................................................................................ 99
DTM-8/DTM-8G Environmental ............................................................................................................. 99
DTM-8/DTM-8G Compliance / Safety .................................................................................................... 99
DTM-100G Transponder Module ............................................................................................................... 99
System Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 102
DTM-100G Applications ........................................................................................................................ 103
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 103
Optical Transport................................................................................................................................... 103
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 104
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 104
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 104
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 104
Compliance / Safety .............................................................................................................................. 104
DTM-100G2 Transponder Module .......................................................................................................... 105
DTM-100G2 Applications ...................................................................................................................... 107
DTM-100G2 Interfaces .......................................................................................................................... 107
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 108
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 108
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 108
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 108
Compliance/Safety ................................................................................................................................ 109
2.5G-LME4 Multiplex-Transponder Module ........................................................................................... 110

Management .......................................................................................................................................... 113

Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 113
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 113
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 113
LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder/Transponder ...................................................................................... 114
LME-10G10 Signal and Card Interoperability .................................................................................... 117
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 120
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 121
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 121
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 121
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 121
PME-412 Packet Multiplexer Module ...................................................................................................... 122
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PME Line Cards .......................................................................... 124
PME-412 Ethernet Services, OAM, QoS, and Synchronization ........................................................ 125
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 126
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 126
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 127
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 127
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 127
Standards ............................................................................................................................................... 127
PME-216i Packet Multiplexer Module ..................................................................................................... 128
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PME Line Cards .......................................................................... 131
PME-216i Ethernet Services, OAM, QoS, and Synchronization ....................................................... 132
Standards ............................................................................................................................................... 133

Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 134

Management .......................................................................................................................................... 134
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 134
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 135
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 135
PSW-10G10 Packet Module ...................................................................................................................... 135
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PSW Line Cards .......................................................................... 139
Ethernet Services and Standards ........................................................................................................ 140
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 140
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 141
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 141
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 141
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 141
PSW-10G20 Packet Module ...................................................................................................................... 142
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 146
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 147
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 147
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 147
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 147
PSW-618 Packet Module ........................................................................................................................... 148

Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 153

Management .......................................................................................................................................... 153
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 153
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 153
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 153
PSW-100G Packet Module ........................................................................................................................ 154
Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 157
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 158
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 159
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 159
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 159
PSW-100G2W Packet Module .................................................................................................................. 159
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 165
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 165
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 165
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 165
TSW-10G10 Packet Aggregation and Transport Module ...................................................................... 166
Interfaces and Optical Transport ........................................................................................................ 169
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 170
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 170
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 170
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 170
LAC-8 Lambda Aggregator Module ......................................................................................................... 171
LAC-8 Wavelength Assignments .......................................................................................................... 172


Functional Interfaces ............................................................................................................................ 173
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 173
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 173
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 173
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 173
LAC-4P Lambda Aggregator CWDM Terminal Multiplexer................................................................... 174
SFT-8 Module Transponder Module ....................................................................................................... 176
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 179
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 179
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 179
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 180
SFT-10G16 Multi-Rate Transponder Module ......................................................................................... 180
SFT-10G16 Applications ........................................................................................................................ 183
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 184
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 184
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 184
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 184
MSE-1482 Multiservice SONET/SDH Aggregation and Transport Module ......................................... 185
Applications ............................................................................................................................................ 189
GbE Support ........................................................................................................................................... 189
Timing / Synchronization ...................................................................................................................... 189
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 190
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 190
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 190

Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 190
FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN Muxponder Module ....................................................................................... 191
Applications ............................................................................................................................................ 193
Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 194
OTN Multiplexing and Cross-Connect Formats ................................................................................. 194
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 194
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 194
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 194
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 195
WSS-402 and WSS-404 Wavelength Selective Switch Modules ........................................................... 195
WSS-402 and WSS-404 DWDM Specifications ................................................................................... 202
WSS-402 and WSS-404 OSC Specifications ........................................................................................ 204
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 204
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 204
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 204
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Wavelength Selective Switch Modules ................................................ 205
WSS Modules Paired with the AWG-96............................................................................................... 208
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Optical Specifications ........................................................................ 216
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 OSC Specifications ............................................................................. 216
Management .......................................................................................................................................... 217
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 217
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 217
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 217
OLA Modules .............................................................................................................................................. 218
OLA System Requirements .................................................................................................................. 220

OLA Interfaces........................................................................................................................................ 220

OLA OSC Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 222
OLA Features .......................................................................................................................................... 223
OLA Applications ................................................................................................................................... 223
OLA Physical ........................................................................................................................................... 224
OLA Power .............................................................................................................................................. 224
Environmental........................................................................................................................................ 224
AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments .......................................................................................................... 225
AWG-96 Wavelength Assignments .......................................................................................................... 226
Channel, Wavelength, and Frequency Table .......................................................................................... 228
Ring Closure Modules ............................................................................................................................... 230
XC-2800 Switch Fabric Modules ............................................................................................................... 231
XC-2800 Applications ............................................................................................................................ 233
Capacity and Throughput ..................................................................................................................... 233
Redundancy and Protection ................................................................................................................ 233
Physical ................................................................................................................................................... 233
Power ...................................................................................................................................................... 233
Optical Protection Groups ........................................................................................................................ 234
Optical Protection Groups Equipment ............................................................................................... 234
Optical Protection Groups – Rules and Guidelines ........................................................................... 237
Line Card SYNC LED ................................................................................................................................... 241
Optical Protection Switch ......................................................................................................................... 242
1+1 Protection........................................................................................................................................ 242
Switching Modes.................................................................................................................................... 243
Local or Remote Operation .................................................................................................................. 243
OPS Specifications ................................................................................................................................. 244
Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and Interoperability ..............................................................245
Packet Card-to-Packet Card Interoperability – Z77 ............................................................................... 246
Packet Card Node-to-Node Interoperability – Release 6.0 and Higher .............................................. 251

PME/PSW/TSW Packet Line Card Interoperability ................................................................................. 252

Optical Link Design...........................................................................................................................262
DWDM XFP Specifications with GFEC ...................................................................................................... 262
LAD Modules .............................................................................................................................................. 263
Dispersion Compensation Modules ........................................................................................................ 269
Application Configurations..............................................................................................................272
Application 1: OC-192/STM-64/10GbE (10G λ) Transport Using LAD Modules ................................. 274
10G Lambda Transport, OEO Application Feature Set ..................................................................... 276
Application 2: OC-48/STM-16 Transport Using 2.5G-LME4 and LAD Modules .................................. 277
Application 3: Packet (10GbE and 1GbE) Transport and Switching .................................................... 278
Protected and Unprotected Configurations ...................................................................................... 279
Application 4: Multiservice Lambda Transport (OEO) Using PME, 2.5G-LME4, and LAD Modules . 280
Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO Application Feature Set........................................................ 282
Application 5: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Functionality..................................................................... 282
Application 6: MSE-1482 Path Cross-Connect Functionality ................................................................ 284
Application 7: Ethernet over SONET (EoS) .............................................................................................. 285
Application 8: WSS Network Configuration ............................................................................................ 286
Application 9: Ethernet Services and Transport .................................................................................... 288
Application 10: Collector Rings Using Z-Series Shelves with PME and LAD Modules ....................... 289
Application 11: FLX-216i Configurations ................................................................................................. 290
Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations ........................................................................................... 291
System Power ...................................................................................................................................297
Z22 Power ................................................................................................................................................... 297
Z33 Power ................................................................................................................................................... 298
Z77 Power ................................................................................................................................................... 300
Fuses............................................................................................................................................................ 301
Z77 Fuse Positions and DC Feeds ............................................................................................................ 302
Management Network Configuration Guidelines .........................................................................305
Management Overview ............................................................................................................................. 305
Single Physical LAN .................................................................................................................................... 307
Multiple Physical LANs .............................................................................................................................. 310
Multiple Physical LANs and the Same IP Sub-Network ........................................................................ 317
Network and Host Routes ........................................................................................................................ 323

Appendix A: DWDM Network Architecture Options and OSNR Specifications ..........................324

Appendix B: IGMP Snooping ............................................................................................................327
Appendix C: Multi-Chassis LAG and Dual-Node Resiliency ...........................................................330
Appendix D: Z-Series Fan Module Alarm, Fan, Filter, and ACO LED Detail .................................332
Appendix E: Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Boot-up Status and LED Sequence .............334
Appendix F: Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Operational Status and LED Sequence –
Release 8.0 and Higher .....................................................................................................................336
Appendix G: Line Card SYNC LED Sequence during PLL Synchronization to the Active Controller
Card ....................................................................................................................................................338
Appendix H: Line Card Port Status and Alarm LEDs .....................................................................340
Appendix I: Active Shelf Controller Card Node Status and LED Sequence .................................341
Appendix J: Z-Series Node-Level RADIUS Support .........................................................................342
Appendix K: Best Practices for Network Configurations .............................................................345
Appendix L: ROADM: 40-Channel vs. 96-Channel Interoperability Guidelines ...........................350
Optical Modular Transceiver Interoperability ........................................................................................ 354
Hardware Interoperability ........................................................................................................................ 355
ROADM and LAD Interoperability ............................................................................................................ 356
Appendix M: Z-Series Packet Line Card Migration ........................................................................357
Appendix N: Software Upgrades: Service-Affected Line Cards ....................................................358
Appendix O: Acronyms and Z-Series Terminology ........................................................................365

Table of Figures
Figure 1: Front and Rear View of the Z22 -48V Shelf Layout ....................................................................... 36
Figure 2: Z22 System and Environmental Alarms Connection ................................................................... 43
Figure 3: Z33 Front and Rear Shelf Layout .................................................................................................... 45
Figure 4: Common Equipment Module (CEMi) ............................................................................................. 50
Figure 5: CEMi and MSE-1482 Configuration - Traffic via EoS..................................................................... 51
Figure 6: CEMi and MSE-1482 DCN Configuration Option .......................................................................... 52
Figure 7: Z77 Shelf v2 – Front and Rear Views .............................................................................................. 55
Figure 8: L-AMP Shelf – Front View ................................................................................................................. 62
Figure 9: L-AMP Block Diagram ....................................................................................................................... 63
Figure 10: Z77 BTM ........................................................................................................................................... 73
Figure 11: Z77 BOSS Controller Cards ........................................................................................................... 77
Figure 12: Z22 LAD-2P Module ........................................................................................................................ 81
Figure 13: Z-Series LAD-4A Module ................................................................................................................ 81
Figure 14: Z-Series LAD-8i Module ................................................................................................................. 81
Figure 15: Z-Series LAD-40E Module .............................................................................................................. 81
Figure 16: AWG-40 External Module .............................................................................................................. 82
Figure 17: LAD-40E and AWG-40 Installation Example ................................................................................ 83
Figure 18: AWG-96 External Module .............................................................................................................. 83
Figure 19: LAD-20 LGX Passive Module ......................................................................................................... 84
Figure 20: LAD-2G LGX Passive Module ......................................................................................................... 84
Figure 21: LAD-2P Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 22: LAD-2G Block Diagram................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 23: LAD-4 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 85
Figure 24: LAD-4A Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 25: LAD-8 Block Diagram ..................................................................................................................... 86
Figure 26: LAD-8i Block Diagram .................................................................................................................... 86

Figure 27: LAD-8A Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 86

Figure 28: LAD-8E Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 87
Figure 29: LAD-8X Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 87
Figure 30: LAD-40 and LAD-96 Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 87
Figure 31: LAD-40E/LAD-96E Module Block Diagram .................................................................................. 88
Figure 32: Z-Series DTM-8 Module ................................................................................................................. 93
Figure 33: DTM-8 Functional Block Diagram ................................................................................................. 93
Figure 34: DTM-8G Functional Block Diagram .............................................................................................. 93
Figure 35: DTM-8 Block Diagram .................................................................................................................... 95
Figure 36: DTM-8G Block Diagram ................................................................................................................. 96
Figure 37: DTM-100G Transponder and OTN Functional Block Diagram ............................................... 101
Figure 38: DTM-100G Transponder Block Diagram ................................................................................... 101
Figure 39: DTM-100G2 Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 106
Figure 40: Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 Module ........................................................................................................ 110
Figure 41: Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................ 110
Figure 42: 2.5G-LME4 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 112
Figure 43: Z-Series LME-10G10 Module ....................................................................................................... 114
Figure 44: LME-10G10 Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 115
Figure 45: Z-Series PME-412 Module ........................................................................................................... 122
Figure 46: PME-412 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 123
Figure 47: PME-412 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 123
Figure 48: Z-Series PME-216i Module .......................................................................................................... 128
Figure 49: PME-216i Functional Block Diagram .......................................................................................... 129
Figure 50: PME-216i Block Diagram ............................................................................................................. 130
Figure 51: Z-Series PSW-10G10 Packet Module .......................................................................................... 136
Figure 52: PSW-10G10 Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 136
Figure 53: PSW-10G10 Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 137
Figure 54: PSW-10G20 Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 142
Figure 55: PSW-10G20 Block Diagram ......................................................................................................... 143
Figure 56: Z-Series PSW-618 Packet Module ............................................................................................... 148
Figure 57: PSW-618 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................... 148
Figure 58: PSW-618 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 149
Figure 59: Z-Series PSW-100G Packet Module ............................................................................................ 154

Figure 60: PSW-100G Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 155

Figure 61: PME-100G Block Diagram............................................................................................................ 155
Figure 62: Z-Series PSW-100G2W Packet Module ...................................................................................... 160
Figure 63: PSW-100G2W Functional Block Diagram .................................................................................. 161
Figure 64: PSW-100G2W Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 162
Figure 65: Z77 TSW-10G10 Module .............................................................................................................. 166
Figure 66: TSW-10G10 Functional Block Diagram ...................................................................................... 167
Figure 67: TSW-10G10 Configuration Example ........................................................................................... 167
Figure 68: TSW-10G10 Card Aggregation Example .................................................................................... 168
Figure 69: Z-Series LAC-8 Module ................................................................................................................. 171
Figure 70: LAC-8 Block Diagram .................................................................................................................... 172
Figure 71: LAC-4P Wiring Example ............................................................................................................... 175
Figure 72: SFT-8 Module ................................................................................................................................ 176
Figure 73: SFT-8 Module Trunk and Client Interfaces ................................................................................ 176
Figure 74: SFT-8 Block Diagram .................................................................................................................... 178
Figure 75: Z-Series SFT-10G16 Module ........................................................................................................ 180
Figure 76: SFT-10G16 Block Diagram ........................................................................................................... 182
Figure 77: Z-Series MSE-1482 Module ......................................................................................................... 185
Figure 78: MSE-1482 Trunk and Client Interfaces ...................................................................................... 185
Figure 79: MSE-1482 Any-to-Any Cross-Connect Capabilities ................................................................... 186
Figure 80: MSE-1482 Path (UPSR or SNCP) and Line Protection .............................................................. 187
Figure 81: MSE-1482 Block Diagram ............................................................................................................ 188
Figure 82: FLX-216i Functional Block Diagram ............................................................................................ 192
Figure 83: FLX-216i Block Diagram ............................................................................................................... 193
Figure 84: WSS-402 and WSS-404 Single-slot Modules.............................................................................. 196
Figure 85: AWG-40 External Module ............................................................................................................ 196
Figure 86: Z77 Shelf, WSS-402, DTM-8, and AWG-40 Two-Degree Configuration Example .................. 197
Figure 87: WSS-402 AMP Optical RX and TX Paths ..................................................................................... 198
Figure 88: OFX-4 Module – External Optical Fabric Cross-Connect ......................................................... 198
Figure 89: WSS-404 Four-Degree Optical Switching ................................................................................... 199
Figure 90: WSS-402 DWDM Diagram ........................................................................................................... 201
Figure 91: WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Single-slot Modules .................................................................. 205
Figure 92: WSS-F4 Egress and Ingress Points ............................................................................................. 207

Figure 93: Z-Series Array Wave Guide (AWG-96) ........................................................................................ 209

Figure 94: Z77 Shelf, WSS-F2, LME-10G10, and AWG-96 Two-Degree Configuration Example ............ 210
Figure 95: WSS-F2 AMP Optical RX and TX Paths ....................................................................................... 210
Figure 96: OFX-4 and OFX-8 Modules – Optical Fabric Cross-Connects .................................................. 211
Figure 97: WSS-F4 Egress and Ingress Points ............................................................................................. 211
Figure 98: OFX-4 Fiber Pairs and MTP Connectors ..................................................................................... 212
Figure 99: MTP Connector Mapping ............................................................................................................. 213
Figure 100: WSS-F4 Four-Degree Optical Switching ................................................................................... 214
Figure 101: WSS-F8 Eight-Degree Optical Switching .................................................................................. 215
Figure 102: OLA Modules ............................................................................................................................... 219
Figure 103: OLA-200/OLA-201 EDFA modules and OLA-010 Raman module application example .... 224
Figure 104: Z77 with XC-2800 (Rear View) ................................................................................................... 232
Figure 105: Z77 XC-2800 Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 232
Figure 106: Optical Protection Group Example .......................................................................................... 235
Figure 107: Optical Protection using Transport Protection Module ........................................................ 237
Figure 108: Optical Protection Switch .......................................................................................................... 242
Figure 109: Optical Protection Switch 1+1 Protection ............................................................................... 242
Figure 110: Local/Remote Switch on Control Module ............................................................................... 243
Figure 111: PSW UNI to PSW UNI Backplane Connection through the XC-2800 .................................... 247
Figure 112: PME to PSW Connection ............................................................................................................ 247
Figure 113: Fiber Jumper Connection - 3D Shelf View ............................................................................... 248
Figure 114: PSW to TSW Connection ............................................................................................................ 248
Figure 115: PME NNI to TSW NNI Node-to-Node Connection .................................................................. 251
Figure 116: Linear G.8031 Protected TESI Configuration .......................................................................... 252
Figure 117: Network ERP G.8032 Protected TESI Configuration .............................................................. 253
Figure 118: LAD-2P Block Diagram ............................................................................................................... 263
Figure 119: LAD-2G Block Diagram .............................................................................................................. 263
Figure 120: LAD-8E Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) Control Points .................................................... 264
Figure 121: LAD-8X VOA Control Points ....................................................................................................... 265
Figure 122: LAD-40E/LAD-96E Location of Optical Attenuation/Gain Control Points ............................ 267
Figure 123: Four-Wave 10G Transport Application with LAD-4/LAD-4A .................................................. 275
Figure 124: Eight-Wave 10G Transport Application with LAD-8/A/E/i/X .................................................. 276
Figure 125: OC-48/STM-16 Transport .......................................................................................................... 277

Figure 126: Application with a Pair of PME Modules – Each PME Supports Two 10 GbE Trunks ........ 278
Figure 127: Z-Series 10G Ring with a Single PME Module ......................................................................... 279
Figure 128: Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO ...................................................................................... 280
Figure 129: Z77 Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO ............................................................................... 281
Figure 130: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Application ................................................................................. 283
Figure 131: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Functionality - Route Diversity ................................................ 283
Figure 132: MSE-1482 Path Cross-Connect Application ............................................................................ 284
Figure 133: MSE-1482 Path Level Capability ............................................................................................... 284
Figure 134: MSE-1482 Ethernet over SONET Application .......................................................................... 285
Figure 135: WSS-402 Network Configuration / Regeneration................................................................... 287
Figure 136: Z22 - Aggregation, Transport, and Edge Access ..................................................................... 288
Figure 137: Z22, Z33, and Z77 Collector Rings ............................................................................................ 289
Figure 138: Z22 Collector Ring Node Configuration................................................................................... 289
Figure 139: Fuse Assignment for Two Fan Modules .................................................................................. 302
Figure 140: Fuse Assignment for Three Fan Modules ............................................................................... 303
Figure 141: Single Physical LAN Example .................................................................................................... 307
Figure 142: Collocated Planet Operate Server Example ............................................................................ 308
Figure 143: Non-Collated Planet Operate Server Example ....................................................................... 309
Figure 144: Multiple Physical LANs Example............................................................................................... 310
Figure 145: Collocated Planet Operate Server Sharing Same LAN as the Gateway Z-Series Node ..... 311
Figure 146: Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes ................... 312
Figure 147: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server and Gateway Node Separated by One or More
Routers ............................................................................................................................................................. 313
Figure 148: Non-Collocated Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes ...................................... 315
Figure 149: Collocated Planet Operate Server and Z-Series Nodes......................................................... 317
Figure 150: Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes ................... 319
Figure 151: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server and Z-Series Nodes Separated by a Router........ 320
Figure 152: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes .......... 322
Figure 153: Broadband Network Design Example with IGMP Snooping ................................................ 329
Figure 154: Dual-Homed Linear Protection and Multi-Chassis LAG ........................................................ 331
Figure 155: Linear Chain – Slot and Line Card Assignments ..................................................................... 347
Figure 156: Typical Z33 and Z77 Ring Configuration ................................................................................. 348
Figure 157: Ring Configuration with WSS-402 Cards Only in a Node Site ............................................... 349

Figure 158: Optical Module Transceiver Interoperability Table ............................................................... 354

Figure 159: Hardware Interoperability Table .............................................................................................. 355
Figure 160: ROADM and LAD Interoperability Table .................................................................................. 356

New in this Release / About this Guide
New in Release 10.0

• Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping: PSW line cards now support
IGMP snooping.
IGMP snooping enables support of IPTV services on DSLAMs or other video delivery access
devices with low capacity uplinks. With this feature CyOS validates that you can enable IGMP
on an E-VLAN flow domain. Using Planet Operate, you can enable or disable IGMP on a per
flow domain basis.
The system provides the following options via Planet Operate:
 Enable or disable the IGMP router interface on a per UNI flow point basis.
 Ability to associate user-defined or system-created IGMP snooping profile on a flow
domain.
 Ability to create and delete a user-defined IGMP snooping profile.
 Retrieve and view snooped or group addresses on a per flow domain basis.
 Ability to flush and refresh the group addresses table.
 Ability to view IGMP message statistics on a flow point under the Ethernet Statistics
panels when you have enabled the On-Demand Statistics setting.
See IGMP Snooping starting on page 327.
• Dual-Node Resiliency — multi-chassis LAG and multi-chassis dual-homed linear
protection: The multi-chassis LAG feature is one part of the overall feature, dual-node
resiliency, that provides protection to a pair of upstream Broadband Network Gateways
(BNGs). The multi-chassis dual-homed linear protection feature controls traffic switching. The
dual-homed linear protection is a multi-chassis or multi-node protection scheme using the
ITU G.8031 standard on Z-Series nodes that are connected in linear optical ring.
This feature provides the ability to support dual nodes with node redundancy in hub
locations with connectivity to Broadband Node Gateways using Multi-Chassis protocol. The
primary objective is to add network resiliency in large hub locations where significant
amounts of traffic are hubbed, by protecting against chassis failures. The MC-LAG
configuration is active/standby where active or standby state is communicated over LACP
protocol from the BNGs to the Z-Series nodes. This feature is supported by the PSW family of
cards.
See Multi-Chassis LAG and Dual-Node Resiliency starting on page 330.

• PSW-100G2W line card: The PSW-100G2W packet line card is a 2x100G module with the
same feature set as other line cards in the PSW platform but with two coherent 100G
interfaces using WaveLogic Nano (WL3n) technology. The module is a high-capacity switch
module for aggregating and grooming Ethernet services. The PSW-100G2W module is
optimized for end-to-end packet transport solutions. The module supports standards-based
Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE) for increased network performance and scale. See
PSW-100G2W Packet Module starting on page 159.
• Configurable DC power alarm threshold: This feature provides the ability to modify the DC
power high and low alarm threshold values. You can configure the threshold on a per node
or shelf basis and apply by CyOS to all Z-Series modules.
Note: Modules installed in a Z-Series shelf have different power supply hardware with their
own scale factor for configuration. The voltage threshold value shown on the per-module
basis is the value programmed to the device and it is calculated from the shelf-level value
with this scale factor for the device.
• Z-Series and L-AMP shelf voltage threshold configuration support: The system supports
Z-Series and L-AMP shelf voltage threshold configuration. The minimum and maximum
voltage threshold values, set for the Z-Series or L-AMP shelf, are applied to all cards in the
shelf.
• Default route for node management: The system correctly accepts and redistributes OSPF
Link State Advertisement (LSAs) that describe a default route (LSA ID of “0.0.0.0”). This is done
transparently without the need of specific node configuration, although you will need to do
additional configuration to allow these default routes to be admitted into the system's Layer
3 routing table. This feature is in support of a new OSPF configuration where multiple,
redundant gateway nodes are leveraged. No conflicting routes will result on any pre-existing
Z-Series deployments after upgrading to Release 10.0.02.
See the Z-Series Data Communications Network Planning and Configuration Reference Guide,
Appendix A: Default Route for Node Management.
New in Release 9.0

• FLX-216i Laser Shutdown as FDI: The FLX216i module supports Laser Shutdown as Forward
Defect Indication (FDI) on client ports with signal type set to 1GE. See FLX-216i Multi-Rate
OTN Muxponder Module starting on page 191.
• FLX-216i Optical Protection: Planet Operate now provides unidirectional, non-revertive and
revertive 1+1 optical protection groups FLX-216i for optical ports in conjunction with the
passive Transport Protection Module (TPM). See Optical Protection Groups starting on page
234, Optical Protection Groups Equipment starting on page 234, and Optical Protection
Groups – Rules and Guidelines starting on page 237.
• OLA-200 and OLA-201: The OLA-200 and OLA-201 modules now support amplified networks
equipped with LAD-4A, LAD-8A, LAD-8E and LAD-8X modules. See OLA Modules starting on
page 218
• PSW-10G20: The Z33 shelf supports installation of PSW-10G20 modules in slots 1 through 4.
See Packet Card-to-Packet Card Interoperability – Z33 starting on page 249.
• MEF Carrier Ethernet 2.0 Certification: MEF CE2.0 testing and certification is planned for
PSW-618 (part number 800-0123-02), PSW-10G10 (part number 800-0133-02), and PSW-100G
(part number 800-0137-02) modules.

• WSS-F Modules Support Interconnection between 40-channel and 96-channel ROADM

Networks: WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules support interconnection between
40-channel and 96-channel ROADM networks in the following cases:
 Internodal line side of 40-channel module (WSS-402/404) to line side of 96-channel
module (WSS-F2/F4/F8) ROADM interconnection.
 Internodal line side of 96-channel module (WSS-F2/F4/F8 module, operating in
40-channel mode) to line side of 96-channel module ROADM interconnection.
Due to optical incompatibility, it is not possible to optically express between a 40-channel
ROADM and a 96-channel ROADM.
See WSS Modules Paired with the AWG-96 starting on page 208. For information on
changing the module grid mode setting from 96- to 40-channel support, refer to the topic,
"WSS Modules" in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user guide.
New in Release 8.0

• LME-10G10d: A new version of the LME-10G10 module, called the LME-10G10d (part number
800-138-02), supports configuration of the OSPF in-band management via the general
communications channel (GCC). All references to the LME-10G10 module in this guide also
refer to the LME10G10d; functionality is identical for these two modules; the only difference
is the LME-10G10d supports GCC. See LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder/Transponder
Module starting on page 114.
• PSW-10G20: The Z-Series PSW-10G20 module is an Ethernet switching and transport module
for the Z-Series packet-optical transport platform (P-OTP). The module is a high-capacity
20-port 10GbE switch module for Ethernet aggregation and end-to-end packet transport
solutions. The PSW-10G20 module supports twenty 10GbE/OTU2/OTU2e/OTU1e ports.
Twelve ports are capable of OTU configuration, the remaining eight ports are capable of
running at 1/10 GbE. The PSW-10G20 module supports 200G fully non-blocking packet
switching for all frame sizes. For details, see PSW-10G20 Packet Module starting on page
142.
• PSW-10G20 MEF Carrier Ethernet 2.0 Certification
New in Release 7.0

• LAD-96E: The LAD-96E module is the latest addition to the Z-Series Lambda Add/Drop (LAD)
modules. The LAD-96E module, with pre-amp and booster amplifier, combines with an
associated AWG-96 Array Wave Guide module to support add/drop traffic. Individual
wavelengths are added and/or dropped using the passive AWG-96 2 RU module. The AWG-96
provides the ability to multiplex and de-multiplex any of the 96 channels supported by the
LAD-96E module with 50 GHz channel spacing. You can install the module in Z33 and Z77
shelves. The LAD-96E module has a reach of 28 dB (112 km nominal) with 10G XFPs and 100G
coherent optics (DTM-100G, DTM-100G2, and Coherent CFP). For details, see LAD Modules
starting on page 80.

• DTM-100G2: The Z-Series DTM-100G2 is a dual-port 100 Gbps single-slot transponder

module providing DWDM interfaces for Z-Series Z22 (–48V model), Z33, and Z77 100 Gbps
transponder solutions. The DTM-100G2 module is fully compatible with existing Z-Series
DWDM components including LAD modules and WSS ROADM modules. This allows the
mixing of 10G and 100G waves over the same fiber. The DTM-100G2 module receives a C
Form-Factor Pluggable (CFP)-based 100 GbE and generates a 100 Gbps ITU grid wave. On the
client side, the DTM-100G2 module accepts either 100GE or OTU4 (GFEC). On the line side,
the OTU4 is encoded with either standard G.709 GFEC or a higher gain HG-FEC. CyOS 7.0
working in conjunction with Planet Operate 15.02 provides non-revertive 1+1 optical
protection groups for DTM-100G2 optical ports. Optical protection groups, created in
association with the passive Transport Protection Module (TPM), provide reliable protection
for facility and hardware failures. For details, see DTM-100G2 Module starting on page 105.
• OLA-010: The OLA-010 module utilizes Raman technology and functions as a uni-directional
amplifier to provide all-band wavelength coverage for up to 96 optical channels. The OLA-010
module replaces existing external Raman chassis. You can install the module in Z22, Z33, and
Z77 shelves. Coupled with the Z-Series ROADM and DWDM modules, the OLA-010 module
extends the reach of an optical span by 13.5 dB and supports regional/long-haul network
applications. See OLA Modules starting on page 218.
• DTM-100G2 and LME-10G10 Optical Protection: Planet Operate now provides non-revertive
1+1 optical protection groups for DTM-100G2 and LME-10G10 optical ports in conjunction
with the passive Transport Protection Module (TPM). For details, see Optical Protection
Groups starting on page 234.
• Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE): PSW-618, PSW-10G10, PSW-100G line cards and Planet
Operate support Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE). See PSW-10G10 Packet Module starting on
page 135, PSW-618 Packet Module starting on page 148, and PSW-100G Packet Module
• PME OTU2e SyncE support: The PME-412 and PSW-216i modules and Planet Operate
support SyncE for ports provisioned with a signal type of OTU2e. See Synchronous Ethernet
New in Release 6.0

• WSS-F8 and OFX-8 modules: The Z-Series WSS-F8 module provides 96-channel,
wavelength-selectable switching and reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM)
capabilities with automated provisioning, power balancing, and monitoring for the Z-Series
packet-optical transport platforms (P-OTPs). To simplify fiber connectivity, an OFX-8 optical
mesh interconnects up to eight WSS-F8 modules. See WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
Wavelength Selective Switch Modules starting on page 205.
• OLA-200 and OLA-201: The Metro/short span OLA-200 module and the long-haul OLA-201
module provide amplification for the WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules operating in
either 40-channel or 96-channel mode. The OLA-201 module additionally offers an integrated
Optical Channel Monitor (OCM) for automatic spectral tilt adjustment, removing the previous
four-hop restriction due to tilt, and extending the node-to-node span capacity by more than
60% before regeneration compared to the L-AMP shelf. See OLA Modules starting on page
218.

• LAD-96: The non-amplified 96-channel terminal multiplexer works in conjunction with the
passive AWG-96 module for add/drop traffic. The LAD-96 module provides point-to-point
data center connectivity as a primary application. See LAD Modules starting on page 80.
• DTM-100G optical protection: Planet Operate now provides non-revertive 1+1 optical
protection groups for DTM-100G optical ports in conjunction with the passive Transport
Protection Module (TPM). See Optical Protection Groups starting on page 234.
• DTM-8 and DTM-100G protection switching: CYOS now supports 50 ms maximum switch
time for LOS conditions and sub-150 ms typical switch time for other faults.
• LME-10G10 Transponder mode: The LME-10G10 can now act as a 10-port transponder
module, with client-side support for OC-192/STM64, 1 GbE, 8G Fiber Channel, 10G Fiber
Channel, and OTU2. See LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder/Transponder Module starting on
page 114.
New in Release 5.4

For descriptions of new features provided in CyOS Release 5.4, see the "New Release 5.4 Features"
section in the Z-Series CyOS Release Notes 5.4 available in the portal library. Release 5.4 does not
introduce new Z-Series equipment. Additionally, see "New Features in Planet Operate 14.05" in the
Planet Operate Release Notes 14.05 available in the portal library.
New in Release 5.2

Release 5.2 of the Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide described the following equipment and
features:
• WSS-F2 and WSS-F4 modules. The Z-Series WSS-F2 and WSS-F4 modules provide
wavelength-selectable switching and reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM)
capabilities with automated provisioning, power balancing, and monitoring for the Z-Series
packet-optical transport platforms (P-OTPs). See WSS-F2 and WSS-F4 Wavelength Selective
Switch Modules starting on page 205.
• LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder Module. The Z-Series LME-10G10 is a multiservice 100G OTN
muxponding module optimized for network transport applications. The LME-10G10
complements the Z-Series DTM-100G coherent transponder module to provide an
end-to-end packet and OTN transport solution. All shelves in the Z-Series platform support
the LME-10G10 module. See LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder Module starting on page 114.
For configuration examples, see Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations starting on
page 291.
• PSW-100G. The Z-Series PSW-100G module is an Ethernet switching and transport module
for the Z-Series packet-optical transport platform (P-OTP). The module is optimized for
high-capacity Ethernet aggregation and end-to-end packet transport solutions. See
PSW-100G Packet Module starting on page 154.
• PSW line cards supported across all Z-Series platforms. See Packet Line Cards –
Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245, Z22 Card Installation Guidelines
starting on page 38, Z33 Card Installation Guidelines starting on page 48, and Z77 Card
Installation Guidelines starting on page 58.

• FLX-216i module. Support for FC-100, FC-200, FC-400 Fiber Channel signals, and ODUflex.
Also in this Release, Trunk-to-trunk port (express) traffic on the same card or across dual
cards. See FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN Muxponder Module starting on page 191. For
configuration examples, see Application 11: FLX-216i Configurations starting on page 290.
• DTM-100G supports link down propagation (also referred to as Laser Shutdown as FDI).
This guide includes packet line card interoperability information for CyOS Release 5.2 and Planet
Operate Release 14.02. See Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and Interoperability starting on
page 245.
New in Release 5.0

Release 5.0 of the Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide introduced the following equipment and
features:
• BOSS2 shelf control card. The BOSS2 supports enhanced packet scalability, including support
for more than 500 flow domains. Use the BOSS2 card for Z77 shelves configured with the
XC-2800 switch fabric modules. See Broadband Operating System Supervisor.
• PSW-10G10 10-port 10 GbE packet switch module. See PSW-10G10 Packet Module starting
on page 135.
• PSW-618 24-port Ethernet switching and transport module. See PSW-618 Packet Module
• In this Release, the DTM-100G line card supports an OTU4 client-side interface. The interface
supports 100G wavelength regeneration applications and future LME transport applications.
The client side of the DTM-100G module accepts either 100 GbE or OTU4 (GFEC) and re-maps
the client into an OTU4 on the line side.
Intended Audience
The primary audience for this guide includes network planners and engineers, and other personnel
responsible for planning and engineering carrier networks. It is also a guide for personnel involved in
configuring, administrating, and operating the Z-Series shelves and third-party equipment. It
assumes you understand standard telecom terminology and practices.
The guide provides information about system features, engineering guidelines, optical design,
configurations, applications, and technical specifications for the Z-Series platform: the Z22 shelf, the
Z33 shelf, and the Z77 shelf.
Note: In this guide, "Z33" refers to the standard C-Temp Z33 shelf and the Z33
I-Temp shelf. "Z77" refers to the Z77 and Z77 shelf v2.
Supported Web Browsers

The following web browsers have been verified for viewing Z-Series, Planet Operate, and Blue Planet
HTML-based technical documentation downloaded from the portal library:
• Mozilla Firefox
• Microsoft Internet Explorer v8 and v9

Additional web browsers may be supported in the future.

Note: When viewing an HTML-based user guide extracted from a zip file downloaded from the portal
library, you must use either Mozilla Firefox or Internet Explorer (v8 or v9). Google Chrome cannot
open the index.htm file from a local hard drive.
Related Documentation
The documentation suite related to Blue Planet, Planet Operate, optical and packet transport, and
the Z22, Z33, Z77, L-AMP shelves, and managing third-party equipment consists of:
• Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide
• Z77 Installation and Safety Guide
• L-AMP Installation and Safety Guide
• Planet Operate User Guides
 Getting Started
 Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources
 Trails and Services
 Intra-Node Cross-Connects
 SONET/SDH and Optical Protection Groups
• Blue Planet Administration Guide
• Packet Switching User Guide
• Z-Series Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide
• Z-Series Data Communications Network Planning and Configuration Reference Guide
• Optical Protection Switch User Guide
• Planet View Network Administrator Guide
• Planet View Guest Administrator Guide
• Planet View Network and Guest User Guide
• Planet Inventory User Guide
• TL-1 Reference Command Guide
• CLI Reference Command Guide
Note: In this guide, the terms "shelf," "chassis," "node," "system," "Network
Element" and "platform" may be used to see the Z22, Z33, and Z77 shelves. In this
guide, the terms "unit," "device," "shelf," "Network Element," "node," and "system"
may be used to see the L-AMP shelf.

Note
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
the user will be required to correct the interference at own expense.

Z-Series Shelves
This section describes the Z-Series platform: the Z22, Z33, Z77 shelves and the L-AMP shelf.
In This Chapter
Z22 Shelf ..................................................................................................... 35
Z33 Shelf ..................................................................................................... 44
Z77 Shelf v2 ................................................................................................ 55
L-AMP Shelf................................................................................................. 61
Z22 Shelf
The Z22 Industrial Temperature (I-Temp) shelf is a compact, cost-effective member of the Z-Series
multi-layer transport networking platforms. The Z22 shelf assembly is a 2 RU chassis offered as a
+24 VDC model and a –48 VDC model.
The Z22 system supports for edge and access node applications. Z22 deployments enable service
providers to scale packet services and leverage existing services and infrastructure. It optimizes their
networks with multi-layer networking using integrated DWDM transport and 100G capacity modules.
You can configure a Z22 shelf equipped with Z-Series trunk-side PME-216i modules to support a
variety of network functions, including:
• Outside Plant (OSP) cabinet deployments
• Packet switch providing advanced Layer 2 Ethernet services, access grooming and
connection-oriented Ethernet
 Carrier-grade SLA transport performance with Y.1731 OAM capability
 Advanced aggregation and MEF services (EPL, EVPL, E-LAN, and E-VLAN)
• Integrated G.709 OTN/DWDM mapping (OTU2) for enhanced performance and management
• Multi-channel DWDM with full optical add/drop multiplexing
• Gigabit Ethernet services
• OEO switching

Figure 1: Front and Rear View of the Z22 -48V Shelf Layout
Additionally, a Z22 shelf equipped with Z-Series WSS line cards supports 2-, 4-, and 8-degree
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM). For details, see WSS-402 and WSS-404
Wavelength Selective Switch Modules starting on page 195 and WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
Wavelength Selective Switch Modules starting on page 205. (To support more than two degrees, a
Z22 shelf must be added to a Multi-Node Group.)
Note: The iLAN interface on the rear of the Z22 chassis is reserved for future use.
Z22 Shelf Description

The Z22 I-Temp system employs advanced technologies, with high-density modularity in a compact
2 RU high, 19" (48.26 cm) wide chassis. Optimized for low entry costs, the Z22 shelf has two
horizontal service module slots and two common equipment slots supporting advanced services and
network topologies.
• Line card (module) slots: 2
• Common control module slots: 2 (A and B)
Note: If you configure the Z22 shelf with an in-chassis LAD-2P or LAD-2G module, you must
install the module in common control slot B.
• 1+1 equipment protection
• ITU timing
• All front access line cards and card interface connections
• All Z-Series modules are hot-swappable
• Power connectors: Dual-feed Quick-Connect Terminal Block
• Alarm connectors: Quick-Connect Terminal Block
• Management connectivity (rear management interface): RJ-45 (100/1000Base-T)
 100Base-T Half Duplex, 100Base-T Full Duplex
 1000Base-T Full Duplex

All shelf components are modular; you can remove and replace components in the field. This
provides full serviceability and a simple upgrade path for future expansion. Each Z22 shelf ships with
the following items:
• (1) Front protective shield
• (1) Cable management guide
• (2) 10-position plug terminal block, 3.81 mm, 16–28 AWG
• (1) Ground cable
• (1) Power cable assembly
• (1) Fan module
• (1) Fan air filter
Install Z22 shelves in accordance with the Z22 Installation and Safety Guide. This will ensure correct
installation of modules, all associated wire management, power and grounding requirements, and
related components.
Fan Module Alarm, Fan, Filter, and ACO LED Detail

Refer to Z-Series Fan Module Alarm, Fan, Filter, and ACO LED Detail starting on page 332 for
information.
Redundancy and Protection

• Redundant fans
• Redundant power connections
• Equipment Protection: 1:1 for all common cards and service modules
• Carrier Ethernet Protection:
 IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
 IEEE 802.3Qay Path Protection
 ITU-T G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection
• SONET/SDH Protection:
 1+1 APS/MSP
 UPSR/SNCP

Z22 Card Installation Guidelines

The following tables show the Z22 shelf slot restrictions and the guidelines for line card placement.
Install CEMi cards in slots A and B only. If deploying the in-chassis LAD-2P or LAD-2G module, you
must install the LAD module in slot B.
+24V Z22 Shelf

The PME-216i +24V I-Temp line card is identical in function to the –48V I-Temp PME-216i line card,
but is designed to operate in +24-volt applications supported by the Z22 +24V model. Voltage range
for the +24 Volt PME-216i line card is +18 to +30 Vdc.
Line Cards Slot A Slot B Slot 1 Slot 2
CEMi
LAD-2P or LAD-2G
PME-216i (+24V)
Important Note! — At least one PME-216i line card must be installed in slots 1
and/or 2 of the +24V Z22 shelf to act as the shelf manager.
Important Note! — When using particular Z-Series line cards (see following list)
as the shelf controller (in slots 1 and 2) in a Z22 or Z33 shelf and the CEM B card
is active, you cannot connect to the shelf using the CEM-B craft port.
Workaround: Perform a switchover of the CEM cards to switch CEM-B to standby
and CEM-A to active. Use the now active CEM-A craft port to connect to the shelf.
(To set the CEM-A card to active, switch the CEM-B card from active to standby.
From the Planet Operate main menu, select Node > Reset Modules. In the Reset
Node Linecard Modules dialog box, in the card tree panel, select CEM-B. Select
the Vote Standby option button and click Reset.)
Use the workaround, provided in the previous Important Note, when the following line cards
are acting as a shelf controller in slots 1 and 2:
• DTM-100G • PSW-618 • WSS-F2

• DTM-100G2 • PSW-10G10 • WSS-F4
• FLX 216i • PSW-100G • WSS-F8
• LME-10G10 • PSW-100G2W
Note: If you are commissioning the shelf, remove the CEM-B card during the commissioning process.
Note: In Release 8.0 and higher, the Z33 shelf does not support installing a PSW-10G20 line card in
slots 1 to 4.

–48V Z22 Shelf
Line Cards Slot A Slot B Slot 1 Slot 2
CEMi
LAD-2P or LAD-2G
2.5G-LME4
DTM-8
DTM-100G
DTM-100G2
FLX-216i
LME-10G10
MSE-1482
OLA-010
OLA-200
OLA-201
OLA-010
PME-216i (–48V)
PME-412
PSW-618
PSW-10G10
PSW-10G20
PSW-100G
PSW-100G2W
SFT-8
SFT-10G16
WSS-402
WSS-404
WSS-F2
WSS-F4
WSS-F8
Important! — You must install at least one of the listed Z-Series line cards in slot 1
or 2 of the –48V Z22 shelf to act as the shelf manager.

The following table shows the connectivity methods regarding card-to-card compatibility and
interoperability of the Z-Series packet line cards for CyOS Release 10.0 and higher when
installed in a Z22 shelf.
PME UNI PME NNI PSW UNI PSW NNI
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PME UNI Backplane Backplane
Not Supported Not Supported
Connection Connection
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PME NNI Backplane Backplane
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PSW UNI Backplane Backplane
Card Pair Card Pair
N/A N/A
PSW NNI Backplane Backplane
Notes:
• The Z22 shelf does not support the TSW-10G10 line card.
• You can install PSW line cards in a Z22 shelf.
• Do not mix PSW and PME line cards in a Z22 shelf.
• Z22 –48V shelf — when installing PME line cards in slots 1 and 2, you must install PME line
cards of the same card type.
• Z22 +24V shelf — install only PME-216i line cards. You must install at least one PME-216i line
card in slot 1 or slot 2 to act as the shelf controller/manager.
For details on Packet line card connectivity methods, card-to-card compatibility, and interoperability
for all Z-Series packet line cards installed in Z-Series shelves, see Packet Line Cards – Compatibility
and Interoperability starting on page 245 in the Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide.
In-Band Management Channel

The LAD-2P and LAD-2G modules, deployed in Z22 systems, do not provide an OSC. The PME and
PSW line cards have an in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in bandwidth to provide
inter-node communication. In the Planet Operate Transport Resources set the PME (or PSW) 10G
ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab) to "10GE LAN" (default). When the PME
(or PSW) 10G fiber port is provisioned with a signal type of 10GE LAN or 10GE WAN, the system will
use the PME (or PSW) line card in-band management channel to provide node-to-node
communication.

PSW-100G2W In-Band Management Channel

The PSW-100G2W module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the shelf is configured with a PSW-100G2W line card and the shelf does not have a LAD
or WSS/AWG module or the traffic-carrying PSW interfaces are not fiber patched to an installed LAD
or WSS/AWG module. The WL3 100G fiber port can support the Topology Discovery and Routing
parameters automatically (enabled by default) and the system will use the PSW line card in-band
management channel to provide node-to-node communication.
If a LAD or WSS/AWG module is providing the OSC and the traffic-carrying PSW interfaces are fiber
patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the Topology Discovery and Routing parameters to
disabled and the PSW line card 100 Mbps of bandwidth that was reserved for the in-band
management channel returns to the PSW WL3 100G fiber port for payload. Disabling Topology
Discovery also prevents the system from displaying a topology line in addition to the OSC line to the
adjacent node in the 3D Network view tab.
LAD and WSS Link Connections

In a ring configuration, connect LAD and WSS odd-slot fibers to even-slot fibers in a clockwise
direction.
In a linear chain configuration, connect LAD and WSS odd-slot fibers to even-slot fibers in the
adjacent shelf in a left to right direction.
Important! — If using an attenuator, place it on the Receive (RX) port of the LAD/WSS card.
Do NOT place it on the Transmit (TX) port.
Card (Boot-up, Operational, PLL Synchronization, and Port) Status and LED Sequence
Refer to the following topics for detailed information regarding:
• Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Boot-up Status and LED Sequence starting on page
334
• Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Operational Status and LED Sequence - Release
8.0 and Higher starting on page 336
• Line Card SYNC LED Sequence during PLL Synchronization to the Active Controller Card
starting on page 338
• Line Card Port Status and Alarm LEDs starting on page 340
CEMi Module: +24 Volt

The CEMi +24V model is identical in function to the –48V CEMi card, but is designed to operate in
24-volt applications supported by the Z22 +24V shelf model. Voltage range for the +24 volt CEMi card
is 18 to 30 Vdc.
For CEMi card feature details and specifications, see Common Equipment Module (CEMi) starting
on page 50.

Z22 Physical
• Height: 3.5" / 88.9 mm (2 RU)
• Width: 19.00" / 483 mm
• Depth: 14.85" / 377 mm
• Weight: 15 lbs. / 6.8 kg (with 2 CEMi cards and fan tray)
• Operating temperature: –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C (I-Temp)
Z22 External Timing

The Z22 system supports the following timing inputs/outputs used for network synchronization:
• 2 T1/E1 outputs
• 2 T1/E1 inputs
Access the timing inputs and outputs through the 8-position pluggable terminal block on the rear
side of the Z22 chassis.
The following table shows the external timing connector pinouts:
Pin Description
1 T1/E1 TX1_+ (Output)

2 T1/E1 TX1_- (Output)
3 T1/E1 RX1_+ (Input)
4 T1/E1 RX1_- (Input)

Z22 Alarms
The Z22 platform supports system and environmental alarms. System alarms include Critical, Major,
Minor, and Failsafe. The environmental alarms include four inputs and two outputs. Access alarms
through the combination 20-position pluggable terminal block on the rear side of the Z22 chassis.
NO +
CRIT IN1
C COM
NO +
MAJ IN2
C COM
NO +
MIN IN3 ALARMS
C COM
NC +
FAIL IN4
C COM
NO NO
OUT2 OUT1
C C
Figure 2: Z22 System and Environmental Alarms Connection
The following table shows the connector pinouts for the system and environmental alarms:
Pin Description Pin Description

1 CRIT_NO 1 IN1_+
2 CRIT_C 2 IN1_COM
3 MAJ_NO 3 IN2_+
4 MAJ_C 4 IN2_COM
5 MIN_NO 5 IN3_+
6 MIN_C 6 IN3_COM
7 FAIL_NC 7 IN4_+
8 FAIL_C 8 IN4_COM
9 OUT2_NO 9 OUT1_NO
10 OUT2_C 10 OUT1_C
For details on configuring environmental alarms, see the Z-Series Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Guide.

Z22 Shelf Power

Feeds: 2 1-A & 1-B
Voltage range: –48V Configuration –40 to –60 Vdc Guaranteed Operation
+24V Configuration 18 to 30 Vdc Guaranteed Operation
Max voltage: –/+100 Vdc Non-operational, no damage
Max current: –48V Configuration 10 Amps
+24V Configuration 20 Amps
Note: Use Planet Design as a guideline based on the total configured system current draw.
You must size fuses according to NEC standards or local site practice.
Z33 Shelf
The Z33 Industrial Temperature (I-Temp), 400 Gbps packet-optical transport shelf is a compact,
cost-effective member of the Z-Series multi-layer transport networking platforms. The system
provides multi-layer add/drop multiplexing (MADM) and transport functions in one fully integrated
system. The system’s shared mesh protection provides full protection and restoration for all services.
The Z33 shelf is a smaller version of the Z77 chassis intended for lower capacity and more
cost-sensitive edge applications. Z33 deployments enable service providers to scale packet services,
leverage existing services and infrastructure. It also optimizes their networks with multi-layer
networking using 2.5G CWDM and 10G DWDM transport.
You can configure a Z33 system equipped with Z-Series interchangeable trunk-side modules to
support a variety of network functions, including:
• Fully Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer (ROADM) with Optical-Optical-Optical
(OOO) switching and optical pass-through
• Standalone SONET or SDH aggregation and transport
• Packet switching providing advanced Layer 2 Ethernet services, access grooming, and
connection-oriented Ethernet
• OTN digital wrapper functionality
• 10G/100G DWDM transport
• Multi-channel DWDM with full optical add/drop multiplexing
• CWDM channels of up to eight 2.5G wavelengths
• Aggregation, grooming and STS-1 level switching of SONET/SDH and GbE services from
existing Ethernet switches, routers, DSLAMs, DLC/BLCs, and third-party products
• Transponding Gigabit Ethernet and OC-3/12/48 SONET STM-1/4/16 SDH services
• Any combination of these

Fan Module
Fan Filter
CEMi A CEMi B
Front View
Power
System Alarms
Environmental Alarms
Timing
Management Interface
Rear View
Figure 3: Z33 Front and Rear Shelf Layout
Using GbE and 10GbE switching and transport, the Z33 platform provides 2.5G CWDM transport, 10G
DWDM transport, OTN digital wrapper functionality, and multi-layer optimization and management.
The Z33, with WSS modules installed and paired with a passive AWG optical patch panel, provides a
full ROADM with OOO switching and optical pass through. The WSS-402 provides 2 degrees and the
WSS-404 provides 4 degrees of 40-wavelength cross-connect capacity. The WSS-F2 provide 2
degrees, the WSS-F4 provides 4 degrees, and the WSS-F8 provides 8 degrees of 96-wavelength
cross-connect capacity in a single Z33 shelf. Each WSS module provides optical add-drop
multiplexing capability in the 1550 nm band across pre-defined ITU channel designations.
The WSS-402 and WSS-404 provide 100 GHz spacing. The WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 provide
50 GHz spacing. See AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments starting on page 225 and AWG-96
Wavelength Assignments starting on page 226.
The shelf is optimized for edge and access node applications. You can equip the 5 RU chassis with six
line card slots and two common equipment modules with any combination of Ethernet, CWDM, and
DWDM line cards to support a range of advanced services and applications. Further scalability is
accomplished by simply adding additional Z33 shelves or by redeploying interchangeable Z33 line
cards into the larger-capacity Z77 platform for increased aggregation and grooming.
The Z33 shelf provides the following key features:
• Supports 1 to 40 lambda waves in ITU grid 100 GHz DWDM channel spacing using
LAD-40/LAD-40E modules or WSS-402/WSS-404 modules
• Supports 1 to 96 lambda waves in ITU grid 50 GHz DWDM channel spacing using LAD-96
modules or WSS-F2/WSS-F4/WSS-F8 modules
• Supports CWDM (20 nm spacing) capability with the addition of the LAC-8 module
• Supports addition of 2.5G waves using SFT-8 modules

• Supports 2, 4, and 8-degree configurations with WSS line cards

For more information, see WSS-402 and WSS-404 Wavelength Selective Switch Modules
starting on page 195 and WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Wavelength Selective Switch
Modules starting on page 205. (To support the maximum of eight degrees with WSS-F8 line
cards, you must add a Z33 shelf to a Multi-Node Group.)
• 6 service slots, 2 Common Equipment Module (CEMi) slots (A and B)
• All Z-Series modules are hot-swappable
• Over 100 Gbps per slot capacity
• Service cards are common with the Z-Series platform—the CEMi cards are specific to the Z33
and Z22 chassis
The card/slot restrictions are as follows:
• Slots 1 and 2 must be the first slots that are occupied in the chassis
• Slots 1 and 2 must contain a line card with management processing capability; these line
cards include all service Z-Series line cards and WSS line cards, but not any LAD or LAC-8
modules.
Chassis Capacity
• Packet: Up to 240 Gbps of protected services
• Optical:
 4-degree, 40-channel ROADM (WSS-404/AWG-40)
 4-degree, 96-channel ROADM (WSS-F4/AWG-96)
 4, 8, 40, or 96 channels, C-Band Terminal Mux
 Tunable or Fixed wavelength transceiver options

• Redundant fans
• Equipment Protection: 1:1 for all common cards and service modules
 1+1 APS/MSP
 UPSR/SNCP

Z33 Shelf Description

The Z33 I-Temp system employs advanced technologies, with high-density modularity in a compact
5 RU high, 19" (48.26 cm) wide chassis. Optimized for low entry costs, the Z33 shelf has six horizontal
service module slots and two common equipment slots supporting a wide range of advanced
services and network topologies.
• Line card (module) slots: 6
• Common control module slots: 2 (A and B)
• 1+1 equipment protection
• ITU timing
• All front access line cards and card interface connections
• Power connectors: Dual-feed Quick-Connect Terminal Block
• Alarm connectors: Quick-Connect Terminal Block
• Management connectivity (rear management interface): RJ-45 (100/1000Base-T)
All shelf components are modular—you can remove and replace components in the field. This
provides full serviceability and a simple upgrade path for future expansion. Each Z33 shelf ships with
following items:
• (1) Front protective shield
• (1) Cable management guide
• (1) Ground cable
• (1) Power cable assembly
• (1) Fan module
• (1) Fan air filter
Install Z33 shelves in accordance with the Z33 Installation and Safety Guide. This will ensure correct
related components.

information.


The following table shows Z33 slot restrictions and line card placement guidelines. Note that slots A
and B are reserved for the Common Equipment Modules (CEMi’s) and are not shown in the table.
You can install card pairs, where applicable, in slots 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6.
Line Cards Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6

2.5G-LME4
DTM-8
DTM-8G
DTM-100G
DTM-100G2
FLX-216i
LME-10G10
MSE-1482
OLA-010
OLA-200
OLA-201
PME-216i
PME-412
PSW-6181
PSW-10G101
PSW-10G201
PSW-100G1
PSW-100G2W1 N/A N/A
SFT-8
SFT-10G16
WSS-402
WSS-404
WSS-F2
WSS-F4
WSS-F8
LAD-4 N/A
LAD-4A N/A
LAD-8 N/A
LAD-8A N/A

Line Cards Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6
LAD-8E N/A
LAD-8i N/A
LAD-8X N/A
LAD-40 N/A
LAD-40E N/A
LAD-96 N/A
LAD-96E N/A
LAC-8 N/A
* Table shading indicates paired slots for applicable line cards.

1
Notes:
• Z33 slot and line card restrictions:
 Group 1: PSW-618, PSW-10G10, PSW-10G20, PSW-100G, and PSW-100G2W line cards
installed in Z33 slots 1 to 4 are designated Group 1.
 Group 2: PSW line cards installed in Z33 slots 5 and 6 are designated Group 2.
 Limitations:
o The system does not allow flow domains or NNI services (including fiber patches)
between line cards in Group 1 and Group 2.
o Slots 5 and 6 do not support the PSW-100G2W line card.
Important! — An existing Z33 shelf in the field requires a power upgrade prior to
installing the PSW-100G2W line card. For details on upgrading the shelf power, see the
Z33 Power Upgrade Guide (450-3708-700) available online in the Ciena doc portal. After
the shelf power upgrade, the Z33 shelf can support up to two PSW-100G2W line cards.
• Z33 Gbps backplane capability:
 Group 1: The Z33 mesh backplane supports up to 100 Gbps between each pair of cards
in the mesh (not just 100 Gbps shared among all four line cards of Group 1). For
example, the backplane can support 100 Gbps between PSW cards placed in slots 1 and
3, while simultaneously supporting an additional 100 Gbps between PSW line cards
placed in slots 2 and 4.
 Group 2: The Z33 backplane supports up to 200 Gbps between PSW line cards in slots 5
and 6, limited only by the traffic termination capacity of the specific PSW line cards
involved. The PSW-10G20 and PSW-100G2W line cards can terminate up to 200 Gbps;
other PSW line cards can terminate up to 100 Gbps. Slots and 6 do not support the
PSW-100G2W line card.
• For additional PSW install information, see "Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and
Interoperability starting on page 245" in the Packet Switching User Guide or the Z-Series
Engineering and Planning Guide.

Shelf Management
Install at least one of the following line cards in slots 1 and/or 2 of the Z33 shelf:
• 2.5G-LME4 • LME-10G10 • PME-216i • PSW-100G2W

• DTM-8 • OLA-200/201 • PSW-618 • SFT-8
• DTM-8G • FLX-216i • PSW-10G10 • SFT-10G16
• DTM-100G • MSE-1482 • PSW-10G20 • WSS-402/404
• DTM-100G2 • PME-412 • PSW-100G • WSS-F2/F4/F8
When installed in slots 1 and/or 2, these cards also act as shelf managers.
Common Equipment Module (CEMi)

The CEMi I-Temp module provides the timing subsystem, telco alarms, inventory management, fan
control, active/standby arbitration, and an integrated DCN for the Z22 and Z33 shelves.
• Power: 8 watts typical, 10 watts maximum
• Weight: 0.96 lbs. / 435 grams
• Height: 5.8" / 147 mm
• Depth: 11.5" / 292 mm
• Width: .9" / 23 mm
• Timing: Stratum 3
• Four Ethernet interfaces:
 Craft: 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
 iLAN: 2 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
 DCN: 1 x 100Base-FX SFP
The Data Communication Network (DCN) 100Base-FX SFP port provides an optional method for
supporting DCN management connectivity to the node.
The iLAN Ethernet interfaces provide DCN connectivity and make use of OSPF routing (iLAN-to-iLAN
connection). The iLAN ports can provide IP access to secondary shelves (Z22, Z77, and other Z33
nodes). For a description of the Z77 iLAN ports, see BOSS Termination Module starting on page 73.
Figure 4: Common Equipment Module (CEMi)

Note: You can co-locate a CEMi I-Temp module and a standard CEM C-Temp
module in the same Z33 shelf.
Important! — Multiple connections from a single CEMi module to different

far-end CEMi modules is supported in both point-to-point and ring topologies.
However, avoid multiple connections between the Ethernet ports (fiber or
copper) of two CEMi modules in the same shelf as this can result in an
inadvertent Ethernet loop that could severely affect system performance.
CEMi iLAN, DCN, and MSE-1482 Connectivity Options

The CEMi iLAN and DCN ports, in combination with the MSE-1482 line card, provide several
connectivity options and features depending on the application requirements and system
configuration. See the two example configurations described here.
When used with MSE-1482 line cards, the CEMi cards can provide management transport
connectivity instead of installing LAD modules, which provide the shelf connectivity in a typical
configuration. The CEMi iLAN port provides the transport connectivity between MSE-1482 line cards
installed at adjacent node locations.
The following figure shows an example of connecting the CEMi iLAN port in slot A to an MSE-1482
GbE copper port in slot 2 and the CEMi iLAN port in slot B to an MSE-1482 GbE port in slot 1. The
MSE-1482 line card 10G OTN trunk interfaces integrate the CEMi with 10G traffic.
Connecting the CEMi iLAN port to a 1GE port on the MSE 1482 line card supports communication as
shown in the following figure. The MSE-1482 line card transports the traffic via Ethernet over SONET
(EoS) to a gateway node where the traffic drops locally to the customer’s management network.
To Outside Fiber Plant To Outside Fiber Plant
MSE-1482 10G OTN MSE-1482 1000Base-F

Fiber Ports Copper Ports
CEMi iLAN Port CEMi iLAN Port

Slot A Slot B
Figure 5: CEMi and MSE-1482 Configuration - Traffic via EoS

The next figure shows an example of using two CEMi cards and two MSE-1482 line cards to transport
management traffic to a gateway node via a dedicated wavelength that is multiplexed using the
passive WDM Module 1310/1550nm LGX. At the gateway node, the wavelength is de-muxed and the
management traffic dropped locally to the customer’s management network.
To Outside Fiber Plant To Outside Fiber Plant
Common 1310 1550 Common 1310 1550 Common 1310 1550
MSE-1482 10G OTN

Fiber Ports
CEMi DCN Port CEMi DCN Port

Slot A Slot B
Figure 6: CEMi and MSE-1482 DCN Configuration Option
Physical connections in this example configuration are as follows:

1. Connect the CEMi DCN port in slot A to the 1550 nm port of the WDM Module 1310/1550 nm
LGX.
2. Connect the CEMi DCN port in slot B to the 1550 nm port of the WDM Module 1310/1550 nm
LGX.
3. Connect the MSE-1482 10G OTN fiber port in slot 1 to the 1310 nm port of the WDM Module
1310/1550 nm LGX.
4. Connect the MSE-1482 10G OTN fiber port in slot 2 to the 1310 nm port of the WDM Module
1310/1550 nm LGX.
5. Connect the outside plant fiber to the common port of the WDM Module 1310/1550 nm LGX.
6. Connect the outside plant fiber to the common port of the WDM Module 1310/1550 nm LGX.
For details on provisioning the CEMi DCN and the MSE-1482 10G OTN fiber port, see the Planet
Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user guide.
The WDM Module 1310/1550 nm LGX installs in an LGX shelf. For details on installing the LGX shelf
and LGX-compatible modules, see the Z33 Installation and Safety Guide or the Z77 Installation and
Safety Guide.

CEMi Specifications
Power consumption: 8 Watts (typical), 10 Watts (maximum)
Weight: 0.96 lbs. / 435 grams
Height: 5.8" / 147 mm
Depth: 11.5" / 292 mm
Width: 0.9" / 23 mm
Timing: Stratum 3
Craft: 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
iLAN: 2 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45
Management: 1 x 100Base-FX SFP
Operating temperature: –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C (I-Temp)
Z33 Timing
The Z33 system supports the following timing inputs/outputs used for network synchronization:
• Two DS1/E1 outputs (ITU G.707, Telcordia GR-440)
• Two DS1/E1 inputs (ITU G.707, Telcordia GR-440)
• Two CC/2M inputs (ITU G.707)
Access the timing inputs and outputs through the 12-position pluggable terminal block on the
rear side of the Z33 chassis. The following table shows the external timing connector pinouts:
Pin Description

5 T1/E1 RX1_+ (Input
9 CC/2M RX1_+ (Input)
10 CC/2M RX1_- (Input)
11 CC/2M RX2_+ (Input)
12 CC/2M RX2_- (Input)

Z33 Alarms
The Z33 platform supports system and environmental alarms. System alarms include Critical, Major,
Minor, Audible, Failsafe, and ACO. The environmental alarms include 4 inputs and 2 outputs. Access
alarms through the 12-position pluggable terminal block on the rear side of the Z33 chassis.
The following tables show the connector pinouts for the system and environmental alarms:
System Alarm Connector Pinout Environmental Alarm Connector Pinout
1 CRIT_NO 1 OUT1_NO
2 CRIT_C 2 OUT1_C
3 MAJ_NO 3 OUT2_NO
4 MAJ_C 4 OUT2_C
5 MIN_NO 5 IN1_+
6 MIN_C 6 IN1_COM
7 AUD_NO 7 IN2_+
8 AUD_C 8 IN2_COM
9 FAIL_NC 9 IN3_+
10 FAIL_C 10 IN3_COM
11 ACO_+ 11 IN4_+
12 ACO_COM 12 IN4_COM
For details on configuring environmental alarms, see the Z-Series Troubleshooting and Maintenance
Guide.
Z33 Shelf Power

Feeds: 2 1-A & 1-B
Voltage range: –40 to –60 Vdc Guaranteed Operation
Max current: 24 Amps
Note: Use Planet Design as a guideline based on the total configured system current
draw. You must size fuses according to NEC standards or local site practice.

Z33 Physical
Height: 8.75" / 222 mm (5 RU)
Width: 19.00" / 483 mm
Depth: 14.85" / 377 mm
Weight: 27 lbs. / 12.25 kg (chassis, 2 x CEMi cards, and fan tray)
Operating temperature: –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C (I-Temp)
Z77 Shelf v2
Equipped with an optimized-mesh Optical Transport Network (OTN) switching fabric, the Z77
platform provides high performance for multiple traffic types. Z77 systems support real-time
streaming and large bandwidth services by optimizing optical and packet layers for flexible
multi-service transport ranging from Metro Ethernet, to SONET/SDH, and wavelength services. The
Z77 shared mesh protection provides full protection and restoration for all services.
The Z77 chassis utilizes a mid-plane architecture and provides sixteen line card slots. All chassis
components (including the Operations Panel) are modular. You can remove or replace modular
components in the field. This provides full serviceability and a simple upgrade path for future
expansion. Insert line cards for management, DWDM, CWDM, and client services in the sixteen front
slots. All Z-Series modules are hot swappable.
You can install up to three Z77 shelves into a typical seven-foot equipment rack. All system
functionalities are modular so that each node has the optimal mix of optical bandwidth, service
interfaces, and service aggregation/grooming.
Z77 shelf v2 configurations range from dense optical-optical-optical (OOO) all optical junctions, to
optical-electrical-optical (OEO)-based aggregation and grooming nodes and small flexible OOO/OEO
hybrid nodes at access locations. The Z77 platform can scale from small spurs and access rings to
dense optical thoroughfares and head-end locations.
Front Rear
Operations
Panel
Power
RCMs
Rear Filler Plate
Air Filter Tray BTM

Fan Modules
Figure 7: Z77 Shelf v2 – Front and Rear Views

The Z77, with WSS modules installed and paired with passive AWG optical patch panels, provides a
full ROADM with Optical-Optical-Optical (OOO) switching and optical pass through. The WSS-402
provides 2 degrees and the WSS-404 provides 4 degrees of 40-wavelength cross-connect capacity in
a single shelf. The WSS-F2 provides 2 degrees, the WSS-F4 provides 4 degrees, and the WSS-F8
provides 8 degrees of 96-wavelength cross-connect capacity in a single shelf.
Each WSS module provides optical add-drop multiplexing capability in the 1550 nm band across
pre-defined ITU channel designations. See AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments starting on page 225
and AWG-96 Wavelength Assignments starting on page 226.
Each Z77 shelf v2 ships with following items:
• (1) Operations Panel
• (1) Fan Filter
• (2) Fan Modules
• (2) –48V Power Entry Modules (PEMs)
• Front and Rear cable management trays and covers as required
• Air Management Boards (AMBs)
Note that each shelf ships with enough AMBs for all unused openings in the chassis.
• (4) Rear Closure Modules (RCMs) or (4) XC-2800 switch fabric modules
PME-412, PME-216i, and 2.5G-LME4 applications require RCMs or the XC-2800 switch fabric
modules. For example, ODU1 express cross-connects between a pair of 2.5G-LME4 line cards
or LAG member ports between a pair of PME line cards. RCMs are required for MSE-1482
(MSE cross-card connections, pass-through traffic, and SONET/SDH protection groups)
applications. For additional information on the RCMs, see Ring Closure Modules starting on
page 230.
You can install MSE-1482 line cards in a Z77 shelf supported by the XC-2800 switch fabric.
The XC-2800 switch fabric module provides supports the MSE-1482 in a standalone
muxponder configuration. However, the XC-2800 switch fabric module does not support
MSE-1482 card-to-card backplane cross-connections or protection.
To support TSW-10G10 and PSW line cards, you must configure the Z77 shelf with XC-2800
switch fabric modules. For additional information, see XC-2800 Switch Fabric starting on
page 231.
Install Z77 shelves in accordance with the Z77 Installation and Safety Guide. This ensures correct
related components.
Note: A Z77 shelf configured with XC-2800 switch fabric modules requires CyOS
Release 4.0 or higher.

information.

Features and Benefits

The Z77 packet-optical transport platform provides a range of features and benefits:
• Flexible platform architecture supports scalability for investment protection, common
sparing / inventory, operational consistency and functionality
• Pair switch cards to support equipment redundancy and increase switch capacity
• OTN digital wrapper functionality
• 10G and 100G DWDM transport
• Supports up to 2.8 Tbps of non-blocking packet and/or OTN switch capacity with any-to-any
packet cross-connect (switching) for point to multipoint services, grooming and transport
efficiency
• 4-degree/40-channel, 4-degree/96-channel, or 8-degree/96-channel ROADM functionality for
OOO capability and network flexibility
• Fixed-wavelength 4, 8, 40, or 96 channel DWDM for economic efficiency
• Over 200 Gbps per slot capacity to support 100G modules
• Multi-layer transport integration provides significant network efficiencies
 Full-mesh passive optical backplane eliminates external patching
 OTN on all trunk connections for enhanced performance and management on all
services
 Integration across Ethernet, SONET/SDH, COE, OTN and DWDM provides multi-layer
network visibility
 Efficient network planning, design and operation—resulting network visibility enables
multi-layer A-to-Z provisioning for fast, reliable service activation per modeled network
plans with Planet Operate
 All Z-Series modules are hot-swappable
Chassis Capacity
• When equipped with the XC-2800 switching fabric, the Z77 supports up to 2.8 Tbps of packet
or OTN switch capacity per shelf, or a concurrent mix of both
• Optical:
 4-degree, 40-channel ROADM (WSS-404/AWG-40)
 4, 8, 40, or 96 channels, C-Band Terminal Mux
 Tunable or Fixed wavelength transceiver options

• Redundant fans

• Equipment protection:
 1:1 for all common cards and service modules
 1:3 for multi-technology switch fabric modules
 1+1 APS/MSP
 UPSR/SNCP
Power Entry Modules

Each Z77 shelf v2 has dual -48V power supplies located on the rear of the chassis. Each Power Entry
Module (PEM) accepts four feeds for a system total of eight feeds. These eight feeds are distributed
across the line card slots in a redundant fashion, so that even if a line card failure shorted two feeds,
the rest of the shelf will still have power.

The following table shows Z77 slot restrictions and line card placement guidelines. Note that
the table does not show slots 1 and 2 reserved for the BOSS/BOSS2 cards. You can install card
pairs, where applicable, in slots 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14, and 15/16.
Slots
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Line Cards
2.5G-LME4
DTM-8
DTM-8G
DTM-100G
DTM-100G2
FLX-216i
LAC-8
LAD-4
LAD-4A
LAD-8
LAD-8A
LAD-8E
LAD-8i
LAD-8X

Slots
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Line Cards
LAD-40
LAD-40E
LAD-96
LAD-96E
LME-10G10
MSE-1482
OLA-010
OLA-200
OLA-201
PME-412
PME-216i
PSW-10G101
PSW-10G201
PSW-6181
PSW-100G1
PSW-100G2W1
SFT-8
SFT-10G16
TSW-10G10
WSS-402
WSS-404
WSS-F2
WSS-F4
WSS-F8
* Table shading indicates paired slots for applicable line cards.

1
Refer to "Packet Card Interoperability" in the Packet Switching User Guide and the Z-Series Engineering
and Planning Guide.
Important! — An existing Z77 v2 (with two fan tray modules per chassis) in the field
requires a power upgrade prior to installing the PSW-100G2W line card. For details on
upgrading the shelf power, see the Z77 Power Upgrade Guide (450-3708-701) available online
in the Ciena doc portal. After the shelf power upgrade, the Z77 v2 shelf can support up to
eight PSW-100G2W line cards. Note that the older model Z77 (with three fan tray modules
per chassis) does not support the power upgrade and therefore does not support the
PSW-100G2W line card.

For descriptions of individual Z-Series line cards, see Z-Series Line Cards, Modules, and Optics
For information on recommended slot assignments for LAD modules, WSS modules, and service card
pairs, see Best Practices for Network Configurations starting on page 345.
All modules are hot swappable.
Important! — Do not install a PSW line card in the same card pair slots with a PME line card.
Card (Boot-up, Operational, PLL Synchronization, and Port) Status and LED Sequence
Refer to the following topics for detailed information regarding:
• Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Boot-up Status and LED Sequence starting on page
334
• Card (POWER, ACTIVE, ALARM, SYNC) Operational Status and LED Sequence - Release
8.0 and Higher starting on page 336
• Line Card SYNC LED Sequence during PLL Synchronization to the Active Controller Card
starting on page 338
• Line Card Port Status and Alarm LEDs starting on page 340
Z77 Power
Feeds: 8 4-A & 4-B
Voltage range: –40 to –60 Vdc Guaranteed Operation
Max current: 96 Amps 24 Amps per feed
For details on Z77 DC power distribution across the shelf slots, see Z77 Fuse Positions and DC
Feeds starting on page 302.
Note: Use Planet Design as a guideline based on the total configured system current draw.
You must size fuses according to NEC standards or local site practice.

Z77 Physical
Height: 22.75" / 577.8 mm (13 RU)
Width: 21.00" / 533.4 mm (23" / 600 mm compatible)
Depth: 21.00" / 533.4 mm
Weight: 98 lbs / 44.5 kg
Common control slots: 2
Line card slots: 14
Fabric slots: 4
Power Entry Modules: 2
Operating temperature: +32°F to +122°F / 0°C to +50°C
Z77 Timing
• Stratum 3 compliant timing subsystem
• Redundant DS1 and 2MHz timing inputs
• Derived DS1 timing outputs
• Line-timed SONET/SDH support
Z77 Management
• 10/100/1000Base-T DCN interface (rear management interface)
• System alarm outputs (Critical, Major, Minor, Audible, Failsafe)
• System alarm inputs (ACO)
• Two provisionable environmental alarm outputs
• Five provisionable environmental alarm inputs
L-AMP Shelf
The Z-Series Lambda Amplifier (L-AMP) is a fully self-contained 1 RU module that functions as a
bi-directional mid-span optical amplifier / repeater. Each L-AMP shelf supports bi-directional physical
layer amplification of multiple DWDM wavelengths where node-to-node optical spans are greater
than 80 kilometers.
Note: For information about the OLA family of optical amplifier modules, see OLA Modules starting
on page 218.

Traffic enters the L-AMP shelf from an East or West Z-Series node, is appropriately attenuated, and
processes through a high performance two-stage Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) for
transmission to an upstream Z-Series platform. You can deploy up to four L-AMP shelves in a span.
The shelf also provides a 1510 nm add/drop port to support an Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC)
carrying Ethernet traffic for OAM.
The L-AMP shelf has all access on the front. It fits in 19-inch equipment racks, but has
extension-mounting brackets for 23-inch rack installation.
Figure 8: L-AMP Shelf – Front View
Connectors on the L-AMP shelf include four types:

• System alarm outputs
• Environmental alarm inputs and outputs
• Ethernet ports (2)
• RS-232 port (reserved for future use)
The following table shows the L-AMP connection types, number / detail, and physical
connectors.
Connection Type Number Connector
2 – Outputs
3 – Inputs
Alarms 1 – Audible Terminal Block
1 – ACO
1 – Fail Over
Ethernet
2 RJ-45
(Management and Craft)
RS-232
1 RJ-45
(Reserved for future use)

The following graphic shows the L-AMP block diagram.
DCF
Out
DCF
In
Variable
1%
RX Optical EDFA TX
Tap Attenuator
1510nm 1510nm
RX Drop Add TX
RX Tap TX Tap
Mon Mon
West East
1510 nm 1510 nm
Optical Optical
West Supervisory
OSC OSC
Supervisory East
SFP SFP
Channel Channel
TX RX
TX Tap RX Tap
Mon 1510nm 1510nm Mon
Drop Add
Variable
1%
TX EDFA Optical RX
Attenuator Tap
DCF
In
DCF
Out
Figure 9: L-AMP Block Diagram
L-AMP Shelf Pinouts

The following tables show the L-AMP shelf pinouts for the input and output alarms connectors.
Input Alarms Connector Output Alarms Connector

8 IN3_COM 8 FAIL_COM
7 IN3_+ 7 FAIL_NC
6 IN2_COM 6 AUD_COM
5 IN2_+ 5 AUD_NO
4 IN1_COM 4 OUT2_COM
3 IN1_+ 3 OUT2_NO
2 ACO_COM 2 OUT1_COM
1 ACO_+ 1 OUT1_NO
The external alarm inputs and outputs are all software configurable.

L-AMP Interfaces
Ethernet Interfaces
The two Ethernet interfaces provide autosensing 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet connectivity. The
Ethernet ports are labeled “MGMT” and “CRAFT”:
• MGMT: Use the shelf management port to access the Data Communication Network (DCN)
that is available over the DWDM interfaces.
• CRAFT: You can connect a laptop PC to the shelf craft port for a direct connection to
commission and recommission the L-AMP module.
Optical Interfaces and Access

• 4 optical fiber interfaces
• Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) – 100Base-FX Ethernet at 1510 nm
• Physical: Front access
Optical Specifications
• Channels/Frequency
 40 C-band optical channels on 100 GHz ITU (1530.33 nm to 1561.42 nm)
 1510 nm Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) 100Base-FX Ethernet
• Minimum BER: 1x10-12
• DWDM Power Output
 40 Channels
 13.0 dBm (–3 dBm per channel)
• Laser Safety Class: 1
• Laser Shutdown\Restart: Automatic, ITU-T G.664
• Channel Frequency Tolerance: .00052%
• Dispersion Compensation: External
• Maximum span of 32 dB, supports up to 25 dB of gain
• Transmit Power up to 20 dBm
• Mid-stage loss support for 0 – 8.5 dB
• Monitor ports — about 20 dB lower than the respective TX and RX Line port
Note: The L-AMP shelf supports manual gain tilt control. Gain tilt can occur when channel
gain is not flat upon reaching the optical amplifier. In this situation, higher signals receive
more power, while lower signals receive less power.

L-AMP OSC Specifications

Frequency: 198.5 THz 1510 nm
Data Format: 100Base-FX Ethernet
Maximum TX Power: 5 dBm
Minimum TX Power: –1 dBm
Maximum RX Power: –3 dBm
Minimum RX Power: –33 dBm
OSC Link Budget: 8 – 32 dB
L-AMP Features
• All access on front panel
• 1 RU x 19 inches wide (with mounting brackets for 23-inch racks)
• 40ch + OSC: 80 km amplifier
• Remotely managed via OSC
• Craft interface
• Management LAN available for other devices
• Four alarm input/output contacts
• Mid-stage DCM access and monitor ports
• Redundant power
• Hot swap fan module (3 x fans)
• Managed through Planet Operate, CLI, TL1, and SNMP v2
L-AMP Applications
• Extended optical reach of DWDM transport
• Management LAN and alarm extension
L-AMP Physical
• Height: 1.735" (44.069 mm)
• Width: 18.31" (465.074 mm)
• Depth: 11.98" (304.29 mm)
• Weight: 10 lbs. (4.55 kg)

L-AMP Power
Feeds: 4 2-A & 2-B
Voltage Range: –40 to –60 Vdc Guaranteed Operation
Max Voltage: –/+100 Vdc Non-operational, no damage
Power 50 W Typical
Consumption: 80 W Maximum
Max Current: 2 Amps
L-AMP Compliance
• NEBS 3 Certified (GR-63 CORE, GR-1089)
• UL/CSA Listed
• UE/CE-Marked: EN 60950, EN 55022, EN 6 1000, ETSI EN 300 386 V.1.3.3
• CB Scheme Certified 60950
• FCC, Subpart B, Part 15, Class A
• RoHS compliant

Line Cards, Modules, Optics, and Optical
Protection
This section describes each Z-Series line card, related XFP/SFP transceivers, Z-Series modules, optical
protection groups, and the Optical Protection Switch.
For a list of line cards for which CyOS software upgrades are service affecting, see Software
Upgrades: Service-Affected Line Cards starting on page 358.
In This Chapter
Line Cards Overview and Hardware and CyOS Compatibility ......................... 68
BOSS Termination Module ................................................................................... 73
Broadband Operating System Supervisor ......................................................... 77
LAD Modules .......................................................................................................... 80
DTM-8 and DTM-8G Transponder Modules ....................................................... 93
DTM-100G Transponder Module ......................................................................... 99
DTM-100G2 Transponder Module.....................................................................105
2.5G-LME4 Multiplex-Transponder Module .....................................................110
LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder/Transponder ................................................114
PME-412 Packet Multiplexer Module ................................................................122
PME-216i Packet Multiplexer Module ...............................................................128
PSW-10G10 Packet Module ................................................................................135
PSW-10G20 Packet Module ................................................................................142
PSW-618 Packet Module .....................................................................................148
PSW-100G Packet Module ..................................................................................154
PSW-100G2W Packet Module.............................................................................159
TSW-10G10 Packet Aggregation and Transport Module ................................166
LAC-8 Lambda Aggregator Module ...................................................................171
LAC-4P Lambda Aggregator CWDM Terminal Multiplexer .............................174
SFT-8 Module Transponder Module..................................................................176
SFT-10G16 Multi-Rate Transponder Module....................................................180
MSE-1482 Multiservice SONET/SDH Aggregation and Transport Module ...185
FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN Muxponder Module .................................................191
WSS-402 and WSS-404 Wavelength Selective Switch Modules .....................195
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Wavelength Selective Switch Modules ..........205
OLA Modules ........................................................................................................218
AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments ....................................................................225

AWG-96 Wavelength Assignments ....................................................................226

Channel, Wavelength, and Frequency Table ....................................................228
Ring Closure Modules .........................................................................................230
XC-2800 Switch Fabric Modules .........................................................................231
Optical Protection Groups ..................................................................................234
Line Card SYNC LED .............................................................................................241
Optical Protection Switch....................................................................................242
Line Cards Overview and Hardware and CyOS

Compatibility
Z-Series systems provide an effective and economically efficient approach to scaling network
capacity while simplifying planning and operations. Optimized for packet and the transition of TDM
to packet, the Z-Series platforms support advanced Ethernet switching and transport over
Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE), SONET/SDH, or wavelengths.
Recognizing the continuing role of TDM in many networks, the Z-Series platform optionally supports
advanced SONET/SDH aggregation and transport functionality. Rounding out support for wholesale,
wavelength services and the need to muxpond and transpond certain services, the Z-Series supports
a complete range of transport requirements. Driven by IPTV, VOD, 2/3/4G wireless backhaul, carrier
Ethernet and scaling Internet services, the Z-Series grooms services into discrete high-capacity 10G
wavelengths. As services scale, the Z-Series platform provides the option to transport multiple 10G
wavelengths per fiber using Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing (DWDM). The Z-Series
DTM-100G and DTM-100G2 modules provide 100G transport services. The DTM-100G and DTM-100
G2 modules are fully compatible with existing Z-Series DWDM components including LAD modules
and WSS ROADM modules. This allows the mixing of 10G and 100G waves over the same fiber.
Addressing the multi-layer aspect of evolving networks, the Z-Series provides multi-layer
add/drop multiplexing (MADM) and transport functions in one fully integrated system,
supporting:
• GbE and 10GbE switching and transport
• SONET/SDH aggregation and transport
• OTN (digital wrapper) functionality
• 100G DWDM transport
• 10G DWDM transport
• 2.5G CWDM transport
• Multi-layer optimization and management
• OTN-level multiplexing GbE, OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4, and OC-48/STM-16 signals into OTU2
signals
• Line cards and modules provide all functionality for the Z-Series nodes. By varying the line
cards selected for a node, a Z-Series shelf is configurable to support a wide range of site
requirements.

For additional information and instructions on installing Z-Series line cards, see the Z22 Installation
and Safety Guide, the Z33 Installation and Safety Guide, or the Z77 Installation and Safety Guide. For
information on provisioning Z-Series line cards, see the Planet Operate: Trails and Services Guide or the
Packet Switching User Guide.
The following tables show the hardware compatibility with the Operating System (CyOS)
releases.
Controller Cards and Common Equipment Modules
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
BOSS
BOSS2
CEM
CEMi

DWDM Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
LAD-2P
LAD-2G
LAD-4
LAD-4A
LAD-8
LAD-8i
LAD-8A
LAD-8E
LAD-8X
LAD-40
LAD-40E
LAD-96
LAD-96E
WSS-402
WSS-404
WSS-F2
WSS-F4
WSS-F8
CWDM Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
LAC-4P
LAC-8

CFP and XFP-Based Transponder Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
2.5G-LME4
LME-10G10
DTM-8
DTM-8G
DTM-100G
DTM-100G2
SFP+ and SFP-Based Transponder Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
SFT-8
SFT-10G16
Packet Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
PME-216i
PME-412
PSW-10G10
PSW-10G20
PSW-618
PSW-100G
PSW-100G2W
TSW-10G10
Multi-Service Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
FLX-216i
MSE-1482

Optical Line Amplifier Line Cards
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
OLA-200 (EDFA)
OLA-201 (EDFA)
OLA-010 (Raman)
Z77 Fabric Modules
CyOS Releases
Hardware
5.0 5.2 5.4 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0
Ring Closure Module

(RCM)
XC-2800

BOSS Termination Module

The BOSS Termination Module (BTM) provides physical termination for the various alarm and
management interfaces supported by the BOSS (BOSS and BOSS2) cards. One BTM connects to both
Z77 BOSS shelf control cards simultaneously, and uses two slots at the rear of the Z77 shelf. This
allows either BOSS card to serve as master and access all the physical connections to the system. The
BTM contains no active components, except for relays used for BOSS failover and a small EEPROM
for inventory purposes.
Ports and connectors on the BTM include five types:

• System alarm outputs
• Environmental alarm inputs and outputs
• Timing inputs and outputs
• Ethernet ports (4)
• RS-232 port (reserved for future use)
Remove each of the three terminal blocks for easier wiring. The external alarm
inputs and outputs are all software configurable.
The Ethernet interface, labeled MGMT1, provides access to the out-of-band
Data Communication Network (DCN). Use the DCN as a communication
network for network management. These interfaces support VLANs and make
use of OSPF routing on the BOSS cards.
The iLAN Ethernet interfaces provide DCN connectivity and make use of OSPF
routing (iLAN-to-iLAN connection). The iLAN ports provide IP access to
secondary shelves (Z22, Z33, and other Z77 nodes).
Figure 10: Z77 BTM

BTM Alarm Inputs

The alarm inputs detect an alarm by an external relay contact closure. The alarm inputs on the
BTM have a maximum current draw of 20 mA.
Maximum
Alarm Inputs
Current Draw
ACO 20 mA
IN1 20 mA
IN2 20 mA
IN3 20 mA
IN4 20 mA
IN5 20 mA
BTM Alarm Outputs

The alarm outputs provide a contact closure through a relay. The maximum switching voltage
is 100 VDC and the maximum switching current is 300 mA.
Maximum Maximum
Alarm Outputs
Voltage Current
Critical 100 VDC 300 mA
Major 100 VDC 300 mA
Minor 100 VDC 300 mA
Audible 100 VDC 300 mA
FailSafe 100 VDC 300 mA
ENV_OUT1 100 VDC 300 mA
ENV_OUT2 100 VDC 300 mA

BTM Alarm Pinouts

The following tables show the BTM pinouts for the system and environmental alarms
connector.
System Alarms Connector Environmental Alarms Connector
12 CRIT_NO 14 OUT1_NO
11 CRIT_C 13 OUT1_C
10 MAJ_NO 12 OUT2_NO
9 MAJ-C 11 OUT2_C
8 MIN_NO 10 IN1_+
7 MIN_C 9 IN1_COM
6 AUD_NO 8 IN2_+
5 AUD_C 7 IN2_COM
4 FAIL_NC 6 IN3_+
3 FAIL_C 5 IN3_COM
2 ACO_+ 4 IN4_+
1 ACO_COM 3 IN4_COM
2 IN5_+
1 IN5_COM
The following table shows the BTM port / connection type, number / detail (inputs and
outputs), and physical connector types.
Port / Connection Type Number Connector Notes
7 – Outputs
Alarms Terminal Block 2 signals per port
6 – Inputs
2 – Outputs
Timing Terminal Block Each signal is a differential pair
4 – Inputs
Ethernet 4 RJ-45 Management / iLAN
RS-232 1 RJ-45 Reserved for future use
The external alarm inputs and outputs are all software configurable.
Four Ethernet interfaces provide autosensing 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet connectivity to the BOSS
cards. Typically, use MGMT1 to access the Data Communication Network (DCN) that is available over
the DWDM interfaces. Use the DCN as a communication network for network management.

Note: The RS-232 port provides an interface for future use. Currently, this port
should only be used by (or at the direction of) TAC personnel.
Shelf Compatibility
• Z77
Physical
• Module dimensions:
 Height: 9.2" / 234 mm
 Width: 2.4" / 61 mm
 Depth: 3.5" / 89 mm
• Weight: 1.15 lbs. / 0.52 kg
Timing
• Two DS1/E1 outputs (ITU G.707, Telcordia GR-440)
• Two DS1/E1 inputs (ITU G.707, Telcordia GR-40)
• Two CC/2M inputs (ITU G.707)

Broadband Operating System Supervisor

The Broadband Operating System Supervisor (BOSS) card provides common control functionality to
Z77 nodes. At least one BOSS card is required in each Z77 shelf. Slots 1 and 2 of the chassis house
redundant BOSS cards. BOSS cards power the management plane, provide management and timing
interfaces, and contain the main system memory. In a network of Z-Series nodes, BOSS cards on
each Z77 node communicate with other nodes via a dedicated management LAN carried over the
Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC).
Figure 11: Z77 BOSS Controller Cards
The BOSS2 shelf control card supports enhanced packet scalability, including support for more than
500 flow domains. Use the BOSS2 card for Z77 shelves configured with the XC-2800 switch fabric
modules.

BOSS or BOSS2 shelf control cards are typically deployed in fault-tolerant pairs. The operating
system (CyOS) continually monitors both cards, elects master and standby processors and
checkpoints all data between cards to ensure consistency. Going beyond typical master/slave
capabilities, CyOS maintains existing dataplane connections even if both BOSS/BOSS2 cards are
removed from the chassis.
Each BOSS/BOSS2 control card maintains a Gigabit Ethernet connection to all other line cards. This
network provides all inter-shelf communications. BOSS/BOSS2 cards serve as staging locations for
code upgrades, distributing code to all the line cards on each shelf to simplify and accelerate the
upgrade process. BOSS/BOSS2 cards receive status, alarm, and statistics from all line cards. The
information is presented on standard interfaces (for example, SNMP, syslog).
Located in the rear termination area of each Z77 shelf, a BOSS Termination Module (BTM) houses the
physical connectors for management and timing interfaces. A single BTM connects to both BOSS
cards in a redundant design. The BTM contains no active electronics that can affect system reliability.
The BOSS/BOSS2 card includes a Stratum 3 compliant timing subsystem. Timing inputs include
DS1/E1, 64K composite clock, 2M, and backplane sources. Line cards supply clock references on one
of two available backplane busses. The BOSS/BOSS2 card distributes 8 kHz and 19.44 MHz
references to all line cards in the Z77 shelf and supports DS1/E1 derived timing outputs.
Shelf Compatibility
• Z77
Note: The BOSS2 module requires CyOS software Release 5.0 or higher.
CPU
• BOSS
 1 GHz RISC
 8 GB Flash
• BOSS2
 1.2 GHz Dual-Core RISC
 8 GB Flash
RAM
• BOSS: 1 GB
• BOSS2: 4 GB
Timing
• Stratum 3

Craft
• 1 x 10/100/1000Base-T RJ-45, faceplate mounted
Physical
BOSS
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
• Weight: 3.575 lbs. / 1.622 kg
BOSS2
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
• Weight: 4.0 lbs. / 1.814 kg
Power
• BOSS and BOSS2 power consumption: 37 watts typical, 45 watts maximum
Electrical
• Low-voltage shutdown –32V (ramping down from a normal-on condition)
• Low-voltage turn-on –36V (ramping up from an under-voltage condition)
• High-voltage shutdown –77V (ramping up from a normal-on condition)
• High-voltage turn-on –72V (ramping down from an over-voltage condition)
Compliance
• UL
• NEBS Level 3
• IEC 60950
• EN

LAD Modules
The 2, 4, 8, 40, and 96-channel Z-Series Lambda Add/Drop (LAD) modules provide DWDM
connectivity using a thin film filter technology and optional, integrated Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier
(EDFA) amplification. The integrated transponding and muxponding LAD modules utilize standard
ITU 50 GHz (for LAD-96 modules) or 100 GHz (for all other LAD modules) channel spacing. An
environmentally hardened 8-channel module (LAD-8i) is also available for deployments in remote
cabinets with the Z33 I-Temp shelf.
LAD modules provide an integrated 1510 nm Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) 100Base-FX Ethernet
management channel for management visibility to all nodes. The purpose of the Ethernet
management channel is inter-node communication, but it can also be used to carry other
management traffic from third-party systems if an out-of-band DCN network is required.
Note: The LAD-2P and LAD-2G modules, deployed in Z22 systems, do not provide
an OSC. In Z22 (–48V) configurations, a PME or PSW line card in-band management
channel provides inter-node communication. In Z22 (+24V) configurations, the
PME-216i line card in-band management channel provides inter-node
communication.
Several versions of the optical LAD modules are available:

• LAD-2P: 2-channel (I-Temp)
Note: The LAD-2P module provides East and West DWDM add/drop channels and standard
1310 nm add/drop ports for the Z22 shelf.
• LAD-2G 2-channel (I-Temp)
Note: The LAD-2G module provides three long-reach wavelengths; East and West DWDM
add/drop channels and standard 1550 nm add/drop ports for the Z22 shelf.
• LAD-4: 4-channel
• LAD-4A: 4-channel with booster amplifier
• LAD-8i: 8-channel (I-Temp)
• LAD-8A: 8-channel with booster amplifier
• LAD-8E: 8-channel with pre-amp and booster amplifier
• LAD-8X: 8-channel with pre-amp and booster amplifier (40 dB reach)

The following figures show examples of some of the various LAD modules.
Figure 12: Z22 LAD-2P Module
Figure 13: Z-Series LAD-4A Module
Figure 14: Z-Series LAD-8i Module
Figure 15: Z-Series LAD-40E Module
For detailed information on optical link design for LAD modules, see Optical Link Design starting on
page 262.
Note: LAD-8 to LAD-8A links are not supported.

LAD-40 and LAD-40E Modules Paired with the AWG-40

LAD-40 and LAD-40E modules require an associated AWG-40 Array Wave Guide module for add/drop
traffic. Individual wavelengths are added and/or dropped using the passive AWG-40 2 RU module.
The AWG-40 provides the ability to multiplex and de-multiplex any of the 40 channels supported by a
LAD-40 or LAD-40E module. Connect the AWG-40 module to the LAD-40 or LAD-40E COM port
through a fiber jumper. Then, connect the individual channels on the AWG-40 module to the
appropriate Z-Series line card DWDM XFP transceiver using a fiber jumper.
AWG-40 Array Wave Guide
Figure 16: AWG-40 External Module
You can use Dispersion Compensating Modules (DCMs) to support the LAD-40E module. The DCMs
are based on Fiber Bragg Gratings (FBGs) and exhibit lower loss than standard fiber-based DCMs.
You can install the DCMs in a standard LGX module, allowing up to three DCMs in a 1 RU, 19-inch
rackmount shelf/frame. Connect the DCMs to the LAD-40E Mid-Stage port using a fiber jumper.
Note: If a DCM is required with a LAD-40E module, you must use a Fiber Bragg
Grating DCM. If a DCM is not required for your configuration, you must connect a
3dB loopback attenuator to the LAD-40E Mid-stage port. The LAD-40E Fiber
Jumper Kit includes the loopback attenuator. For additional information on
available DCMs, see Dispersion Compensation Modules starting on page 269 in
this guide.
This section describes installing the LAD-40/LAD-40E modules, AWG-40 modules, and associated
Z-Series line cards in a Z33 shelf. This section also describes installing Horizontal Fiber Management
Panels, LGX-compatible modules, and DCMs in an equipment rack.
For details on provisioning cross-connects or using the A-to-Z provisioning tool for the
LAD-40/LAD-40E modules, AWG-40 modules, and associated Z-Series line cards, see the Planet
Operate Intra-Node Cross-Connects and Trails and Services user guides.

The following configuration example shows two LAD-40E modules installed in a Z33 shelf and
connected to two AWG-40 modules and DCMs.
AWG-40 Module
CYANOPTICS
Horizontal Fiber
Management Panel
AWG-40 Module
CYANOPTICS
Horizontal Fiber
Management Panel
LAD-40E Modules
Z33 Shelf
PME-412 Modules
Notes:
LAD-40E Mid-Stage port
connects to DCM
LAD-40E Line port
connects to trunk DCMs
Figure 17: LAD-40E and AWG-40 Installation Example
LAD-96 and LAD-96E Modules Paired with the AWG-96

LAD-96 and LAD-96E modules require an associated AWG-96 Array Wave Guide module for add/drop
traffic. Individual wavelengths are added and/or dropped using the passive AWG-96 2 RU module.
The AWG-96 provides the ability to multiplex and de-multiplex any of the 96 channels supported by a
LAD-96 or LAD-96E module. Connect the AWG-96 module to the LAD-96 or LAD-96E COM port
through a fiber jumper. Then, connect the individual channels on the AWG-96 module to the
appropriate Z-Series line card DWDM XFP transceiver using a fiber jumper.

LAD-2P LGX Module

The external LAD-2P LGX terminal multiplexer module is designed for use in OEO networks. The
module installs in an industry standard LGX form factor. The passive LAD-2P LGX module provides
two (East and West) DWDM channels of add/drop capacity and a 1310 nm add/drop port.
Channel spacing is at 100 GHz. The LAD-2P LGX module provides two DWDM channels:
• Channel 30 – 1553.33 nm, 193.0 THz
• Channel 31 – 1552.52 nm, 193.1 THz
Figure 19: LAD-20 LGX Passive Module
1310 nm Add/Drop Port

The LAD-8i module and the LAD-2P modules (in-chassis LAD-2P line card and the external LAD-2P
LGX) provide a standard 1310 nm add/drop port, typically used for local client-side interfaces. The
client-side equipment may include various types of SONET/SDH, Ethernet, or OTN interfaces
operating at the 1310 nm wavelength.
The LAD-8i and LAD-2P 1310 nm add/drop ports are located on the module faceplate.
LAD-2G LGX Module

The LAD-2G LGX is an external terminal multiplexer designed for use in OEO networks. The module
installs in an industry standard LGX form factor. The passive LAD-2G LGX module provides two (East
and West) DWDM channels of add/drop capacity and a 1550 nm add/drop port.
LAD-2G LGX channel spacing is at 100 GHz. The module provides two long-reach DWDM channels:
• Channel 60 – 1529.55 nm, 196.0 THz
• Channel 61 – 1528.77 nm, 196.1 THz
Typically used for a client side interface, the LAD-2G LGX module provides a long-reach 1550 nm
add/drop port. The client-side equipment may include various types of SONET/SDH, Ethernet, or OTN
interfaces operating at the 1550 nm wavelength.
Figure 20: LAD-2G LGX Passive Module

LGX Shelf/Frame
The passive LGX shelf/frame installs quickly with just a screwdriver and four screws. The LGX form
factor allows for simple installation with snap-in mounting. The LAD-2P LGX and the LAD-2G LGX
modules are installed without tools into the LGX shelf/frame. You can mount up to three
LGX-compatible modules into a single LGX shelf/frame.
For installation instructions, see the Z22 Installation and Safety Guide.
LAD Module Block Diagrams

The following graphics show the block diagrams for all of the Z-Series LAD modules.
LAD-2P
2
OADM 2
1 2 1 2
1 1
1310nm Drop Add 1310nm
Figure 21: LAD-2P Block Diagram
LAD-2G
OADM
Figure 22: LAD-2G Block Diagram
LAD-4
Figure 23: LAD-4 Block Diagram

LAD-4A
Figure 24: LAD-4A Block Diagram
LAD-8
Figure 25: LAD-8 Block Diagram
LAD-8i
Figure 26: LAD-8i Block Diagram
LAD-8A
Figure 27: LAD-8A Block Diagram

LAD-8E
Figure 28: LAD-8E Block Diagram
Note: If a DCM is not required for your configuration, you must connect a 3 dB loopback attenuator
to the LAD-8E mid-stage port. For DCM details, see Dispersion Compensation Modules starting on
page 269.
LAD-8X
Figure 29: LAD-8X Block Diagram
Note: If a DCM is not required for your configuration, you must connect a 3 dB loopback attenuator
to the LAD-8X mid-stage port. For DCM details, see Dispersion Compensation Modules starting on
page 269.
LAD-40 and LAD-96
Figure 30: LAD-40 and LAD-96 Block Diagram

LAD-40E/LAD-96E Module Block Diagram

The following is a generic LAD-40E/LAD-96E block diagram showing the passive AWG-40 or
AWG-96 module for add/drop traffic.
Figure 31: LAD-40E/LAD-96E Module Block Diagram
System Requirements
• LAD-2P and LAD-2G in-chassis modules: Z22
• LAD-2P and LAD-2G LGX modules: Z22, Z33, Z77
• All other LAD modules: Z33 (slots 3 to 6), Z77
Functional Interfaces
• Input: Up to 2, 4, 8, 40, or 96 (10G) DWDM channels
• Output: Up to 2, 4, 8, 40, or 96 ITU 694.1 wavelengths
• Channel spacing:
 LAD-96/96E: 50 GHz
 All Others: 100 GHz
• Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) – 100Base-FX Ethernet at 1510 nm
Note: The LAD-2P and LAD-2G modules do not provide an OSC.
• Physical: Front access, duplex LC/UPC connectors
• Link budget (with 80 km DWDM XFPs):
 LAD-8i: 14 dB
 LAD-2P, LAD-2G, LAD-4, LAD-8: 16 dB
 LAD-4A, LAD-8A: 24 dB
 LAD-8E: 32 dB
 LAD-40: 10 dB
 LAD-40E: 28 dB
 LAD-8X: 40 dB

 LAD-96: 10 dB
 LAD-96E: 28 dB
• Fiber types supported: NSDF (G.652), NZ-DSF (G.655)
Note: Currently, LAD modules do not support the express port.
LAD OSC Specifications

The following OSC specifications apply to all LAD modules (except the LAD-2P and LAD-2G, which do
not provide an OSC):
• Frequency: 198.5 THz 1510 nm
• Data Format: 100Base-FX
• Maximum TX Power: 5 dBm Ethernet
• Minimum TX Power:
 LAD-8X: +1 dBm
 Other LAD Modules: –1 dBm
• Maximum RX Power:
 LAD-8X: –7 dBm
• Minimum RX Power:
 LAD-8X: –43 dBm
• OSC Link Budget:
 LAD-8i: 5 – 22 dB
 LAD-8X: 12 – 44 dB
 Other LAD Modules: 8 – 32 dB
Management
• DCN connectivity
• A – Z circuit provisioning using Planet Operate
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1

Physical
• LAD-2P and LAD-2G module dimensions and weights:
 Depth: 11.5" / 292 mm
 Width: .9" / 23 mm
 Height: 5.8" / 147 mm
 Weight: 2.3 lbs / 1.1 kg
• LAD-4, LAD-4A, LAD-8, LAD-8i, LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8X, LAD-40, LAD-40E, LAD-96, and
LAD-96E module dimensions and weights:
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
 Weight (LAD-8i): 5.1 lbs / 2.3 kg
 Weight (LAD-8X): 5.8 lbs / 2.6 kg
 Weight (LAD-40E and LAD-96E): 5.3 lbs / 2.4 kg
 Weight (LAD-40 and LAD-96): 4.6 lbs / 2.1 kg
• AWG-40 dimensions and weight:
 Depth: 12" / 304.8 mm
 Width: 19" / 482.6 mm
 Height: 3.5" / 88.9 mm, 2 RU
• AWG-96 dimensions and weight:
 Depth: 10.1" / 256.6 mm
 Width: 19.0" / 482.6 mm
 Height: 3.47" / 88.1 mm, 2 RU

Power
• Dual –48V DC power feeds to LAD module slots
Module Watts – Typical Watts – Maximum
LAD-4 10 12
LAD-4A 15 21
LAD-8 10 12
LAD-8i 10 12
LAD-8A 15 21
LAD-8E 30 35
LAD-8X 30 35
LAD-40 10 12
LAD-40E 28 30
LAD-96 10 12
LAD-96E 28 30
Note: The shelf CEMi module powers the LAD-2P and LAD-2G modules.
Note: The AWG-40 unit used in conjunction with the LAD-40 and LAD-40E
modules and the AWG-96 unit used in conjunction with the LAD-96 and
LAD-96E module are passive devices.
Environmental
• Operating Temperature
 LAD-4, LAD-4A, LAD-8, LAD-8A, LAD-8X: +32°F to +122°F / 0°C to +50°C
 LAD-8i, LAD-2P, LAD-2G: I-Temp –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C
 LAD-40, LAD-40E, LAD-96, LAD-96E: +32°F to +131°F / 0°C to +55°C
• 5% to 85% operating relative humidity (non-condensing)
• 13,000 feet (4,000 m) altitude
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant

LAD Module Wavelength Assignments

LAD-2G Add/Drop Ports
Wavelength
LAD-2G ITU Channel
(nm)
1 1529.55 60
2 1528.77 61
LAD-2P, LAD-4, LAD-4A, LAD-8, LAD-8i, LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8X Add/Drop Ports
LAD-8, LAD-8i,
LAD-4 Wavelength
LAD-2P LAD-8A, LAD-8E, ITU Channel
LAD-4A (nm)
LAD-8X
1 1 1 1553.33 30
2 2 2 1552.52 31
3 3 1551.72 32
4 4 1550.92 33
5 1549.32 35
6 1548.51 36
7 1547.72 37
8 1546.92 38
LAD-40, LAD-40E Add/Drop Ports

For a table of add/drop port wavelengths, refer to AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments starting on
page 225.
LAD-96, LAD-96E Add/Drop Ports

For a table of add/drop port wavelengths, refer to AWG-96 Wavelength Assignments starting on
page 226.
LAD-2P and LAD-8i 1310 nm Add/Drop Port
LAD-2P LAD-8i
Wavelength range 1270 nm – 1350 nm 1270 nm – 1350 nm

Mux-Demux pair insertion loss 2.4 dB maximum 3.0 dB maximum
LAD-2G 1550 nm Add/Drop Port
LAD-2G
Wavelength range 1530.33 nm – 1565 nm

Mux-Demux pair insertion loss 3.6 dB maximum

DTM-8 and DTM-8G Transponder Modules

The Z-Series DTM-8 is a quad transponder module. DTM-8 modules encode Ethernet and
SONET/SDH client-side signals into a standard G.709 OTN optical channel (OTU2 DWDM) for DWDM
drop-and-insert services in the Z-Series multi-layer transport networking platforms. You can
independently provision each of the four DTM-8 transponders as 10GbE, OC-192/STM-64
SONET/SDH format, or as an OTU2 or OTU1e regenerator.
The DTM-8G module supports two OC-192/SDH and two 10GbE drop interfaces when functioning as
a transponder. When functioning as a regenerator, it supports four wavelengths of any signal format
(OC-192/10GbE). The module is capable of encoding Ethernet and SONET/SDH signals into OTN
optical channels for DWDM drop-and-insert services in Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms. The
DTM-8G module also functions as a quad OTU2 regenerator, and supports express traffic.
Figure 32: Z-Series DTM-8 Module
The following graphics show the DTM-8 and DTM-8G transponder functional block diagrams.
DTM-8
Up to 4 10G Client Up to 4 10GTrunk Interfaces
Interfaces (XFPs) (DWDM XFPs)
3R Regen
OTN Mapping
Any Combination of: Up to 4 OTU2/OTU2e
Up to 4 OTU2/OTU2e
Up to 4 OC-192/STM-64
Up to 4 OTU1e
Up to 4 10GbE LAN
Up to 4 OTU1e
Figure 33: DTM-8 Functional Block Diagram
DTM-8G
Up to 4 10G Client Up to 4 10GTrunk Interfaces
Interfaces (XFPs) (DWDM XFPs)
Any Combination of: 3R Regen

OTN Mapping Up to 4 OTU2
Up to 4 OTU2
Up to 2 OC-192/STM-64
Up to 2 10GbE LAN
Figure 34: DTM-8G Functional Block Diagram

DTM-8/8G modules support passive 1+1 optical protection provided on client and trunk interfaces
using the Transport Protection Module (TPM) and Optical Protection Switch (OPS) equipment:
• 50 ms maximum switch time for LOS conditions
• Sub-150 ms typical switch time for other faults
With optical protection groups enabled using the TPM, you can create bidirectional, protected ODU2
trails and view the working and protect paths and real-time path statuses in Planet Operate.
The Planet Operate user interface enables viewing affected services on service-affecting alarms via
the context menu in the alarms list. For protected trails, the system raises a new alert when the trail
protection state changes to anything other than Idle.
Bidirectional manual switching enables switching from the protection to the working path after a
protection switch in a single operation. During a protection switch, Planet Operate sends protection
switch requests to the A-End and Z-End Z-Series devices at the same time. A minimal,
network-induced lag time is required for switching.
Note: ODU2 protected trails require Planet Operate Release 14.12 or higher.
XFP Interfaces
The DTM-8 and DTM-8G modules utilize 8 XFPs that are configurable as either trunk or client
interfaces. For the DTM-8G module, XFP slots 1, 3, 5, and 7 support OTU2 trunk interfaces. XFP slots 2
and 4 support OC-192, STM-64, and OTU2 client interfaces. XFP slots 6 and 8 support OTU2 and 10GE
LAN client interfaces. For the DTM-8 module, each XFP slot supports an OTU2, OTU2e (overclocked
rate), OTU1e, OC-192/STM-64 SONET/SDH, or 10GE LAN interface.

The following graphics show the DTM-8 and DTM-8G block diagrams.
Figure 35: DTM-8 Block Diagram

Figure 36: DTM-8G Block Diagram

DTM-8 FEC and Regeneration Capabilities/Limitations

If you configure a DTM-8 port pair in Mapping mode (so that a port pair has one OTN port and one
10G client port), the client is wrapped into OTN “containers” (Client -> OPU2 -> ODU2 -> OTU2) that
includes forward error correction (FEC) at the OTU2 level.
Any DTM-8 port signal type provisioned as OTU2 will terminate that OTU2 layer (OTU2 -> ODU2) on
the RX port. The line card evaluates OTU2 FEC and corrects any Line bit errors if necessary. For an
OTN regeneration configuration, the line card transparently passes this error-free ODU2 payload
(with the client inside) to the adjacent port where it wraps the payload into an OTU2 again and adds
new FEC.
Line side is always an OTU2 layer that terminates at each DTM-8, so that section performance
monitoring and error correction is available with OTN. The DTM-8 line card can contend with errors
on the line throughout the network and the line card performance monitoring (PM) allows you to
determine the location of the errors. As long as the errors do not overwhelm the FEC, the module
can correct Line errors wherever they occur and ultimately the client can be dropped error free at
the far end after many regenerations.
The DTM-8 10G port, with G.975 generic forward error correction (GFEC) applied has about
5 microseconds of one-way transit latency; and about 26 microseconds of transit latency with
Enhanced G.975.1/App 4 FEC applied.
Applications
• High density transponding for OTN/DWDM transport of 10GbE LAN and OC-192 / STM-64
services
• 3R regeneration (re-time, re-shape, re-transmit) of OTU2 10G transmit signals
• Wavelength translation
DTM-8/DTM-8G System Requirements

• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
• Two equipped modules provide for 1+1 equipment protection. Passive 1+1 optical protection
provided on client and trunk interfaces using the Transport Protection Module (TPM) and
Optical Protection Switch (OPS) equipment.

DTM-8 Interfaces
• Client-side interfaces:
 Up to four OC-192 or STM-64 (9.95328 Gbps)
 Up to four 10GbE LAN (10.31250 Gbps)
 Up to four OTU2/OTU2e (10.709 Gbps/overclocked 11.0957 Gbps)
 Up to four OTU1e (11.0491 Gbps)
• Trunk-side interfaces:
 Up to four OTU2 (OTU2/ODU2) (10.709 Gbps) with G.709 digital wrapper
 Up to four OTU2e (overclocked 11.0957 Gbps)
 Up to four OTU1e (11.0491 Gbps)
• G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) G.975
• Enhanced Forward Error Correction (EFEC) G.975.1/APP4
• Physical: Front access, fixed wavelength XFP optics
• Transponder and regeneration functions in conjunction with LAD-family modules
• OEO Add /Drop – full OTN and 3R regeneration (re-shape, re-time, re-transmit) with OTN
digital wrapper OAM
DTM-8G Interfaces
• Client-side interfaces:
 Up to two OC-192 or STM-64 (9.95328 Gbps)
 Up to two 10GbE LAN (10.31250 Gbps)
 Up to four OTU2 (10.709225 Gbps)
• Trunk-side interfaces:
 Up to four OTU2 (OTU2/ODU2) (10.709 Gbps) with G.709 digital wrapper
• G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction
• Transponder and regeneration functions in conjunction with LAD-family modules
• OEO Add /Drop – full OTN and 3R regeneration (re-shape, re-time, re-transmit) with digital
wrapper OAM
DTM-8/DTM-8G Management
• G.709 and OTN support on all DWDM interfaces
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1

DTM-8/DTM-8G Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.58 lbs. / 2.08 kg
DTM-8/DTM-8G Power
• Dual –48V DC power feeds to module slots
• DTM-8 power consumption: 75 watts typical, 96 watts maximum
• DTM-8/DTM-8G power consumption: 85 watts typical, 95 watts maximum
DTM-8/DTM-8G Environmental
• +32°F to +122°F / 0°C to +50°C operating temperature
DTM-8/DTM-8G Compliance / Safety

• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
DTM-100G Transponder Module

The Z-Series DTM-100G is a single-port 100 Gbps single-slot transponder module providing DWDM
interfaces for the Z22 (–48V), Z33, and Z77 100 Gbps transponder solutions. The DTM-100G is fully
compatible with existing Z-Series DWDM components including LAD modules and WSS ROADM
modules. This allows the mixing of 10G and 100G waves over the same fiber.
The OIF standard integrated DWDM network interface includes coherent detection support to enable
greater reach, spectral efficiency, and network simplicity. The optical transport network is simplified
by mitigating the need for external dispersion compensation by through integrated electronic
compensation for Chromatic Dispersion (CD) and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).

The DTM-100G module receives a C Form-Factor Pluggable (CFP)-based 100 GbE and generates a
100 Gbps ITU grid wave. On the client side, the DTM-100G module accepts either 100GE or OTU4
(GFEC) and re-maps the client signal into an OTU4 on the line side. The line side OTU4 is encoded
with either standard G.709 GFEC or a higher gain HG-FEC.
The integrated transport functionality includes the following:
• Integrated Optical Internetworking Forum (OIF)-based Coherent C-band tunable 100G optics
 Coherent detection
 Dual-Polarization, Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DP-QPSK)
 50 GHz spacing, tunable
 1500 km reach
 Integrated Chromatic Dispersion and Polarization Mode Dispersion processing
 On-board optical module
• CFP client-side optics:
 100GBASE-SR10 (100 m, 850 nm, MMF)
 100GBASE-LR4 (10 km, 1310 nm, SMF)
• 100 GbE client-signal support
• Supported in Z22, Z33, and Z77 shelves
• Hitless upgrade
• Supported over Z-Series 10G networks
• Co-exist with 10G waves on the same network
Capabilities are based on OIF 100G DWDM module, OTU4 and FEC standards.
The next graphic shows the DTM-100G transponder and OTN functional block diagram.
Figure 37: DTM-100G Transponder and OTN Functional Block Diagram
The following graphic shows the block diagram for the Z-Series DTM-100G module.
100G OTN Digital Termination Module (DTM-100G)
Faceplate
P1
Rx
100G DWDM
MSA
Tx
100G Framer/
OTN Wrapper
P2
Rx
100G CFP
(PLUGGABLE)
Tx
Legend: optical
electrical
Figure 38: DTM-100G Transponder Block Diagram
The DTM-100G transponder module provides the following features and benefits:
• Z22, Z33, and Z77 compatible for common sparing, inventory and operational consistency
• 100G DWDM transponder interface
• OIF and ITU standards based
• Loopback support on both DWDM trunk and client interfaces
• Flexible, pluggable client optics with CFP support
• Complements Z-Series LAD and WSS modules
• Mix 10G and 100G channels
• Simplified A-to-Z provisioning services across multi-layer OTN and DWDM
 G.975 generic forward error correction (GFEC) on DWDM trunk (5–6dB link improvement)
 OTU4 trail trace identifiers on DWDM trunks for granular tracking and visibility
 Span-by-span, per-service transmit and receive performance monitoring with 15-min and
24-hr Performance Monitoring statistics for trend analysis
• Supports link down propagation (also referred to as Laser Shutdown as FDI)
• Passive 1+1 optical protection provided on client and trunk interfaces using the Transport
Protection Module (TPM) and Optical Protection Switch (OPS) equipment
 50 ms maximum switch time for LOS conditions
 Sub-150 ms typical switch time for other faults
With optical protection groups enabled, using the passive Transport Protection Module (TPM), you
can create bidirectional, protected ODU4 trails. Using the Planet Operate Trail Analyzer, you can view
the working and protect paths, and real-time path statuses.
Network Planning Considerations

• 100G does not require DCMs due to its integrated dispersion compensation capability
• 100G is compatible with deployed 10G DCMs
• Complements the Z-Series LAD and WSS line cards
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf) CyOS software Release 4.2 or higher
• Z33 CyOS software Release 4.2 or higher
DTM-100G Applications
The DTM-100G transponder module provides a 100G ITU wave for DWDM transport, with optional
100G OTU4 mapping for enhanced performance and management in Z-Series multi-layer transport
platforms. The DTM-100G module transports 100G waves over a DWDM network that is typically all
optical, such as a point-to-point or a ROADM network. The module is typically deployed in the core
network or in high-density metro areas.
For information on DTM-100G applications with LME-10G10 line cards, see Application 12:
LME-10G10 Configurations starting on page 291.
Interfaces
• Integrated coherent DWDM optics
 Based on OIF standard
 1500 km reach
 Tunable C-band
 50-GHz spacing
 Integrated electronic compensation for Chromatic Dispersion and Polarization Mode
Dispersion
• LC Duplex Line port
 Internal 5x7 Multi-Source Agreement (MSA) standard module
 OTU4 (GFEC, HG-FEC)
• Client-side CFP optics
 100GBase-SR10 (100 m, 850 nm, MMF)
 100GBase-LR4 (10 km, 1310 nm, SMF)
 Additional CFP modules will be qualified based on market availability
 All CFP modules with 10x10 electrical interface supported
Optical Transport
• 100G wave
• 50/100 GHz ITU grid support
• Tunable across the C-band
• Coherent detection
• PM-QPSK modulation
• OTU4 mapping
• G.975 Generic forward error correction (GFEC) and High Gain Forward Error correction
(HG-FEC)
Management
• A – Z circuit provisioning using Planet Operate across multi-layer OTN and DWDM
• DCM connectivity
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
• EMS-based integration creates end-to-end OAM regardless of topology or packet/OTN mixed
links
• Guarantees and verifies SLA conformance
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 8.94 lbs. / 4.06 kg
Power
• DTM-100G power consumption: 140 watts typical, 165 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• NEBS 3 compliant (GR-63 CORE, GR-1089)
Note: Currently available CFP modules work at a temperate range of 0 through 40ºC.
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
DTM-100G2 Transponder Module

The Z-Series DTM-100G2 is a dual-port 100 Gbps single-slot transponder module providing DWDM
interfaces for the Z22 (–48V), Z33, and Z77 100 Gbps transponder solutions. The DTM-100G2 is fully
compatible with existing Z-Series DWDM components including LAD modules and WSS ROADM
modules. This allows the mixing of 10G and 100G waves over the same fiber.
The OIF standard integrated DWDM network interface includes coherent detection support to enable
greater reach, spectral efficiency, and network simplicity. The optical transport network is simplified
by mitigating the need for external dispersion compensation through integrated electronic
compensation for Chromatic Dispersion (CD) and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).
The DTM-100G2 module receives a C Form-Factor Pluggable CFP-based 100 GbE and generates a
100 Gbps ITU grid wave. On the client side, the DTM-100G2 module accepts either 100GE or OTU4
(GFEC). On the line side, the OTU4 is encoded with either standard G.709 GFEC or a higher gain
HG-FEC.
The integrated CF type transport functionality includes the following:
• C-Form Pluggable (CFP) based, coherent C-band tunable 100G optics
 50 GHz spacing, tunable
 Integrated Chromatic Dispersion and Polarization Mode Dispersion processing
• CFP client-side optics:
 100GBase-SR10 (100 m , 850 nm, MMF)
 100GBase-LR4 (10 km, 1310 nm, SMF)
 100GBase-ER4 (40 km, 1310 nm, SMF)
 100GBase-LR10 (2 km, 1550 nm, SMF)
• 100 GbE client-signal support
• Supported in Z22, Z33, and Z77 shelves
• Hitless upgrade
• Supported over Z-Series 10G networks
• Co-exist with 10G waves on the same network
Capabilities are based on the CFP 100G DWDM module, OTU4 and FEC standards.
The following graphic shows the block diagram for the Z-Series DTM-100G2 module.
Figure 39: DTM-100G2 Block Diagram
The DTM-100G2 transponder module provides the following features and benefits:
• Z22, Z33, and Z77 compatible for common sparing, inventory and operational consistency
• 100G DWDM transponder interface
• OIF and ITU standards based
• Loopback support on both DWDM trunk and client interfaces
• Flexible, pluggable client optics with CFP support
• Complements Z-Series LAD and WSS modules
• Mix 10G and 100G channels
• Simplified A-to-Z provisioning services across multi-layer OTN and DWDM
 G.975 generic forward error correction (GFEC) on DWDM trunk (5–6dB link improvement)
 OTU4 trail trace identifiers on DWDM trunks for granular tracking and visibility
 Span-by-span, per-service transmit and receive performance monitoring with 15-min and
24-hr Performance Monitoring statistics for trend analysis
• Supports link down propagation (also referred to as Laser Shutdown as FDI)
 50 ms maximum switch time for LOS conditions
 Sub-150 ms typical switch time for other faults
With optical protection groups enabled, using the passive Transport Protection Module (TPM), you
can create bidirectional, protected ODU4 trails. Using the Planet Operate Trail Analyzer, you can view
the working and protect paths, and real-time path statuses.
System Requirements
DTM-100G2 Applications
The DTM-100G2 transponder module provides a 100G ITU wave for DWDM transport, with optional
100G OTU4 mapping for enhanced performance and management in Z-Series multi-layer transport
platforms. The DTM-100G2 module transports 100G waves over a DWDM network that is typically all
optical, such as a point-to-point or a ROADM network. The module is typically deployed in the core
network or in high-density metro areas.
For information on DTM-100G2 applications with LME-10G10 line cards, see Application 12:
LME-10G10 Configurations starting on page 291.
DTM-100G2 Interfaces
• Client-side pluggable 100G CFP
• Line-side pluggable 100G CFP
• Client-side services 100G Ethernet and OTU4
• Line-side format OTU4
• Transponder and regeneration functions in conjunction with Z Series LAD module
Optical Transport
• 100G wave
• 50/100 GHz ITU grid support
• Tunable across the C-band
• Coherent detection
• PM-QPSK modulation
• OTU4 mapping
• G.975 Generic forward error correction (GFEC) and High Gain Forward Error correction
(HG-FEC)
Management
• A – Z circuit provisioning using Planet Operate across multi-layer OTN and DWDM
• DCM connectivity
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
links
• Guarantees and verifies SLA conformance
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 8.94 lbs / 4.06 kg
Power
• DTM-100G power consumption: 90 watts typical, 100 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance/Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
2.5G-LME4 Multiplex-Transponder Module

The Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 is a 4-port muxponder (multiplex-transponder) module with integrated OTN
encoding for efficient 10G wavelength transport in the Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms.
Each module accepts any combination of up to four 2.5G OC-48, STM-16, or OTU1 signals that are
encoded/translated into discrete ODU1s and then multiplexed into a high-capacity 10G OTU2
wavelength for managed DWDM transport.
Figure 40: Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 Module
Note: An ODU1 Express cross-connect (OC-48/STM-16 express) between a pair of

2.5G-LME4 modules requires a Ring Closure Module (RCM) to be installed in the
Z77 shelf or a Release 4.0 (or higher) Z77 shelf equipped with the XC-2800 switch
fabric. RCMs and the XC-2800 switch fabric are not required for the Z22 or the Z33
shelf.
The XC-2800 switch fabric consists of four individual switch-fabric modules
installed in the Z77 horizontal Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slots. For additional
information on the XC-2800, see XC-2800 Switch Fabric starting on page 231.
For additional information on the RCMs, see Ring Closure Modules starting on
page 230.
The following graphic shows the 2.5G-LME4 muxponder functional block diagram.
Up to 4 2.5G Client OTU2 10G Trunk Interface

Interfaces (SFPs) (DWDM XFPs)
ODU2
Any Combination of: Mux/Demux
Up to 4 OTU1 1 OTU2
Up to 4 OC-48
Up to 4 STM-16
Figure 41: Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 Functional Block Diagram
Applications
Achieve fiber relief by combining multiple existing 2.5G SONET/SDH and/or OTU1 services into one
optical 10G channel for optional DWDM transport.

• Z-Series compatible for scalable investment protection, common sparing/ inventory and
operational consistency
• All client ports support a mix of SONET/SDH and OTU1 inputs
• ODU1 ADM for add/drop ring multiplexing of OC-48/STM-16 over optical transport
• Modular SFP/XFP optical interfaces
• Flexible encoding of individual OC-48 or STM-16 services into separate ODU1 signals for
per-service flow visibility and OTN enhancement
 Clear channel transport of all SONET/SDH line overhead for service and management
transparency
• Integrated multiplexing of up to four 2.5G ODU1 services payloads into a single 10G OTU2
providing wavelength efficiency
• Integrated multi-layer G.709 OTN mapping (ODU1, ODU2, OTU2) to enhance performance
and management
 G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) on DWDM trunk (5–6dB link
improvement)
 ODU1, ODU2, and OTU2 trail trace identifiers on optical channels
 Span by span, per-service transmit and receive performance monitoring with 15-min and
24-hr PM stats for trending
• Supported by the Blue Planet Software Defined Network (SDN) system, which provides
network virtualization and service-enabling capabilities
Trunk Interface
The 2.5G-LME4 module utilizes a single XFP for its trunk interface. The DWDM multiplexing
components and the XFP module in use determine optical performance.
• Line format: OTU2
• FEC: GFEC – G.975, 10.709 Gbps; UFEC – G.975.1 Appendix 7, 11.095 Gbps
Client Interfaces
The 2.5G-LME4 module utilizes four SFP modules for client interfaces.
• Line formats: OTU-1, OC-48, STM-16
• FEC (OTU-1): GFEC – 9.75, 2.68 Gbps
• Jitter and wander: GR-253 compliant
The following graphic shows the 2.5G-LME4 module block diagram.
Figure 42: 2.5G-LME4 Block Diagram
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
Management
• Standard SONET/SDH OTN General Communication Channel (GCC0)
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4 lbs. / 1.8 kg
Power
• 2.5G-LME4 power consumption: 55 watts typical, 65 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
LME-10G10 DWDM Muxponder/Transponder

The Z-Series LME-10G10 is a highly scalable, multiservice 100G OTN muxponding module
optimized for network transport applications. The LME-10G10 complements the Z-Series
DTM-100G coherent transponder module to provide an end-to-end packet and OTN transport
solution. Supported across all Z-Series platforms, the LME-10G10 provides the following
interfaces:
• Ten SFP+-based multi-service client ports (up to 11.1 Gbps)
• Single CFP-based network optical port (up to 112 Gbps optics)
Figure 43: Z-Series LME-10G10 Module
Applications
The LME-10G10 module is optimized for diverse Ethernet and multi-technology aggregation
applications, including:
• Multi-service muxponder for transport applications
• Aggregating broadband access platforms
• Fiber or wavelength constrained environments
• Mix of Ethernet, FC, OTN, and SONET/SDH
For descriptions and diagrams of the available configurations using the LME-10G10 module, see
Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations starting on page 291.

• Z22, Z33, and Z77 compatible for common sparing/ inventory and operational consistency
• All client ports support a mix of 10 GbE, SDH/SONET (OC-192/STM-64), 10G FC, 8G FC, and
OTU2
• Modular SFP+ client optical interfaces
• 100 Gbps capacity per module
• CFP-based network interface provides optimum cost/reach flexibility with future support of
pluggable DWDM optics
• Multiplexing of up to ten 10G ODU2 services payloads into a single 100G OTU4 for
wavelength efficiency
• Integrated G.709 OTN mapping (ODU2, ODU4, OTU4) enhancing performance and
management
• Transparent synchronization
• Span by span, per-service transmit and receive performance monitoring with 15-min and
24-hr performance monitoring statistics
• The LME-10G10d (part number 800-138-02) released in 8.0/15.08, supports configuration of
the OSPF in-band management via the general communications channel (GCC)
Services
• 10 GbE
• SDH/SONET (STM-64/OC-192)
• 8G and 10G FC
• OTU2
The LME-10G10 provides transparent synchronization and up to 100 Gbps capacity per
module. The following graphic illustrates the LME-10G10 functional block diagram:
ODU2
Mapper
ODU2
Up to Ten 10G Client Mapper
Interfaces (SFP+) ODU4
Any Combination: OTU4 100G
Mux/
- 10GE Trunk Interface
Demux (CFP)
- 10G FC
- 8G FC
- OC-192/STM-64
- OTU2/OTU2e
ODU2
Mapper
Figure 44: LME-10G10 Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the LME-10G10 block diagram.
LME-10G10 Transponder Functionality

The LME-10G10 line card supports transponder functionality allowing the interconnection of client
ports without a CFP transceiver. The feature functionality includes:
• 10-port transponder function
• Client OC-192/STM-64, 10GbE, 8G FC, 10G FC, OTU2 support
• Client-side SFP+ support of 850 nm, 1310 nm, 1550 nm, CWDM, and DWDM optics
• OTN forward error correction (FEC)
• Ability to connect adjacent client ports using the Planet Operate cross-connections interface
Note: You must set the client signal of one client in the card pair to OTU2, OTU2e, or OTU1e. The
other client in the card pair can be any compatible client rate.
The LME-10G10 line card can function as a muxponder (the default) or as a transponder. However, if
you change the mode of the line card, you must remove all connections prior to changing the mode.
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
LME-10G10 Signal and Card Interoperability

100G Trunk Interface
The ODU4 layer on the LME-10G10 module can be discovered or provisioned using the A-to-Z
provisioning tool or EMS panels in the Planet Operate management interface. The following
table summarizes the supported provisioning when setting up LME-10G10 trunk connections
with other Z-Series modules such as DTM-100G, LAD, AWG, and WSS line cards.
LME-10G10 Trunk ODU4 Layer Between

Supported Layers
Connection to ... LME-10G10s
LME-10G10 Optical trail1 Auto-discovered
DTM-100G Optical trail1 Auto-discovered

Important! — Before provisioning a
connection to the DTM-100G line card, you
must do the following:
1. Configure the DTM-100G CFP Fiber Port as
an OTU4 signal type using the Planet Operate
EMS panels (Transport Resources, Physical
Resources tab).
2. Route a fiber patch from the DTM-100G
CFP port to the LME-10G10 CFP port.
DTM-100G | LAD-2/4/8 Optical trail1 Discovered or Provisioned

ODU4 circuit2
DTM-100G | AWG | LAD-40/96 Optical trail1 Discovered or Provisioned

ODU4 circuit2
DTM-100G | AWG | WSS Optical trail1 Discovered or Provisioned

ODU4 circuit2
Notes:
1
The specified wavelength is ignored.
2
When LME-10G10 trunk interfaces are specified as endpoints of ODU4 circuits, an optical trail must
exist between the two nodes.
10G Client Interfaces

The LME-10G10 SFP+ client interfaces support ODU2 cross-connections with the following
configuration rules:
• The ODU4 trunk Termination Point (TP) contains 10 ODU2 containers, each capable of
supporting ODU2, ODU2e, and ODU1e signal mapping.
• ODU2/ODU2e/ODU1e Add/Drop: You can cross connect a trunk ODU2 TP container to any
client TP.
• You cannot interconnect LME-10G10 client ports, either on the same card or across cards in
adjacent slots.
• ODU2 trail creation using the A-to-Z provisioning tool in Planet Operate does not require a
fiber patch between the client module and the LME-10G10 line card in the same node or
within the same multi-node group.
• The module supports ODU2/ODU2e/ODU1e Express cross-connections. For more
information see the "LME-10G10 Express Cross-Connection Rules" in this topic and to the
"Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations starting on page 291" section of the Z-Series
Engineering and Planning Guide.
The following table shows the supported client signal types and the equivalent ODU2 and
MTNM layer rate mapping.
A-to-Z MTNM
Client Signal Type ODU2 Mapping
Client Layer Equivalent
ODU2 ODU2 ODU2
OTU2e ODU2e ODU2e
OTU1e ODU1e ODU1e
OC-192 / STM-64 ODU2 OC-192 / STM-64
10GbE-LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e 10G Ethernet
10GbE-WAN ODU2 OC-192 / STM-64
10G-FC ODU2e FC 1200
8G-FC ODU2 FC 800
The following table shows the Z-Series modules that can interconnect with the LME-10G10 line
card via the client interfaces.
LME-10G10 Client
Signal Types A-to-Z MTNM Client Layer Rate
Connection to ...
2.5G-LME4 OTU2 ODU2
FLX-216i OTU2 ODU2
MSE-1482 OTU2 / STM-64 OC-192 or STM-64

OTU2 / OC-192
PME-216i OTU2, OTU2e, OTU1e, 10GbE LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e,

10G Ethernet (Discovery)
PME-412 OTU2, OTU2e, OTU1e, 10GbE LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e,

PSW-618 OTU2, OTU2e, OTU1e, 10GbE LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e,

PSW-10G10 OTU2, OTU2e, OTU1e, 10GbE LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e,

PSW-10G20 OTU2, OTU2e, OTU1e, 10GbE LAN ODU2, ODU2e, ODU1e,

SFT-10G16 OTU2 None
LME-10G10 Express Cross-Connections Rules and Guidelines

• LME-10G10 express ports are automatically configured when you designate A-End and Z-End
endpoints that span two line cards located in a card pair (adjacent odd/even slots). A circuit
created using the A-to-Z Provisioning tool can span multiple transit nodes.
• Plan for mixed use of express and add/drop cross-connections, assigning add/drop client
ports beginning with the smallest port number on each card pair to avoid line card resource
conflicts. When ODU2 port resources are exhausted and you attempt to provision a circuit
requiring an express cross-connection, Planet Operate displays a message indicating that
port resources are not available.
• To support LME-10G10 express cross-connections, you must set both line cards in the card
pair to Muxponder mode (the default mode).
• On the LME-10G10 line card, you cannot add/drop a client port to the paired card in the
same card pair. For this reason, the system does not always select the shortest route in a ring
configuration.
• An LME-10G10 card pair supports a maximum of ten (10) ODU2 express connections.
• Each of the ten ODU2 channels contained within the LME-10G10 CFP can function as either
an express or an add/drop cross-connection, and client ports assigned to express
cross-connections are not available for use as add/drop ports. For each express
cross-connection, the system reserves two available client ports (one from each line card in
the card pair) of the same port number, thereby reducing the maximum number of add/drop
connections on each card by one. (For example, for two express cross-connections
configured in a card pair, each card in the pair can support a maximum of eight add/drop
connections.) The system allocates express cross-connections beginning with the highest
available port number, preferring ports that do not have a transceiver inserted.
 To view client port availability for express provisioning, from the Transport Resources tab
expand the line card CFP port and select the ODU2 channel. In the General tab, the
Resource Used for Express field displays whether a transceiver is present and the port
is in use.
 To view which ODU2 express connection is using a given client port (with a transceiver
plugged in), from the Transport Resources tab expand the SFP object and select the
10G Multi-Service Fiber Port. In the General tab, the Express ODU2 Using Resource
field displays the ODU2 channel using the client resources.
 After removing an LME-10G10 express cross-connection, the associated client ports
become available for A-to-Z provisioning.
• To support non-protected LME-10G10 express cross-connections in a Z77 shelf, you must
insert at least three RCM or XC-2800 modules in the horizontal EFM slots. For protected
express cross-connections, four modules are required.
Interfaces
• Client side interface (SFP+ pluggable):
 10 ports supporting up to 11.1 Gbps (multi-service)
 A variety of optics supported, including 850 nm, 1310 nm, and 1550 nm
• Trunk side interface (CFP pluggable):
 1 OTU4 with G.709 digital wrapper
 Flexible reach
Optical Transport
• Up to ten 10G OTU2s per module
• FEC (GFEC) G.709 + G.975 {RS(255,239)}
• Enhanced FEC (EFEC) G.709 + G.975.1 Appendix 4
Management
• Supported by Planet Operate:
• End-to-end and OAM (independent of topology/packet/OTN network mix)
• Guaranteed SLAs (provisioning and conformance verification)
• G.709 and OTN support on all DWDM
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
• LME-10G10 power consumption: 165 watts typical, 200 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
Note: Currently available CFP modules work at a temperate range of 0ºC through 40ºC.
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PME-412 Packet Multiplexer Module

The Z-Series PME-412 module is an Ethernet Layer 2 switch with integrated OTN functionality. The
transport module supports connection-oriented Ethernet transport with Provider Backbone Bridging
with Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) functionality.
Each PME-412 module provides 80 Gbps of Ethernet switching capacity and supports up to four 10G
XFP interfaces, of which two have optional OTN functionality, plus twelve SFP interfaces for Gigabit
Ethernet (GE) connectivity. It is connected to another PME-412 line card across the backplane via a
20G interface to form a protection pair of line cards supporting Link Aggregation Groups (LAG).
The PME-412 module provides an in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in bandwidth.
A single module supports a 10G ring configuration with two 10GE and twelve GE tributaries. Two
PME-412 modules provide a protected ring configuration for 2x10G rings with 10G and 1GE
tributaries.
The physical interfaces support four XFPs and twelve SFPs. The SFP ports support both optical SFP
and copper SFP modules. In optical SFP mode, it supports 1000Base-F and 100-FX mode. In copper
SFP mode, it supports 10/100/1000Base-T. You can disable auto-negotiation and provision the port
speed to 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps. Line sensing of Media Dependent Interface (MDI) and Media
Dependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX) in copper SFP port connections is automatic.
Ring Closure Modules (RCMs) or the Release 4.0 (or higher) XC-2800 switch fabric modules are
required and must be installed in the Z77 horizontal Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slots to
support the following PME-412 applications:
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation using multiple ports between a pair of PME-412 modules
• A TESI Express connection using a pair of PME-412 modules
• An unprotected Ethernet drop over a protected TESI using a pair of PME-412 modules
Note: For PME-412 applications, you typically configure the Z77 shelf with four RCMs
or XC-2800 switch fabric modules. Install all four RCMs or XC-2800 switch fabric
modules in the Z77 horizontal EFM slots. RCM cards and the XC-2800 switch fabric
modules are not required for the Z22 or the Z33 shelf.
For more information on the RCMs, see Ring Closure Modules starting on page 230.
For more information on the XC-2800, see XC-2800 Switch Fabric starting on page
231.
Figure 45: Z-Series PME-412 Module
The following graphic shows the PME-412 trunk and client interfaces functional block diagram.
Up to 2 10GbE Client
Interfaces (XFPs)
Up to 2 10GTrunk Interfaces
(DWDM XFPs)
80G
Ethernet Any Combination of
Switch Up to 2 OTU2
Up to 2 OTU2e
Up to 2 10GbE
Up to 12 1GbE Client
Interfaces (SFPs)
Up to 2 10GbE Interfaces
to Backplane for Protection
and
Inter-module Switching
Figure 46: PME-412 Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the PME-412 block diagram.
Figure 47: PME-412 Block Diagram
PME-412 In-Band Management Channel

The PME-412 module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the Z-Series shelf is configured with PME-412 line card and the shelf does not have a
LAD or WSS/AWG module or the traffic-carrying PME interfaces are not fiber patched to an installed
LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab)
to 10GE LAN (default). If you have a Z22 shelf with a PME line card (the Z22 LAD-2P and LAD-2G do
not provide an OSC), set the 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter to 10GE LAN. When the
PME 10G fiber port is provisioned with a signal type of 10GE LAN or 10GE WAN, the system can use
the PME line card in-band management channel to provide node-to-node communication.
If the PME-412 line card is installed in a Z33 or Z77 shelf and a LAD or WSS module is providing the
OSC and the traffic-carrying PME interfaces are fiber patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, you can
set the PME 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter to OTU-2 (General sub-tab). When the
PME fiber port has a provisioned signal type of OTU2, the PME line card 100 Mbps of bandwidth that
was reserved for the in-band management channel returns to the PME 10G fiber port for payload.
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PME Line Cards

Z-Series PME-412 and PME-216i line cards support Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE). SyncE
provides the following features:
• Ability to recover timing from PME 10GE ports or BITS for use as system timing references for
the system clock generation, and/or derived T1/E1 timing.
Note: The PME 1000BASE-F (1GE) ports cannot be used as system timing references for the
system clock generation and/or derived T1/E1 timing.
• Ability to terminate the Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel (ESMC) to transmit and
receive Synchronization Status Messages (SSM).
• Transmit Ethernet signals that are synchronous to the system clock.
• SyncE support for PME ports provisioned with a signal type of OTU2e.
You must enable SyncE on a per-Ethernet port basis; the default is Disabled. When you enable SyncE
on any given Ethernet port, 1GE or 10GE, its ESMC channel activates, which allows the transmission
and reception of SSM. Additionally, if it is a PME 10GE port, it is available for use by the timing
subsystem as a timing reference for system clock generation and/or to generate a derived T1/E1
signal for use by the BITS equipment.
Although you cannot use a packet line card 1GE port to recover timing references, you can use it to
provide a timing reference to external equipment.
Note: Because GFP is asynchronous, the recovered OTU2 timing of PME ports are not “Ethernet
timing” (in the GFP client layer). The supported OTU2 timing is derived from the carrier (server)
signal.
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
PME-412 Ethernet Services, OAM, QoS, and

Synchronization
For a guide to Z-Series packet features by module, see Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and
Interoperability starting on page 245 in this guide.
• ITU/MEF E-Line (EPL and EVPL) and E-LAN (E-LAN and E-VLAN) services
• VLANs with independent VLAN learning (802.1Q): 4,096
• Q-in-Q (802.1ad)
• MAC bridging (802.1D)
• PBB (Provider Backbone Bridging 802.1ah)
• PBB-TE 802.1Qay for connection oriented Ethernet
• Spanning Tree (802.1D), Multiple Spanning Tree (802.1s), and Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1w)
support
• Link Aggregation (802.3ad)
• Trunk (NNI) protection
• Ethernet Line Protection ITU-T G.8031, PBB-TE Layer Protection
• Ethernet Ring Protection ITU-T G.8032, PBB-TE Layer Protection
• Client (UNI) protection
 Link Aggregation (802.1AX)
 Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1w)
• OAM
 Link OAM 802.3ah and OTN
 Service OAM 802.1ag
o Up and Down MEPs
• QoS
 Ethernet ingress policing (per service)
o Two-rate, three-color marker
o Granularity in 1 Mbps increments
o Ethernet P-bit priority to CoS mapping
o DSCP to CoS mapping
o Per-CoS policing
 Ethernet egress shaping (per aggregated service)
 Ethernet egress policing

o 8 CoS queues per port
o Per-port aggregate shaping
o Per-port/CoS shaping
o Strict priority scheduling
o Weighed round-robin scheduling
o Deficit round-robin scheduling
• Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)
Optical Transport
• Up to 2 10GbE rings per module, or
• Up to 2 10G OTU2 (10.709 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module, or
• Up to 2 10G OTU2e (11.0957 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module, or
• Up to 2 OTU1e (11.0491 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module
• G.975 Generic forward error correction (GFEC)
• Enhanced G.975.1/App.4 (enhanced FEC)
Interfaces
• Up to 4 10GbE LAN/WAN (XFP)
• Up to 2 10G OTU2 (XFP)
• Up to 2 10G OTU2e (XFP)
• Up to 12 GbE (SFP)
• Up to 2 10GbE backplane interfaces for module to module Ethernet switching and protection
Note: Single-fiber XFP and SFP+ transceiver modules are designed specifically
for datacomm applications. These transceiver modules do not support OTU2
signal types.
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
• PME-412 power consumption: 88 watts typical, 126 watts maximum
Note: This reflects the typical power requirements of 4 XFP and 12 SFP transceivers.
Environmental
Standards
• MAC bridging (IEEE 802.1D)
• VLANs (IEEE 802.1Q)
• Q-in-Q (IEEE 802.1ad)
• Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB) IEEE 802.1ah
• Provider Backbone Bridging – Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) IEEE 802.1Qay
• Spanning tree (IEEE 802.1D)
• Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)
• Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)
• Link OAM (IEEE 802.3ah Clause 57)
• Connectivity Fault Management (IEEE 802.1ag)
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PME-216i Packet Multiplexer Module

The Z-Series PME-216i module is an advanced, high-capacity Ethernet switch providing
MEF-compliant services with connection-oriented Ethernet transport. The Z22, Z33, and Z77
multi-layer transport platforms support PME-216i I-Temp transport modules for fiber efficient 10G
transport using 10GbE with OTN encapsulation (OTU2) options.
Each PME-216i module supports up to two 10G XFP interfaces for 10 Gigabit Ethernet LAN/WAN and
OTU2 connectivity, plus sixteen SFP interfaces for Gigabit Ethernet connectivity. The SFP ports
support both optical SFP and copper SFP modules. In optical SFP mode, it supports 1000Base-F and
100-FX mode. In copper SFP mode, it supports 10/100/1000Base-T. You can disable auto-negotiation
and provision the port speed to 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps. Line sensing of Media Dependent Interface
(MDI) and Media Dependent Interface with Crossover (MDIX) in copper SFP port connections is
automatic.
The PME-216i module provides 60 Gbps of Ethernet switching capacity. Connect a PME-216i line card
to another PME-216i line card across the backplane via a 20G interface to form a protection pair of
line cards supporting Link Aggregation Groups (LAG) and G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection for the
client interface. The card pair can also be used to protect network interfaces via G.8031 linear
protection and G.8032 Ethernet Ring Protection.
The PME-216i module supports VLANs at both the provider (802.1ad) and customer (802.1Q) level for
advanced Ethernet services. Support for Provider Backbone Bridge – Traffic Engineered (PBB-TE per
802.1Qay) provides connection-oriented Ethernet transport performance and scale. The module is
MEF compliant supporting EPL, EVPL, E-LAN, and E-VLAN services.
The PME-216i module supports Y.1731 end-to-end service OAM performance monitoring functions
and mechanisms enabled on UNI flow points. Y.1731 collects Delay Measurement (DM), Delay
Variation Measurement (DVM), and Loss Measurement (LM) necessary for Service Level Agreement
(SLA) services monitoring. The PME-216i line card supports Y.1731 monitoring for point-to-point
service configurations (EPL and EVPL services).
Figure 48: Z-Series PME-216i Module
The following graphic shows the PME-216i trunk and client interfaces functional block diagram.
Up to 2 10GTrunk Interfaces
ODU2 (DWDM XFPs)
Mapper
Up to 16 GbE Client
60G Any Combination:
Interfaces (SFPs)
Ethernet Up to 2 OTU2
Switch Up to 2 10GbE
ODU2
Mapper
Plus up to 2 10GbE Interfaces

to Backplane for Protection and
Inter-module Switching
Figure 49: PME-216i Functional Block Diagram
Ring Closure Modules (RCMs) or XC-2800 switch fabric modules are required and must be
installed in Z77 horizontal Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slots to support the following
PME-216i applications:
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation using multiple ports between a pair of PME-216i modules
• A TESI Express connection using a pair of PME-216i modules
• An unprotected Ethernet drop over a protected TESI using a pair of PME-216i modules
Note: For PME-216i applications, the Z77 shelf is typically configured with four
RCMs or with the XC-2800 switch fabric. You must install all four RCMs or XC-2800
switch fabric modules in the Z77 horizontal EFM slots. RCMs and XC-2800 switch
fabric modules are not required for the Z22 or the Z33 shelf.
The XC-2800 switch fabric consists of four individual switch-fabric modules
installed in the Z77 shelf horizontal EFM slots. For additional information on the
XC-2800, see XC-2800 Switch Fabric starting on page 231.
For additional information on RCMs, see Ring Closure Modules starting on page
230.
The next graphic shows the PME-216i block diagram.
Figure 50: PME-216i Block Diagram
PME-216i In-Band Management Channel

The PME-216i module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the Z-Series shelf is configured with PME-216i line card and the shelf does not have a
LAD or WSS/AWG module or the traffic-carrying PME interfaces are not fiber patched to an installed
LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab)
to 10GE LAN (default). If you have a Z22 shelf with a PME line card (the Z22 LAD-2P and LAD-2G do
not provide an OSC), set the 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter to 10GE LAN. When the
PME 10G fiber port is provisioned with a signal type of 10GE LAN or 10GE WAN, the system can use
the PME line card in-band management channel to provide node-to-node communication.
If the PME-216i line card is installed in a Z33 or Z77 shelf and a LAD or WSS/AWG module is providing
the OSC and the traffic-carrying PME interfaces are fiber patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, you
can set the PME 10G ETH/OTN Fiber Port Signal Type parameter to OTU-2 (General sub-tab). When
the PME fiber port has a provisioned signal type of OTU2, the PME line card 100 Mbps of bandwidth
that was reserved for the in-band management channel returns to the PME 10G fiber port for
payload.
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PME Line Cards

Z-Series PME-412 and PME-216i line cards support Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE). SyncE
provides the following features:
• Ability to recover timing from PME 10GE ports or BITS for use as system timing references for
the system clock generation, and/or derived T1/E1 timing.
Note: The PME 1000BASE-F (1GE) ports cannot be used as system timing references for the
system clock generation and/or derived T1/E1 timing.
• Transmit Ethernet signals that are synchronous to the system clock.
• SyncE support for PME ports provisioned with a signal type of OTU2e.
You must enable SyncE on a per-Ethernet port basis; the default is Disabled. When you enable SyncE
on any given Ethernet port, 1GE or 10GE, its ESMC channel activates, which allows the transmission
and reception of SSM. Additionally, if it is a PME 10GE port, it is available for use by the timing
subsystem as a timing reference for system clock generation and/or to generate a derived T1/E1
signal for use by the BITS equipment.
Although you cannot use a packet line card 1GE port to recover timing references, you can use it to
provide a timing reference to external equipment.
Note: Because GFP is asynchronous, the recovered OTU2 timing of PME ports are not “Ethernet
timing” (in the GFP client layer). The supported OTU2 timing is derived from the carrier (server)
signal.
System Requirements
• Z22
Note: A +24V PME-216i line card is available for the Z22 +24V shelf model. The functional
specifications are identical to the –48V PME-216i line card.
• Z33
• Z77
PME-216i Ethernet Services, OAM, QoS, and

Synchronization
For a comparison of Z-Series packet modules, see Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and
Interoperability starting on page 245.
• ITU/MEF E-Line (EPL and EVPL) and E-LAN (E-LAN and E-VLAN) services
• Q-in-Q (802.1ad)
• MAC bridging (802.1D)
• PBB (Provider Backbone Bridging 802.1ah)
• PBB-TE 802.1Qay for connection oriented Ethernet
• Spanning Tree (802.1D), Multiple Spanning Tree (802.1s), and Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1w)
support
• Link Aggregation (802.3ad)
• Trunk (NNI) protection
 Ethernet Line Protection ITU-T G.8031, PBB-TE Layer Protection
 Ethernet Ring Protection ITU-T G.8032, PBB-TE Layer Protection with a maximum of 32
ERP nodes
• Client (UNI) protection
 Link Aggregation (802.1AX)
 Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1w)
• Link OAM 802.3ah and OTN
• Service OAM 802.1ag and Y.1731
 Up and Down MEPs
 Performance Monitoring
o Frame Delay
o Frame Delay Variation (Jitter)
o Frame Loss
 Ethernet Service Activation Test Methodology (Y.1564, formally Y.156sam)
o Hardware capable, software support in a future Release
• QoS
 Ethernet ingress policing (per service)
o Two-rate, three-color marker
o Ethernet P-bit priority to CoS mapping
o DSCP to CoS mapping
o Per-CoS policing
 Ethernet egress shaping (per aggregated service)
 Ethernet egress policing

o 8 CoS queues per port
o Per-port aggregate shaping
o Per-port/CoS shaping
o Strict priority scheduling
o Weighed round-robin scheduling
o Deficit round-robin scheduling
• Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE)
Standards
• Provider Backbone Bridging (PBB) IEEE 802.1ah
• Provider Backbone Bridging – Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) IEEE 802.1Qay
• Spanning tree (IEEE 802.1D)
• Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)
• Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)
• Link OAM (IEEE 802.3ah Clause 57)
• Connectivity Fault Management (IEEE 802.1ag)
• OAM functions and mechanisms for Ethernet-based networks (ITU-T Y.1731)
Optical Transport
• Up to 2 10GbE rings per module, or
• Up to 2 10G OTU2 (10.709 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module, or
• Up to 2 10G OTU2e (11.0957 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module, or
• Up to 2 OTU1e (11.0491 Gbps) trunk interfaces per module
Interfaces
• Up to 2 10GbE LAN/WAN (XFP)
• Up to 2 10G OTU2 (XFP)
• Up to 16 GbE (SFP)
• Up to 2 10GbE backplane interfaces for module to module Ethernet switching and protection
Note: Single-fiber XFP and SFP+ transceivers for Z-Series modules are designed
specifically for datacomm applications. These transceiver modules do not support
OTU2 signal types.
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
links
Power
• Dual –48V DC power feeds to module slots (Z22 –48V DC model, Z33, and Z77)
• Dual +24V DC power feeds to module slots (Z22 +24V DC model)
• PME-216i power consumption: 67 watts typical, 97 watts maximum
Note: This reflects the typical power requirements of 2 XFP and 16 SFP transceivers.
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.25 lbs. / 1.93 kg
Environmental
• –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C operating temperature
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PSW-10G10 Packet Module

The PSW-10G10 is a high capacity 10-port 10 GbE switch module for aggregating and grooming
Ethernet services. The PSW-10G10 module is optimized for high-capacity Ethernet aggregation and
end-to-end packet transport solutions. PSW-10G10 modules support ten 10 GbE ports through four
XFP and six SFP+ interfaces. The PSW-10G10 module supports standards-based Connection-Oriented
Ethernet (COE) for increased network performance and scale. The module also supports optional
user configurable OTU2 mapping with FEC for transport over optical networks.
You can deploy the PSW-10G10 module in all Z-Series shelves. For details, refer to Packet Line Cards
– Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245. The transport module supports COE
transport with Provider Backbone Bridging with Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) functionality (per IEEE
802.1Qay), including E-LAN and E-VLAN services. In the 14-slot Z77 shelf, each PSW-10G10 module
interconnects with other modules through a 2.8 Tbps Ethernet and OTN switching fabric (XC-2800).
The PSW-10G10 module supports VLANs at both the provider (IEEE 802.1ad) and customer (IEEE
802.1Q) level for advanced Ethernet services.
Figure 51: Z-Series PSW-10G10 Packet Module
The next graphic illustrates the PSW-10G10 trunk and client interfaces functional block
diagram.
ODU2 4 x 10 GbE XFP

200G Mapper
Backplane
(2.8 Tbps XC-2800 common Ethernet
Ethernet and OTN switching Switch
fabric in Z77)
ODU2 6 x 10 GbE SFP+

Mapper
Figure 52: PSW-10G10 Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the PSW-10G10 block diagram.
Figure 53: PSW-10G10 Block Diagram
Applications
• 10 GbE client interfaces to routers and other network elements
• Interface module for chassis-wide 2.8 Tbps Ethernet switch fabric
• 10 GbE switching function with OTU2 for transport over OEO or ROADM optical networks
• Advanced aggregation and E-Line / E-LAN MEF services
• Achieving transport grade SLAs with packet services
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation using multiple ports between PSW modules in the same shelf

• 200 Gbps switch capacity per module
• High density 10 GbE interface connectivity
• Aggregation of 10G on the card or across the shelf using the XC-2800 Z77 switch fabric
modules
• A-to-Z provisioning of Ethernet services across multi-layer Ethernet, Ethernet transport, OTN,
and DWDM
• Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) and Enhanced Forward Error Correction (EFEC)
• Advanced MEF Ethernet services (E-Line, E-LAN)
• Connection Oriented Ethernet – IEEE 802.1ah for high performance transport and network
efficiency
• Ethernet switch functionality provides the flexibility to augment or replace existing switches
or routers
 Upgrading capacity and functionality
 Easy migration of services from legacy Ethernet switches – for redeployment and reuse in
lesser transport intensive applications
• ITU-T G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction on DWDM trunk (5–6 dB link improvement)
• OTU2 service identifiers on DWDM trunks for granular tracking and visibility
24-hr PM statistics
• Supports removable XFP and SFP+ transceivers for client interface reach flexibility
PSW-10G10 In-Band Management Channel

The PSW-10G10 module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the shelf is configured with a PSW-10G10 line card and the shelf does not have a LAD
or WSS/AWG module, set the 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab) to
10GE LAN (default). When the PSW 10G fiber port is provisioned with a signal type of 10GE LAN or
10GE WAN, the Topology Discovery and Routing parameters are automatically enabled (default) and
the system will use the PSW line card in-band management channel to provide node-to-node
communication.
patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the PSW 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type parameter to
OTU-2 (General sub-tab). When the PSW fiber port has a provisioned signal type of OTU-2, the
Topology Discovery and Routing parameters are automatically disabled and the PSW line card 100
Mbps of bandwidth that was reserved for the in-band management channel returns to the PSW 10G
fiber port for payload. Disabling Topology Discovery also prevents the system from displaying a
topology line in addition to the OSC line to the adjacent node in the 3D Network view tab.
Synchronous Ethernet Support — PSW Line Cards

PSW-618, PSW-10G10, PSW-10G20, PSW-100G2W, and PSW-100G line cards support
Synchronous Ethernet (SyncE). SyncE provides the following features:
• Ability to recover timing from 10GE ports or BITS for use as the system timing reference.
For details on 10GE limitations and restrictions, refer to Packet Line Cards — Timing
Capabilities in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user guide.
Note: The PSW-618 1000BASE-F (1GE) ports and PSW-10G20 ports 13 through 20 (operating
in 1GE mode) cannot be used as the system timing reference.
• Transmit Ethernet signals synchronous to the system clock.
You must enable SyncE on a per-Ethernet port basis. The default is Disabled. When you enable SyncE
on any given port, (see Packet Line Cards — Timing Capabilities in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules,
and Transport Resources user guide), its ESMC channel activates, which allows the transmission and
reception of SSM. Additionally, if it is a 100GE, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2, OTU2e, or WL3 100G
port, it is available for use by the timing subsystem as the input timing reference for system clock
generation and/or to generate a derived T1/E1 signal for use by the Building Integrated Timing
Source (BITS) equipment.
PSW SyncE Notes and Limitations

• The PSW-100G line card supports SyncE in 100GE mode only.
• The PSW-100G2W line card supports SyncE payload mapped into ODU4 wrapped in Ciena
proprietary section framing.
• PSW port SyncE limitations:
 PSW-618 port 1 and all 1000BASE-F (1GE) ports do not support SyncE
 PSW-10G10 port 1 and port 9 do not support SyncE
 PSW-10G20 ports 13 through 20 (operating in 1GE mode) do not support SyncE
 PSW-10G20 10G WAN and OTU2 ports do not support SyncE
These ports accurately derive their timing from the node system-timing source and
transmit SSM. However, these specific ports cannot be the line timing reference for the node,
that is, these ports cannot provide the input timing reference for the node.
• PME and PSW ports have a timing interoperability issue when the signal type is 10GE WAN.
With the PME and PSW port in 10GE WAN mode in adjacent nodes, neither port can properly
use the SSM transmitted by the other end. In this signal type mode, do not enable SyncE
when the packet card types do not match. However, to gain PME/PSW interoperability in
10GE WAN mode, the user can overwrite/force the PME timing reference to a known quality
level. If the user enables dual-timing reference protection, a protection switch will not work
properly since a timing-quality level change is not detectable. Due to this condition, it is
suitable to enable a single-timing reference only and ensure that the remote node is a leaf
node (no loop) in the timing architecture.
• Because GFP is asynchronous, the recovered OTU2 timing of PSW ports are not “Ethernet
timing” (in the GFP client layer). The supported OTU2 timing is derived from the carrier
(server) signal.
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf), CyOS software version Release 5.2 or higher
• Z33, CyOS software version Release 5.2 or higher
Ethernet Services and Standards

• MEF EPL, EVPL and E-LAN services with local bridging between UNI-N and NNI port
• Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE) support:
 Provider Backbone Bridging – IEEE 802.1ah
 Provider Backbone Bridging (Traffic Engineering) – IEEE 802.1Qay
• Ethernet Line Protection ITU-T G.8031 and Ethernet Ring Protection ITU-T G.8032v2 with
sub-50 ms switch times
• Spanning tree (IEEE 802.1D), multiple spanning tree (IEEE 802.1s), and Rapid Spanning Tree
(IEEE 802.1w) support (planned for a future release)
• P-bit priority QoS (IEEE 802.1p)
• 8 class of service queues per port
Optical Transport
• 4 x 10 GbE XFP, plus 6 x 10 GbE SFP+
• All ports support optional OTU2
• ITU-T G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) and Enhanced Forward Error Correction
(EFEC)
Interfaces
• 10 x 10 GbE LAN/WAN
• Physical: Front access, XFP and SFP+
Management
• ITU-T G.709 OTN support on all DWDM interfaces
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
• A–to-Z circuit provisioning using Planet Operate (TESI provisioning only in this Release)
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.0 lbs. / 1.8 kg
Power
• Power consumption: 150 watts typical, 180 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PSW-10G20 Packet Module

The PSW-10G20 is a high capacity 20-port 10 GbE switch module for aggregating and grooming
Ethernet services. The PSW-10G20 module is optimized for high-capacity Ethernet aggregation and
end-to-end packet transport solutions. PSW-10G20 modules support twenty 10 GbE ports via SFP+
interfaces. The PSW-10G20 module supports standards-based Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE)
for increased network performance and scale. Twelve ports (ports 1 through 12) support user
configurable OTU2/OTU2e/OTU1e mapping with FEC for transport over optical networks, the
remaining eight ports (ports 13 through 20) support 1/10 GbE.
You can deploy the PSW-10G20 module in all Z-Series shelves. For details, refer to Packet Line Cards
– Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245. The transport module supports COE
transport with Provider Backbone Bridging with Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) functionality (per IEEE
802.1Qay), including E-LAN and E-VLAN services. In the 14-slot Z77 shelf, each PSW-10G20 module
interconnects with other modules through a 2.8 Tbps Ethernet and OTN switching fabric (XC-2800).
The PSW-10G20 module supports VLANs at both the provider (IEEE 802.1ad) and customer (IEEE
The next graphic illustrates the PSW-10G20 trunk and client interfaces functional block
diagram.
Figure 54: PSW-10G20 Functional Block Diagram
The following graphic shows the PSW-10G20 block diagram.
Figure 55: PSW-10G20 Block Diagram
Applications
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation using multiple ports between PSW modules on the same shelf

• 200 Gbps non-blocking packet switching capacity per module
modules
and DWDM
• Advanced MEF Ethernet services (E-Line, E-LAN, E-Tree)
• Connection-Oriented Ethernet – IEEE 802.1ah for high performance transport and network
efficiency
or routers
• ITU-T G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) on DWDM trunk (5–6 dB link
improvement)
24-hr PM statistics
• Supports removable SFP and SFP+ transceivers for client interface reach flexibility
• PSW-10G20 MEF Carrier Ethernet 2.0 Certification
PSW-10G20 In-Band Management Channel

The PSW-10G20 module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the shelf is configured with a PSW-10G20 line card and the shelf does not have a LAD
or WSS/AWG module, set the 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab) to
"10GE LAN" (default). When the PSW 10G fiber port is provisioned with a signal type of 10GE LAN or
communication.


(server) signal.
System Requirements

Optical Transport
• 20 x 10 GbE SFP+
• Ports 1 through 12 support 10GE/OTN, ports 13 through 20 support 1/10GbE
(EFEC)
Interfaces
• 12 x 10 GbE LAN/WAN and 8 x 1/10 GbE LAN
• Physical: Front access, SFP and SFP+
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
• A–to-Z provisioning using Planet Operate, supports PBB-TE
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
Environmental
• +32°F to +122°F / 0°C to +50°C operating temperature, with DWDM SFP+ (ports 1 through 8),
and non-DWDM SFP+ (ports 9 through 20)
• +32°F to +104°F / 0°C to +40°C operating temperature, with DWDM SFP+ (ports 1 through
12), and non-DWDM SFP+ (ports 13 through 20)
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PSW-618 Packet Module

The PSW-618 is a highly scalable Ethernet switching and transport module for the Z-Series
packet-optical transport platform (P-OTP). The PSW-618 module is optimized for high-capacity
Ethernet aggregation and end-to-end packet transport solutions. The PSW-618 supports six 10 GbE
SFP+ and eighteen 1 GbE SFP interfaces for local connection to routers and other network elements.
The PSW-618 module supports standards-based Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE) for increased
network performance and scale. The module also supports optional user configurable OTU2
mapping with FEC for transport over optical networks.
You can deploy the PSW-618 module in all Z-Series shelves. For details, refer to Packet Line Cards –
Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245. In the 14-slot Z77 shelf, each PSW-618
module is inter-connected with other modules through a 2.8 Tbps Ethernet and OTN switching fabric
(XC-2800).
The PSW-618 module supports VLANs at both the provider (IEEE 802.1ad) and customer (IEEE
802.1Q) level for advanced Ethernet services. The transport module supports COE transport with
Provider Backbone Bridging with Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) functionality.
The SFP+ ports support both optical SFP+ and copper SFP+ modules. In earlier releases, in copper
mode, the PSW line card supported the 1000 Mbps rate only, not the 10 or 100 Mbps rate. The PSW
does not automatically negotiate with sub-1Gbps Ethernet interfaces when using copper SFPs. In
Release 5.2 or higher, in copper mode, you can provision the port speed to 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps.
These rates support auto-negotiation for duplex mode and flow control, but not for speed.
Figure 56: Z-Series PSW-618 Packet Module
The next graphic illustrates the PSW-618 trunk and client interfaces functional block diagram.
ODU2 4 x 10 GbE SFP+

Mapper
Note: Ports 1 through 4 support OTN and FEC.
Ports 5 and 6 provide a 10GE LAN signal type.
160G 2 x 10 GbE SFP+

Backplane
Ethernet
(2.8 Tbps XC-2800 common
fabric in Z77)
18 x GbE SFP
Figure 57: PSW-618 Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the PSW-618 block diagram.
Figure 58: PSW-618 Block Diagram
Applications
• 1 GbE and 10 GbE client interface to routers or other network elements
• Aggregation of 1 GbE into 10 GbE
• 1 GbE to 10 GbE switching function with OTU2 for transport over OEO or ROADM optical
networks

• 200 Gbps switch capacity per module
• 1 GbE and 10 GbE interface connectivity
• Aggregation of 1G to 10G on the card or across the shelf using the XC-2800 Z77 switch fabric
modules
• A-to-Z provisioning of Ethernet services across multi-layer Ethernet, Ethernet transport, OTN
and DWDM
• Advanced MEF Ethernet services (E-Line, E-LAN)
• Connection Oriented Ethernet – IEEE 802.1ah for high performance transport and network
efficiency
or routers
 Easy migration of services from legacy Ethernet switches
• ITU-T G.975 Generic Forward Error Correction (GFEC) on DWDM trunk (5–6 dB link
improvement)
24-hr PM statistics
• Supports removable SFP and SFP+ for client interface reach flexibility
PSW-618 In-Band Management Channel

The PSW-618 module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the shelf is configured with a PSW-618 line card and the shelf does not have a LAD or
WSS/AWG module or the traffic-carrying PSW interfaces are not fiber patched to an installed LAD or
WSS/AWG module, set the 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab) to
10GE LAN (default). When the PSW 10G fiber port has a provisioned signal type of 10GE LAN or
communication.


(server) signal.
System Requirements

Optical Transport
• 6 x 10 GbE/SFP+ plus 18 x GbE (10/100/1000) SFP
• Up to 4 optional ODU2 mappers
(EFEC)
Interfaces
• 6 x 10 GbE LAN/WAN and 18 GbE (10/100/1000) LAN
• Physical: Front access, SFP+ and SFP
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
• A – Z circuit provisioning using Planet Operate (TESI provisioning only in this Release)
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
• PSW-618 power consumption: 150 watts typical, 180 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PSW-100G Packet Module

The Z-Series PSW-100G module is a highly scalable Ethernet switching and transport module for the
Z-Series packet-optical transport platform (P-OTP). Optimized for high-capacity Ethernet aggregation
and end-to-end packet transport solutions, the module is distinguished by a front-facing physical
interfaces that supports one 100 GbE CFP.
You can use the interface for connecting to routers or other networking equipment. The PSW-100G
module supports standards-based Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE) which increases network
performance and scale. In addition, support for optional user-configurable OTU4 mapping with
Forward Error Correction (FEC) enables transport over optical networks.
The PSW-100G CFP port can operate in 100 Gbps OTU4V10 OTN or 100 Gbps CAUI 100 GbE mode. In
a Z77 shelf, the PSW-100G requires the installation of XC-2800 switch fabric modules in the rear of
the shelf. In a Z33 shelf, the PSW-100G utilizes the backplane mesh pairs in slots 1 to 4. The mesh
pairs provide 100 Gbps of slot-to-slot capacity. The PSW-100G also supports intra-card and
cross-card Link Aggregation Groups (LAGs).
Figure 59: Z-Series PSW-100G Packet Module
The next graphic illustrates the PSW-100G trunk and client interfaces functional block diagram.
ODU4 1 x 100 GbE (CFP)

200G Mapper
Backplane
Ethernet
fabric in Z77; Quad mesh in Z33)
Figure 60: PSW-100G Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the PSW-100G block diagram.
Figure 61: PME-100G Block Diagram
Applications
• High capacity packet trunk interfaces between Z-Series nodes
• IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation using multiple ports between PSW modules in the same shelf


(server) signal.
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf), CyOS software Release 5.2 or higher
• Z33, CyOS software Release 5.2 or higher
• Z77, CyOS software Release 5.2 or higher (equipped with XC-2800 switch fabric)
Specifications
XCVRs supported (CFP)

• 100GBase-SR10, LR10 (10x10MSA), LR4, ER4
• 100G Coherent DWDM
Configurable Signal Formats

• OTU4 with GFEC or HGFEC (cortina protocol)
• 100 GE
Interoperability
• DTM-100G (client side)
• PSW-100G, PSW-10G10, PSW-618
Ethernet Services
• Line-Rate Ethernet switching and service aggregation for 100 GbE port
• MEF EPL, EVPL, MP-LAN, MP-VLAN, Access-EPL and Access-EVPL services with local bridging
between UNI-N and NNI port
• Connection-Oriented Ethernet (COE) support: Provider Backbone Bridging (IEEE 802.1ah)
• Connection-Oriented Transport
 Provider Backbone Bridging (Traffic Engineering) (IEEE 802.1Qay), TESI termination and
express
 Up to 1,000 TESIs
• Ethernet Ring Protection ITU-T G.8032v2 with sub-50 ms switch times
• Linear Protection ITU-T G.8031 with sub-50 ms switch times
• Eight class of service queues per port
Other
• Provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in bandwidth
• Static CoS mapping
• Early discard queue detection
• Hitless upgrade capable
Not Supported
• Service OAM
• Ingress bandwidth profiles / policing
• LAGs
• Interoperability with Z77 TSW line cards
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
• Planet Operate A – Z circuit provisioning
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.1 lbs. / 2.18 kg
Power
• PSW-100G power consumption: 150 watts typical, 180 watts maximum, based on power
requirements for one CFP
Environmental
• +32°F to +129°F / 0°C to +50°C operating temperature (SR10 CFP modules)
• +32°F to +104°F / 0°C to +40°C operating temperature (all other CFP modules)
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
PSW-100G2W Packet Module

The PSW-100G2W packet line card is a 2x100G module with the same feature set as the PSW-10G20
packet module but with two coherent 100G interfaces using integrated WaveLogic Nano technology.
The two PSW-100G2W ports support the WaveLogic Nano coherent interface including tunable
wavelengths, OTN framing, and all supported WaveLogic Nano modulation schemes (including
DP-QPSK) and FEC modes. The module provides 200 Gbps of non-blocking capacity.
The PSW-100G2W module is a high capacity switch module for aggregating and grooming Ethernet
services. The PSW-100G2W module is optimized for high-capacity Ethernet aggregation and
end-to-end packet transport solutions. The module supports standards-based Connection-Oriented
Ethernet (COE) for increased network performance and scale.
Figure 62: Z-Series PSW-100G2W Packet Module
You can deploy the PSW-100G2W module in all Z-Series shelves. For details, refer to Packet Line
Cards – Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245. The transport module supports
COE transport with Provider Backbone Bridging with Traffic Engineering (PBB-TE) functionality (per
IEEE 802.1Qay), including E-LAN and E-VLAN services. In the 14-slot Z77 shelf, each PSW-100G2W
module interconnects with other modules through a 2.8 Tbps Ethernet and OTN switching fabric
(XC-2800). The module connects to other PSW line cards such as the PSW-618, PSW-10G10,
PSW-10G20, and PSW-100G for 1GbE, 10GbE, and 100GbE client interfaces.
Important! — An existing Z33 shelf in the field requires a power upgrade prior to installing
the PSW-100G2W line card. For details on upgrading the shelf power, see the Z33 Power
Upgrade Guide (450-3708-700) available online in the Ciena doc portal. After the shelf power
upgrade, the Z33 shelf can support up to two PSW-100G2W line cards. Note that slot 6 of
the Z33 shelf does not support the PSW 100G2W line card.
Important! — An existing Z77 shelf in the field requires a power upgrade prior to installing
the PSW-100G2W line card. For details on upgrading the shelf power, see the Z77 Power
Upgrade Guide (450-3708-701) available online in the Ciena doc portal. After the shelf power
upgrade, the Z77 shelf can support up to eight PSW-100G2W line cards.
The PSW-100G2W module supports VLANs at both the provider (IEEE 802.1ad) and customer (IEEE
The PSW-100G2W coherent 100G optical interfaces have the following optical characteristics:
• 2 x 100G coherent ports
• DP-QPSK modulation
• 50 GHz channel spacing
• Tunable across 96 channels, ITU channels 13.5 to 61
• Nominal 1200 km reach
The following graphic illustrates the PSW-100G2W functional block diagram.
Figure 63: PSW-100G2W Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the PSW-100G2W block diagram.
Figure 64: PSW-100G2W Block Diagram
Applications
• Two 100G coherent line-side Interface module for chassis-wide 2.8 Tbps Ethernet switch
fabric

• 200 Gbps non-blocking packet switching capacity per module
modules
and DWDM
• Advanced MEF Ethernet services (E-Line, E-LAN, E-Tree)
• Connection-Oriented Ethernet – IEEE 802.1ah for high performance transport and network
efficiency
or routers
• Ciena WaveLogic3™ best-in-class proprietary Forward Error Correction (FEC)
24-hr PM statistics
• PSW-100G2W MEF Carrier Ethernet 2.0 Certification
PSW-100G2W In-Band Management Channel

The PSW-100G2W module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the shelf is configured with a PSW-100G2W line card and the shelf does not have a LAD
or WSS/AWG module. the WL3 100G fiber port can support the Topology Discovery and Routing
parameters automatically (enabled by default) and the system will use the PSW line card in-band
management channel to provide node-to-node communication.
patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the Topology Discovery and Routing parameters to
disabled and the PSW line card 100 Mbps of bandwidth that was reserved for the in-band
management channel returns to the PSW WL3 100G fiber port for payload. Disabling Topology
Discovery also prevents the system from displaying a topology line in addition to the OSC line to the
adjacent node in the 3D Network view tab.

PSW-618, PSW-10G10, PSW-10G20, PSW-100G2W, and PSW-100G line cards support Synchronous
Ethernet (SyncE). SyncE provides the following features:

(server) signal.
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf), CyOS software Release 10.0 or higher
• Z33, CyOS software Release 10.0 or higher
• Z77, CyOS software Release 10.0 or higher (equipped with XC-2800 switch fabric)
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 7.0 lbs. / 3.175 kg
Power
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
TSW-10G10 Packet Aggregation and Transport

Module
The TSW-10G10 module, designed for Z77 (Z77 and Z77 shelf v2) deployments, provides grooming
and aggregation of TESIs across 10G rings and add/drop capabilities. The TSW-10G10 module serves
to eliminate existing fiber patches between PME (PME-412 or PME-216i) line cards used for
aggregation; freeing up multiple PME ports for Ethernet services.
The TSW-10G10 module provides four XFP ports and six SFP+ ports. Every TSW-10G10 port supports
OTU2 and OTU2e with FEC, as well as 10GbE LAN. The TSW-10G10 module provides an optional
in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in bandwidth.
Working in conjunction with the XC-2800 switch fabric in a Z77 shelf, the TSW-10G10 module, and the
switch fabric interface supports connection-oriented transport for TESI cross-connections. The
XC-2800 switch fabric is fully non-blocking across all 14 Z77 line card slots. For additional information
on the XC-2800, see XC-2800 Switch Fabric starting on page 231.
Figure 65: Z77 TSW-10G10 Module
The following graphic illustrates the TSW functional block diagram.
ODU2 4 x 10 GbE/OTU2 XFP

Mapper
200G
Backplane
Ethernet
fabric in Z77)
ODU2 6 x 10 GbE/OTU2 SFP+
Mapper
Figure 66: TSW-10G10 Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows an example of the TSW-10G10 deployed in a Z77 with the XC-2800
switch fabric providing grooming and aggregation for multiple 10G rings.
Z22
Nx
Z33 DM
DW GbE
ver
bE o r Ring Wireless Backhaul
G
Z77 10 cto
Z77 2 x Co lle
LAG
Aggregation Ring Z22

Nx10G 10 GbE Ring 10 GbE /
Nx GbE
1/10 GbE Business Ethernet
10
G bE
Rin
Z33 g Z22
• Frees up multiple pairs of
PMEs being used for
grooming and aggregaton • XC-2800 and TSW-10G10
• Groom andAggregate xDSL / PON
multiple 10G Rings Residential Broadband
Figure 67: TSW-10G10 Configuration Example
The next graphic shows a Z77 shelf (on the left) with eight PME line cards providing aggregation
for only two collector rings per card pair. The Z77 shelf on the right illustrates the advantages
of the TSW-10G10 modules. This Z77 shelf shows a configuration with the XC-2800 switch
fabric modules, two PME line cards to provide client UNI interfaces, and four TSW-10G10 (two
card pairs). Each TSW-10G10 card pair is capable of aggregating up to nine collector rings.
Collector Ring Connection

Aggregation Ring Aggregation Ring
Fiber Patch Connection
Aggregation Ring
Connection
PME line cards
PME line cards slots 3 and 4
slots 3 through 10 TSW-10G10 line cards
slots 5 through 8
Notes:
Notes: • TSW-10G10 line cards
• PME-412 line cards can aggregate nine
can only aggregate rings per card pair
two collector rings
per card pair • TSWs are any-to-any
port (any slot)
• PMEs can only talk • PME line cards provide
across the backplane the UNI interfaces
in slot pairs
• PME line cards do not
• Front fiber patches connect to the TSW line
are required NID NID cards across the backplane
Figure 68: TSW-10G10 Card Aggregation Example
Applications
• 10 GbE network-to-network interfaces with optional OTN OTU2 mapping
• Aggregation of traffic into DWDM
• Cross-connection of Connection-oriented Ethernet traffic from tributary Ethernet modules
• Advanced MEF Ethernet services (for example, E-Line, E-LAN) in conjunction with Z-Series
PME modules

• Simplified A-to-Z provisioning of Ethernet services across multi-layer Ethernet, Ethernet
transport, OTN, and DWDM
• Connection-oriented Ethernet for carrier-grade packet transport
• ITU-T G.975 GFEC on DWDM trunk
• Supports a mix of removable XFP and SFP+ optics for client interface flexibility
TSW-10G10 In-Band Management Channel

The TSW-10G10 module provides an optional in-band management channel of up to 100 Mbps in
bandwidth. If the Z77 shelf is configured with a TSW-10G10 line card and the shelf does not have a
LAD or WSS/AWG module or the traffic-carrying TSW interfaces are not fiber patched to an installed
LAD or WSS/AWG module, set the 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type parameter (General sub-tab) to
10GE LAN (default). When the TSW 10G fiber port has a provisioned signal type of 10GE LAN or 10GE
WAN, the Topology Discovery and Routing parameters are automatically enabled (default) and the
system will use the TSW line card in-band management channel to provide node-to-node
communication.
If a LAD or WSS/AWG module is providing the OSC and the traffic-carrying TSW interfaces are fiber
patched to a LAD or WSS/AWG module, you can set the TSW 10GE/OTU2 Fiber Port Signal Type
parameter to OTU-2 (General sub-tab). When the TSW fiber port has a provisioned signal type of
OTU-2, the Topology Discovery and Routing parameters are automatically disabled and the TSW line
card 100 Mbps of bandwidth that was reserved for the in-band management channel returns to the
TSW 10G fiber port for payload. Disabling Topology Discovery also prevents the system from
displaying a topology line in addition to the OSC line to the adjacent node in the 3D Network view
tab.
Packet Line Card Connectivity and Interoperability

For details on Packet line card connectivity methods, card-to-card compatibility, and interoperability
for all Z-Series packet line cards installed in Z-Series shelves, see Packet Line Cards – Compatibility
and Interoperability starting on page 245.
System Requirements
• Z77 only
Interfaces and Optical Transport

All TSW-10G10 ports support OTN and Ethernet.
• Up to 4 10GbE LAN/WAN (XFP) — 10.325 Gbps
• Up to 6 10GbE LAN/WAN (SFP+) — 10.325 Gbps
• Up to 4 10G OTU2 (XFP) — 10.709 Gbps
• Up to 6 10G OTU2 (SFP+) — 10.709 Gbps
• Up to 4 10G OTU2e (XFP) — 11.096 Gbps
• Up to 6 10G OTU2e (SFP+) — 11.096 Gbps
• Up to 4 10G OTU1e (XFP) — 11.0491 Gbps
• Up to 6 10G OTU1e (SFP+) — 11.0491 Gbps
• Physical: Front access, fixed wavelength XFP and SFP+ optics
Note: Single-fiber XFP and SFP+ transceiver modules for the Z-Series are
designed specifically for datacomm applications. These transceiver modules do
not support OTU2 signal types.
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI and TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.80 lbs. / 2.177 kg
Power
• TSW-10G10 power consumption: 140 watts typical, 175 watts maximum
Note: This reflects the typical power requirements of 4 XFP and 6 SFP+
transceivers.
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
LAC-8 Lambda Aggregator Module

The Z-Series Lambda Aggregator CWDM (LAC) terminal multiplexer module provides up to eight
CWDM wavelengths for use in the Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms. Each LAC module
provides optical multiplexing and demultiplexing capability in the 1470 nm to 1610 nm band with
20 nm spacing.
Each LAC module is available with standard 8 – 20 dB link budgets that typically support up to 80 km
spans (0.25 dB/km).
The primary application of the LAC module is to increase effective fiber capacity by multiplexing
multiple optical signals over a common fiber for multiplexed CWDM transmissions or regeneration.
This is achieved through the optical add/drop capability for up to eight 2.5G wavelengths at each
node on a ring or a linear network. The LAC-8 module provides transponding and muxponding in
conjunction with SFT-8 modules.
LAC modules support multiplexing and demultiplexing of wavelengths associated with Z-Series
transponders, muxponders, Ethernet switch/transport modules, third-party system, or third-party
CWDM systems. LAC modules also support integrated management through an in-band Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC).
Figure 69: Z-Series LAC-8 Module
The following graphic illustrates the block diagram for the Z-Series LAC-8 module.
Figure 70: LAC-8 Block Diagram
LAC-8 Wavelength Assignments

LAC-8 Wavelength Assignment
LAC-8 Wavelength (nm)
1 1470
2 1490
3 1510
4 1530
5 1550
6 1570
7 1590
8 1610
System Requirements
• Z33
• Z77
• Input: Up to 8 (2.5G) CWDM channels
• Output: Up to 8 CWDM wavelengths
• Channel spacing: 20 nm
• Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) — 100Base-FX Ethernet at 1510 nm
• Physical: Front Access, Duplex LC/UPC connectors
• Link budget 8 to 20 dB (up to 80 km with 0.25 dB/km)
• Fiber types supported: NSDF (G.652), NZ-DSF (G.655)
• Transponding and muxponding in conjunction with SFT modules
Management
• DCN connectivity
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
• LAC-8 power consumption: 10 watts typical, 12 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
LAC-4P Lambda Aggregator CWDM Terminal

Multiplexer
The external LAC-4P 4-channel CWDM add/drop with Express mux/demux module installs in an
industry-standard LGX® form factor. The LAC-4 module is a passive module that provides a 4-port
CWDM optical mux/demux capability. It works in conjunction with the SFT-8 module.
Channel spacing is at 20 nm, following the standard CWDM wavelength grid. There are two versions
of the LAC-4P module:
• LAC-4P, 1610 nm – 1550 nm
• LAC-4P, 1530 nm – 1470 nm
The LGX-compatible form factor allows for simple installation with snap-in mounting. Install LAC-4P
modules without tools into any LGX-compatible shelf. You can mount up to three units into a single
LGX passive shelf.
You can deploy LAC-4P CWDM modules in incremental steps. Operators can start out with a 1x4
CWDM multiplexer and, as demand grows, add an additional 1x4 LGX packaged CWDM module to
reach 8 wavelengths. Add Additional modules by simply daisy chaining the units using the LAC-4P
Express and Common ports.
The following graphic shows a wiring example of the LAC-4P module and SFT-8 line card.
Comm In / Comm Out

RX
To Outside Plant
TX
1470 In / 1470 Out
2.5G Wavelengths
(CWDM)
1490 In / 1490 Out
1510 In / 1510 Out

TX
1
RX
1530 In / 1530 Out
TX
2
RX
Exp In / Exp Out
TX
3
RX
TX LAC-4P
4
RX
TX
5 Comm In / Comm Out
RX
TX
6 1550 In / 1550 Out
RX
TX 1570 In / 1570 Out

7
RX
TX 1590 In / 1590 Out

8
RX
1610 In / 1610 Out
2.5G Wavelengths
(CWDM) Exp In / Exp Out
LAC-4P
Figure 71: LAC-4P Wiring Example
LAC-4P Wavelength Assignment
LAC-4P Wavelength
1470 – 1530 (nm)
1 1470
2 1490
3 1510
4 1530
LAC-4P Wavelength
1550 – 1610 (nm)
5 1550
6 1570
7 1590
8 1610
SFT-8 Module Transponder Module

The Z-Series 8-port SFP Transponder (SFT-8) is a multi-rate module capable of supporting drop or
insert, or express traffic in the Z-Series multi-layer transport network platform.
Figure 72: SFT-8 Module
There are three primary applications for the SFT-8 module:

• Transponding for Gigabit Ethernet and OC-3/12/48 SONET and STM-1/4/16 SDH services
• High-density Fiber Channel and FICON SAN support on DWDM services
• 3R regeneration (re-timing, re-shaping, re-amplification) of up to 2.5G transmit signals
Up to 4 2.5G Client Up to 4 2.5G Trunk Interfaces

Interfaces (SFPs) (DWDM or CWDM SFPs)
Any Combination of: Transponding

Up to 4 OC-3/12/48 3R Regen
Up to 4 STM-1/4/16 Up to 2.5G wavelengths
Up to 4 100FX, GbE
Up to 4 1G/2G FC, FICON
Up to 4 ESCON, ISC-1, ISC-3
Figure 73: SFT-8 Module Trunk and Client Interfaces
SFT-8 modules provide passive 1+1 optical protection on client and trunk interfaces using the
Transport Protection Module (TPM) and Optical Protection Switch (OPS) equipment.
SFT-8 modules provide support for both CWDM and DWDM depending on the type of SFP
transceiver configured:
• DWDM is supported in conjunction with LAD-96, LAD-40/LAD-40E,
LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-8A/LAD-8E/LAD-8X, LAD-4/LAD-4A, or LAD-2P/LAD-2G modules
• CWDM is supported in conjunction with LAC-8 and LAC-4P modules
SFP Interfaces
The SFT-8 module utilizes eight SFP ports grouped in pairs for signal regeneration. The clock
and data recovery device supports rate up to 2.7 Gbps.
• Line rate:
 Up to 2.7 Gbps
 Jitter and Wander – GR-253-CORE
All SFT-8 ports support both copper SFP and optical SFP transceivers. In copper SFP mode, the
module supports 1000BASE-T mode.
The following graphic shows the block diagram for the Z-Series SFT-8 module.
Figure 74: SFT-8 Block Diagram
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
• 2.5G transponder
• Client/trunk side interfaces:
 Up to 4 OC-3/12/48
 Up to 4 STM-1/4/16
 Up to 4 100Base-FX, GbE
 Up to 4 1G, 2G Fiber Channel (FC), FICON
 Up to 4 ESCON, ISC-1, and ISC-3
• Line rate, SFP ports: up to 2.7 Gbps
• Transponder and regeneration functions in conjunction with Z-Series LAD and LAC modules
• OEO Add/Drop – full 3R regeneration (re-timing, re-shaping, re-transmit)
Management
• Planet Operate
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
Power
• SFT-8 power consumption: 45 watts typical, 50 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
SFT-10G16 Multi-Rate Transponder Module

The SFT-10G16 is a high-density, multi-rate transponder module for the Z-Series packet-optical
transport platforms (P-OTPs) that addresses a broad range of service requirements. The SFT-10G16
performs 3R signal regeneration (re-time, re-shape, re-transmit) and wavelength conversion in
CWDM and DWDM applications.
The multi-protocol architecture of the SFT-10G16 extends the reach of client signals such as Fibre
Channel, Ethernet, SONET/SDH and Optical Transport Network (OTN) at data rates ranging from 1.0
to 11.3 Gbps. The SFT-10G16 provides 16 SFP/SFP+ client or line-side ports.
Figure 75: Z-Series SFT-10G16 Module
The SFT-10G16 module provides the following features and benefits:

• Compatible with the Z22 (–48V shelf), Z33, and Z77 shelves
• Works in conjunction with Z-Series LAD modules
• Client interfaces supported:
 GbE (1 Gbps)  Fibre Channel 8G (8.5 Gbps)
 10 GbE LAN PHY (10.3 Gbps)  Fibre Channel 10G (10.5 Gbps)
 10 GbE WAN PHY (9.9 Gbps)  OTU1 (2.7 Gbps)
 SONET OC-48, SDH STM-16 (2.5 Gbps)  OTU1e (11 Gbps)
 SONET OC-192, SDH STM-64 (9.9 Gbps)  OTU1f (11.3 Gbps)
 Fibre Channel 1G/FICON (1.1 Gbps)  OTU2 (10.7 Gbps)
 Fibre Channel 2G/FICON 2G (2.1 Gbps)  OTU2e (11.1 Gbps)
 Fibre Channel 4G (4.3 Gbps)  OTU2f (11.3 Gbps)
• All client interfaces carried transparently, the regeneration is protocol agnostic
• High-density design supports up to 16 client or line-side ports
• Pluggable SFP/SFP+ optics support 850 nm, 1310 nm, 1550 nm, CWDM, and ITU-Grid DWDM
wavelengths with transparent wavelength conversion
Note: The single-fiber XFP and SFP+ transceiver modules for the SFT-10G16 are designed
specifically for datacomm applications. These transceiver modules do not support OTU2
signal types.
• SFT-10G16 ports are grouped in pairs (1–2, 3–4, 5–6, and so forth) for signal regeneration
• 3R regeneration (re-timing, re-shaping, re-transmit) maintains performance over extended
distances
• Two latency modes:
 Low latency (< 200 ns) with full 3R regeneration (re-timing, re-shaping, re-transmit)
This mode is typically used in multi-hop configurations and supports a large number of
SFT-10G16 regenerations.
 Ultra-low latency (< 5 ns) for time-sensitive applications. 2R regeneration (re-shaping and
re-transmit)
This mode is limited to two SFT-10G16 regenerations and is typically used in
point-to-point or low-hop count configurations.
• Loopback support on all trunk and client interfaces for transmission testing
The following graphic shows the SFT-10G16 block diagram.
Figure 76: SFT-10G16 Block Diagram
SFT-10G16 Regeneration Capabilities and Limitations

The SFT-10G16 line card provides basic port-to-port regeneration that supports client rates from
1.0 Gbps to 11.3 Gbps. The SFT-10G16 line card does not provide a framer or mapper in the path.
Therefore, all data flowing into the receive (RX) port is copied to the transmit (TX) port of the line
card. Additionally, if an error occurs on the RX, the line card copies the error to the adjacent TX port.
The SFT-10G16 line card provides limited diagnostics and performance monitoring (PM) capabilities.
The line card supports basic Ethernet performance monitoring capabilities, but the card does not
support PM for the other client signals.
The line card supports two latency modes: 2R (Ultra-low Latency, also referred to as ULL) and 3R
(Standard Latency). While both modes are low latency, ULL is approximately 2.4 ns of transit latency,
and Standard Latency is 150–500 ns. For all point-to-point or latency-sensitive applications, the
recommended mode is 2R. The 3R mode requires slightly more power, but the mode preserves
timing over multiple regenerations.
Do not use only SFT-10G16 line cards in a multi-hop configuration for ROADM networks or multiple
regenerations. ROADM networks typically require forward error correction (FEC), which the
SFT-10G16 line card does not add, monitor, or generate.
For LAD networks, using the SFT-10G16 3R mode, it may be possible to do many (possibly up to 10)
regenerations without errors. However, a soft line fault (for example, a condition that creates bit
errors, but not Loss of Signal (LOS)) somewhere in a chain of regenerations and the absence of PM
support in the SFT-10G16 line card, makes it difficult to determine which section is creating the
errors.
You can use DTM-8 line cards at each end of a multi-hop configuration of SFT-10G16 line cards in a
LAD network. However, in the event of dribbling errors on the DTM-8 line cards, even if corrected
fully, without section PM support on the SFT-10G16 line cards, it could still be difficult to determine
the SFT section responsible for creating the errors. You can locate the source of the errors using a
loopback test. Note that the loopback test is service affecting.
The SFT-10G16 line card provides high-density, significantly lower latency, and lower cost per port
than the DTM-8 line card. The SFT-10G16 line card is typically used in point-to-point configurations
and when FEC is not required.
SFT-10G16 Applications
• WDM private line connectivity for a variety of different client protocols at rates from 1.0 to
11.3 Gbps
• Transparent 3R O-E-O regeneration for reach extension
• Any-to-any wavelength translation where optical signals are received, transponded, and
retransmitted on a different wavelength
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
Management
• Planet Operate
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 5.8 lbs. / 2.631 kg
Power
• SFT-10G16 power consumption: 75 watts typical, 80 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
MSE-1482 Multiservice SONET/SDH Aggregation

and Transport Module
The Z-Series Multiservice SONET/SDH Element (MSE-1482) is an advanced SONET/SDH aggregation
and transport module, with integrated OTN transport supporting the Z-Series multi-layer transport
platforms. The MSE-1482 module provides a full 10G transport of SONET, SDH, and Ethernet services
with non-blocking STS cross-connects for aggregation and grooming (including hairpin capability)
across a wide range of SFP/XFP pluggable interfaces.
Each MSE-1482 module supports up to:
• 1 10G interface with OTN encapsulation (OTU2)
• 4 OC-48 or STM-16 interfaces
• 8 OC-3, OC-12, STM-1, or STM-4 interfaces (any combination)
• 2 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces supporting Ethernet over SONET/SDH (EoS)
The module supports STS-1/Nc level aggregation and grooming with transport for maximum
operational efficiency.
Two equipped MSE-1482 modules provide for 1+1 equipment protection. The MSE-1482 also
supports optional UPSR/SNCP ring protection and unidirectional 1+1 Line protection.
Figure 77: Z-Series MSE-1482 Module
Up to 4 2.5G Client Interfaces

Any Combination of:
Up to 4 OC-48
Up to 4 STM-16
OTU2 10G Trunk Interface

Non-Blocking ODU2
STS Mapper
Up to 8 Subrate Client Interfaces Cross-Connect
Any Combination of:
Up to 8 OC-3 or OC-12
Up to 8 STM-1 or STM-4
Plus 10G interface

Up to 2 GbE Client Interfaces to backplane for
protection and
inter-module switching
Figure 78: MSE-1482 Trunk and Client Interfaces
The MSE-1482 module provides high capacity SONET, SDH, and EoS services transport with 10G
OTU2 for enhanced performance and management in the Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms.
Two MSE-1482 modules paired together in odd/even slots provide non-blocking STS-N
connectivity between the line cards. This graphic shows an example of cross-connects between
a pair of MSE-1482 modules.
OC-192/ OC-192/
STM-64 STM-64
STS STS
X-conn X-conn
OC-48/STM-16 OC-48/STM-16
OC-3/STM1 OC-3/STM1
GbE GbE
Figure 79: MSE-1482 Any-to-Any Cross-Connect Capabilities
Note: Ring Closure Modules (RCMs) are required when using an MSE-1482 card
pair in a Z77 shelf for the following applications:
• Cross-connecting MSE-1482 STS/AUG containers by creating SONET/SDH
connections.
(A cross-connect is provisioned to groom traffic between a client optical port
and the 10G uplink port. Client and uplink ports can be on different cards in
an MSE-1482 card pair.)
• Pass-through connections between uplink ports. (Pass-through traffic is
groomed by cross-connecting to different STS structures on the uplink ports
in an MSE-1482 card pair.)
• MSE-1482 SONET/SDH protection groups.
For the MSE-1482 applications described here, the Z77 shelf is typically
configured with four RCMs. Install all four RCMs in the horizontal EFM slots.
RCMs are not required for the Z22 or Z33 shelf. For additional information on
the RCMs, see Ring Closure Modules starting on page 230.
You can install MSE-1482 line cards in a Z77 shelf supported by the XC-2800
switch fabric. The XC-2800 switch fabric module provides supports the MSE-1482
in a standalone muxponder configuration. However, the XC-2800 switch fabric
module does not support MSE-1482 card-to-card backplane cross-connections
or protection.
MSE-1482 SONET/SDH Protection Groups

Planet Operate provides SONET/SDH 1+1 protection groups for the MSE-1482 line card per ITU-T
G.841, G.842, G.808.1, and Telcordia GR-253. Line and Path layer protection are supported.
Path protection refers to Unidirectional Path Switched Ring (UPSR) or Subnetwork Connection
Protection (SNCP). Z-Series SONET/SDH protection groups provide reliable protection for facility and
hardware failures.
The protection mechanism splits the input signal at the point where it enters the Z-Series transport
network. Copies of the traffic are transmitted in diverse routes using a working channel and a
protect channel. Both copies of the signal (working and protect) are monitored for quality. At the
far-end, where the traffic is dropped, traffic from the working and protect channels is compared. If
the working transmission does not have an acceptable signal quality, the system switches to the
protect channel.
Protection groups provide both revertive and non-revertive switching options. In revertive mode, the
equipment switches back to the working channel automatically after the working channel has
recovered from the failure that caused the switch and the provisioned time period to revert has
elapsed. In non-revertive mode, the equipment does not automatically switch from the protect
channel to the working channel after the working channel has recovered from the failure.
The following figure shows an example of UPSR/SNCP Path protection and Line protection 1+1
unidirectional configurations.
OC-3/12/48
Line Protection 1+1 Unidirectional
Path Protection
OC-3/12/48
UPSR/SNCP
UPSR/SNCP
OC-3/12/48
OC-3/12/48
UPSR/SNCP
Figure 80: MSE-1482 Path (UPSR or SNCP) and Line Protection
For detailed information on provisioning SONET/SDH protection groups using the MSE-1482
modules, see the Planet Operate: SONET/SDH and Optical Protection Groups user guide.
Trunk Interface
• Line format:
 OTU2 – GFEC G.975, 10.709 Gbps
 OTU2 – UFEC G.975.1 Appendix 7, 11.095 Gbps
Client Interfaces
• Line format:
 SONET/SDH – OC-48/STM-16 (4x), 2488.32 Mbps
 Ethernet – GE (2x), 1000.00 Mbps
 SONET/SDH – OC-3/12 or STM-1/4 (8x), 155.52/622.08 Mbps
The next graphic shows the MSE-1482 block diagram.
Figure 81: MSE-1482 Block Diagram
Applications
• SONET/SDH ring aggregation, grooming and transport over 10G OTN
• Ethernet over SONET/SDH (EoS) transport over 10G OTN
• SONET/SDH transparent line service
(The entire SONET Line layer or the SDH Multiplex Section with all of its overhead is
transported.)
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
• Client-side interfaces (SFP pluggable):
 Up to 4 OC-48 or STM-16
 Up to 8 OC-3, OC-12 or STM-1, STM-4
 Up to 2 GbE (EoS)
• Trunk-side interface (XFP pluggable): 1 OTU2 (OTU2/ODU2) with G.709 digital wrapper
• G.975.1 Appendix 7 Ultra forward error correction (UFEC)
GbE Support
• Gigabit Ethernet over SONET/SDH (EoS) mapped, GFP
Timing / Synchronization
• Freerun Stratum 3 with holdover
• BITS timing over primary and secondary DS1/E1 references
• Line timing from synchronous optical interfaces for primary and secondary references
• Generates and processes SONET Synchronization Status Messaging (SSM) on OC-n interfaces
to indicate the quality of timing reference and to avoid timing loops
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
links
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.4 lbs. / 1.99 kg
Power
• MSE-1482 power consumption: 90 watts typical, 100 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN Muxponder Module

The Z-Series FLX-216i is a multi-rate OTN muxponder I-Temp module with highly scalable OTN
switching, add-drop multiplexer (ADM), and muxponder features optimized for deployments in
network transport applications. The environmentally hardened FLX-216i module provides two
XFP-based OTU2 ports and sixteen SFP-based client ports. The SFP ports support the following
service signal types mapped to the indicated facilities.
Signal Types Facility Mapping
Optical GbE
OC-3 / STM-1
OC-12 / STM-4 ODU0 (1.25G)
FC-100 / FICON
SBCON / ESCON
OC-48 / STM-16
ODU1 (2.5G)
FC-200 / FICON-Express
FC-400 ODUflex (5G)
The FLX-216i module provides OTN-level multiplexing of these signals into two OTU2 signals
with the following limitations:
• Maximum of sixteen (16) ODU0-rate facilities (eight per 10G trunk interface)
• Maximum of eight (8) ODU1-rate facilities (four per 10G trunk interface)
• Maximum of four (4) ODUflex-rate facilities (two per 10G trunk interface)
The FLX-216i module also provides a non-blocking OTN cross-connect function across all the ports
on a module. The cross-connect function is performed at the ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex levels. The
module also supports trunk-to-trunk port ODU express cross-connections.
The FLX-216i OTN switching, ADM, and muxponder module provides the following features and
benefits:
• Aggregation and transport of Ethernet, SONET/SDH, and Fiber Channel over the same
wavelength
• Pluggable optics provides for DWDM applications and flexibility in optical module reach
• High-capacity, 40 Gbps, non-blocking OTN (ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex) cross-connect fabric
capacity ensures scalable performance
• Client-to-trunk port traffic on the same card or across dual cards
• Trunk-to-trunk port (express) traffic on the same card or across dual cards
• Support for FC-100, FC-200, and FC-400 Fiber Channel signals
• Support for ESCON (200 Mbps) signals
• High-density design optimized for edge applications
• Environmentally hardened for deployment in remote cabinets
• Hitless upgrades (when upgrading from Release 5.2 [or higher] to a higher release)
• Supports Laser Shutdown as FDI on client ports with signal type set to 1GE
• Passive 1+1 unidirectional, non-revertive and revertive optical protection provided on client
and trunk interfaces using the Transport Protection Module (TPM) and Optical Protection
Switch (OPS) equipment
Dual Module Support

You must install the Ring Closure Modules (RCMs) or XC-2800 switch fabric modules in Z77 horizontal
Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slots that are required to support client-to-trunk or trunk-to-trunk port
cross-connections between FLX-216i line cards.
EFM slots operate in a working/protect pair as follows:
• Pair 1: EFM1 and EFM2
• Pair 2: EFM3 and EFM4
At least one RCM or XC-2800 switch fabric module per EFM pair is required to support full
communication between two FLX-216i line cards.
Note: The system does not support facility protection and equipment protection
configured with a protected card pair interconnected across the backplane.
FLX-216i Functional and Block Diagrams

The following graphic shows the FLX-216i trunk and client interfaces functional block diagram
and the OTN muxponder function.
ODU2
ODU0
16 Client Interfaces (SFPs) ODU1
ODUflex 2 x OTU2 10GTrunk Interfaces (XFPs)
• GbE Cross-Connect
• OC-3/12 or 48
• STM-1/4 or 16 ODU2
• FC-100/200 or 400
• ESCON
Figure 82: FLX-216i Functional Block Diagram
The next graphic shows the block diagram for the Z-Series FLX-216i module.
Figure 83: FLX-216i Block Diagram
Eight of the 16 client ports, numbered 3 through 10, are supported by a 10G OTN mapper in the
FLX-216i module and another eight client ports, numbered 11 through 18, are supported by a
separate 10G OTN mapper. Although you can configure any combination of supported signal types
in either set of eight client ports, the total data rate for each set (after mapping into ODU0 [1.25G],
ODU1 [2.5G], and ODUflex) cannot exceed 10G. For example, a 10G OTN mapper can support eight
ODU0, or four ODU1, or two ODUflex client signals.
Applications
• Optimized for diverse Ethernet and TDM applications, including:
 Multi-rate, multi-service add-drop multiplexer and muxponder for transport applications
 Aggregating last-mile broadband access platforms
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
Interfaces
• 2 XFP-based 10 Gbps ports configured as 10G OTU2 ports
• 16 SFP-based ports configured as GbE, OC-3/12/48, STM-1/4/16, FC-100/200/400, or ESCON
OTN Multiplexing and Cross-Connect Formats

• ODU0
• ODU1
• ODUflex (required for FC-400 signals)
Optical Transport
• Up to two 10G OTU2 signals per module
• G.709 RS FEC (6.2 dB coding gain)
• G.975.1 Annex 1.4 Strong FEC (8.9 dB coding gain)
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
• G.709 OTN support on all DWDM interfaces
links
Physical
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
• Weight: 4.4 lbs. / 1.99 kg
Power
• FLX-216i power consumption: 100 watts typical, 127 watts maximum
Environmental
• –40°F to +149°F / –40°C to +65°C operating temperature
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS compliant
WSS-402 and WSS-404 Wavelength Selective

Switch Modules
The Z-Series WSS-402 and WSS-404 Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS) single-slot modules are
two-degree and four-degree "Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer (ROADM)-on-a-blade,"
respectively, with support for 40 ITU channels spaced at 100 GHz in the C-band. Two WSS-402
modules are required to support a two-degree ROADM node, which means a WSS-402 module is
required per direction (East or West). Four WSS-404 modules are required to support a four-degree
ROADM node, which means a WSS-404 module is required per direction (East, West, North, or
South). You can install WSS-404 and AWG-40 Array Wave Guide modules in one to four separate
Z-Series shelves in a four-degree ROADM configuration.
Available with a standard 28dB link budget, which typically supports up to 112 km non-repeated
spans, both 40-channel WSS modules are full ROADM with Optical-Optical-Optical (OOO) switching
and optical pass through. Both pre- and boost amplification are included with automatic gain
amplification and span activation. The WSS-402 and WSS-404 modules dynamically balance all
wavelengths at 100 GHz spacing on the ITU grid.
WSS modules also supply channel monitors, integrated management through an in-band Optical
Supervisory Channel (OSC), and DCN management connectivity to provide node-to-node
communications. A facility for mid-span dispersion compensation is available as well an express port
for OOO pass-through wavelengths. For the WSS-402 modules, express ports are interconnected
with a fiber jumper to build optical express connectivity. For the WSS-404 module, the express port is
connected to an external optical fabric cross-connect OFX-4 (Optical Fiber Switch) module which
routes wavelengths.
WSS-402
WSS-404
Figure 84: WSS-402 and WSS-404 Single-slot Modules
Applications
The primary application of the WSS modules is to increase effective fiber capacity by multiplexing
multiple 10G wavelengths over a common fiber. This is achieved through the optical add-drop
capability for up to 40 wavelengths at each node in a ring, mesh, or linear configuration. The
modules minimize intermediate regeneration through OOO capability. The WSS modules support
pass-through wavelengths sent from Z-Series transponders, muxponders, aggregation/transport
modules, Ethernet switch/transport modules, or third-party systems equipped with ITU-compatible
optics.
WSS Modules Paired with the AWG-40

Each WSS module requires an associated AWG-40 Array Wave Guide unit for add/drop traffic. Add or
drop individual wavelengths using the passive AWG-40 2 RU module. The AWG-40 module allows
multiplexing and de-multiplexing any of the 40 channels supported by the WSS. The AWG-40 module
connects to the WSS COM port through a fiber jumper. Connect the individual channels on the
AWG-40 module to the appropriate Z-Series line card DWDM XFP transceiver or third-party
equipment using a fiber jumper.
You can use Dispersion Compensating Modules (DCMs) to support the WSS module. The DCMs are
based on Fiber Bragg Gratings (FBGs) and exhibit lower loss than standard fiber-based DCMs. The
DCMs install in a standard LGX module, allowing three DCMs to be installed in a 1 RU shelf/frame.
Connect the DCMs to a WSS module Mid-stage port using a fiber jumper.
Note: If a DCM is required with a WSS module, you must use a Fiber Bragg Grating
DCM. If a DCM is not required for your configuration, connect a 3dB loopback
attenuator to the WSS Mid-stage port. The WSS-402 Fiber Jumper Kit and the
WSS-404 Fiber Jumper Kit provide a loopback attenuator.
The following diagram shows an example of WSS-402 modules, AWG-40 modules, and DTM-8
line cards in a two-degree, East/West connectivity configuration.
Add/Drop
We
st
Express AWG-96
Ea
st
Traffic Modules
LME10G10
WSS-F2 WSS-F2 Modules
West
East
Pass-Through
AWG-96 AWG-96
OOO Traffic
West East
Add/Drop Add/Drop WSS-F2
Modules
Figure 86: Z77 Shelf, WSS-402, DTM-8, and AWG-40 Two-Degree Configuration Example
ROADMs allow for the non-blocking control of all wavelengths through software. Unlike OEO
systems, no new equipment is required at intermediate nodes for express services. The
graphic shows an example of the East/West optical AMP for transmit and receive with two
WSS-402 modules through the DTM-8 line card.
West East
RX TX
VOA VOA
RX AWG TX AWG
DTM-8
Figure 87: WSS-402 AMP Optical RX and TX Paths
WSS-404 4-Degree Optical Switching

The WSS-404 allows you to control a wavelength to route to any of the four directions of a
multi-degree ROADM node automatically. Four WSS-404 modules are required to support a
four-degree optical switching configuration, that is, a WSS-404 is required per direction (East, West,
North, or South). Express channels are transmitted to the external optical fabric cross connect
(OFX-4) module. Connect each channel on the AWG-40 module to the appropriate Z-Series line card
DWDM XFP using a fiber jumper.
OFX-4 in Planet Operate 3D view
OFX-4 passive LGX module
Inner fiber connections
1 2 3 4 OFX-4 ports 1 thru 4
Figure 88: OFX-4 Module – External Optical Fabric Cross-Connect
The next diagram shows the relationship of the four WSS-404 modules paired with AWG-40
modules and express channels passing through the OFX-4 module. This configuration provides
four-degree optical switching (East, West, North, and South).
Figure 89: WSS-404 Four-Degree Optical Switching
The OFX-4 module is a passive device that allows inter-connectivity for up to four WSS-404 modules.
The OFX-4 contains the fiber mesh for interconnection of fibers between the four WSS-404 modules.
Each WSS-404 has a direct point-to-point fiber connection to the other three WSS-404 modules. To
simplify the fiber connectivity between the WSS-404 modules, the fiber mesh resulting from the
interconnection of WSS-404 modules is housed in the OFX-4 module. A multi-fiber patch cord with
Multi-Fiber Push On (MPO) connectors interconnects each WSS-404 module to the OFX-4.
The OFX-4 module has an LGX form factor. You can install up to three LGX modules in a single 1 RU
LGX bracket.
WSS Ports
• Line port multiplexes DWDM channels, connects to outside plant fiber
• Express port for OOO pass-through wavelength channels
• Mid-stage port connects to the appropriate Dispersion Compensating Module
• COM port connects to the AWG-40 module
Key Features and Benefits

• Supports 40 channels in the C-band (192.1 THz – 196.0 THz), 100 GHz channel ITU grid
spacing
• High-performance fiber transport capacity expansion by multiplexing up to forty 10G
wavelengths per fiber
• Mid-stage access for deployment of DCMs
• Integrated 1510 nm Optical Supervisory Channel
• Modular additions and channel count selection allows right sizing and cost optimization
• In-service upgrades from 8-wavelength LAD-8, LAD-8i, LAD-8A, LAD-8E, and LAD-8X modules
to 40-wavelength WSS modules
• Alien wavelength support without the use of incremental transponder cards
• Dynamic RX gain control
 Real-time detection and compensation of any changes in fiber loss
• Automatic transmit power balancing
 Any broadband tilt or single-channel power offsets are accounted for in the WSS module
to ensure optimal Optical Signal to Noise Ratio (OSNR) performance at the receiver
• Supports manual gain tilt control
Gain tilt can occur when channel gain is not flat upon reaching the optical amplifier. In this
situation, higher signals receive more power, while lower signals receive less power.
• Transmit and receive power monitoring
 All provisioned wavelengths are monitored at one-second intervals to detect any
deviation from expected values
 Planet Operate displays current and historical Performance Monitoring (PM) data
• Link budget (with 80 km DWDM XFPs):
 28 dB (~ 112 km span)
 Up to ten 80 km spans are supported without optical regeneration
• The number of hops and total distance between regeneration points supported with WSS
ROADMs depend on several network-specific factors including distance between nodes,
optical module type (for example, 10G XFP or 100G coherent), performance of intermediate
amplifiers, and fiber type and condition. These factors affect the level of optical impairments
at the optical receiver module and ultimately determine the need for regeneration. Z-Series
ROADM networks support configurations as large as 2,000 km with coherent 100G optics.
Use Planet Design to determine the reach and assist in designing your optical network.
WSS-402 Block Diagram
Figure 90: WSS-402 DWDM Diagram
AWG-40 Insertion Loss

• AWG mux insertion loss: 5.5 dB minimum
• AWG demux insertion loss: 5.5 dB minimum
• AWG mux-demux pair insertion loss: 11 dB minimum
System Requirements
• Z22 (–48V shelf)
• Z33
• Z77
WSS-402 and WSS-404 DWDM Specifications

WSS-402
Number of DWDM Channels 40

Channel Spacing 100 GHz
Minimum Frequency (Ch 1) 192.1 THz 1560.61 nm
Maximum Frequency (Ch 40) 196.0 THz 1529.55 nm
Booster Attenuation Range 1 – 30 dB Adjustable
Booster EDFA Gain 17 dB Minimum
Booster EDFA NF 8.5 dB Maximum
Booster EDFA Output Power +20 dBm Maximum
Preamp EDFA Gain 15 – 30 dB Adjustable
Preamp EDFA Input Power –28.5 dB Minimum
Preamp EDFA NF 5.5 dB @ max gain 11.5 dB @ min gain
Preamp EDFA Mid-Stage Loss No Mid-Stage
Preamp EDFA Output Power +17.5 dBm Maximum
WSS Insertion Loss 5 dB Typical
WSS Channel Attenuation 0 – 15 dB
Minimum Channel Tx Launch Power –7 dBm
Maximum Channel Tx Launch Power +2 dBm
Link Budget 8 – 28 dB Assumes standard 80 km
DWDM XFP transceiver and TX
launch power of –1 dBm
DCM Loss 1.5 – 3 dB
WSS-404
Number of DWDM Channels 40

Channel Spacing 100 GHz
Minimum Frequency (Ch 1) 192.1 THz 1560.61 nm
Maximum Frequency (Ch 40) 196.0 THz 1529.55 nm
Booster Attenuation Range 1 – 30 dB Adjustable
Booster EDFA Gain 22 dB Minimum
Booster EDFA NF 6 dB Maximum
Booster EDFA Output Power +20 dBm Maximum
Preamp EDFA Gain 19 – 34 dB Adjustable
Preamp EDFA Input Power –29.5 dB Minimum
Preamp EDFA NF 5.5 dB @ max gain 11.5 dB @ min gain
Preamp EDFA Mid-Stage Loss 0 – 4.5 dB
Preamp EDFA Output Power 20 dBm Maximum
WSS Insertion Loss 9.5 dB Typical
WSS Channel Attenuation 0 – 15 dB
Minimum Channel Tx Launch Power –7 dBm
Maximum Channel Tx Launch Power +2 dBm
Link Budget 8 – 28 dB Assumes standard 80 km
DWDM XFP transceiver and TX
launch power of –1 dBm
DCM Loss 1.5 – 3 dB
WSS-402 and WSS-404 OSC Specifications

• Data Format: 100Base-FX Ethernet
• Maximum TX Power: 5 dBm
• Minimum TX Power: –1 dBm
• Maximum RX Power: –3 dBm
• Minimum RX Power: –33 dBm
• OSC Link Budget: 32 dB
Physical
• WSS-402 and WSS-404 module dimensions: • AWG-40 dimensions:
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm  Depth: 10.1" / 256.6 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm  Width: 19.0" / 482.6 mm
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm  Height: 3.47" / 88.1 mm, 2 RU
• Weight: 8.4 lbs. / 3.7 kg • Weight: 10.0 lbs. / 4.5 kg
Power
• WSS-402 module power consumption: 50 watts typical, 65 watts maximum
• WSS-404 module power consumption: 60 watts typical, 65 watts maximum
The AWG-40 module is a passive device.
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• UE/CE-Marked: EN 60950, EN 55022, EN 61000, ETSI EN 300 386 V.1.3.3
• FCC, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A
• RoHS Compliant
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Wavelength

Selective Switch Modules
The Z-Series WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules provide wavelength-selectable switching and
reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexing (ROADM) capabilities with automated provisioning,
power balancing, and monitoring for the Z-Series packet-optical transport platforms (P-OTPs). The
integration and density of the WSS modules enable scaling of transport capacity by allowing
specified wavelengths to be added/dropped, switched, or transparently passed-through without
requiring optical-to-electrical-to-optical (O-E-O) conversions at each Z-Series node.
Each of the Z-Series WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 single-slot modules provide ROADM functionality
for up to 96 wavelengths in both ring and mesh configurations. Non-blocking wavelength switching is
supported for up to eight degrees. WSS modules operate in the 1550 nm band across ITU channel
designations with 50-GHz spacing for waves of up to 200G.
WSS-F2
WSS-F4
WSS-F8
Figure 91: WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Single-slot Modules
The WSS modules are highly integrated, minimizing space requirements. The Wavelength Selective
Switch includes pre- and booster amplifiers, automatic gain amplification, automatic span activation,
optical channel monitors (OCMs), Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) and mid-stage dispersion
compensation.
You can pair the passive AWG-96 optical multiplexer with these WSS modules for 96-channel
optical access to conserve slots in the Z-Series shelf for services, or optionally use these WSS
modules in legacy 40-channel configurations. To simplify fiber connectivity, two passive optical
mesh modules provide four- and eight-degree connections:
• The OFX-4 four-degree module interconnects up to four WSS-F4 line cards.
• The OFX-8 eight-degree module interconnects up to eight WSS-F8 line cards.
The OFX-4 and OFX-8 modules have an LGX form factor. You can install up to three LGX modules in a
single 1 RU LGX bracket. For four- or eight-degree operation, only one such bracket is required.
Optical Channel Monitoring

WSS modules also support management through integrated in-band OSC and data communication
network (DCN) management connectivity. The module supports “per-second” monitoring of optical
channel status to detect real-time deviations in performance and raise alerts against
customer-selectable thresholds.
Applications
• Metro access and regional networks
• Wholesale wavelength transport
• Low-latency data center inter-connectivity
• Multi-service backhaul
Key Features
• Integrated WSS/ROADM automates wavelength provisioning, power balancing, and
monitoring
• Two-degree (WSS-F2), four-degree (WSS-F4), or eight-degree (WSS-F8) switching of ninety-six
50-GHz spaced channels, user-configurable for compatibility with forty 100-GHz spaced
channels for legacy support
• Low-latency, energy-efficient O-O-O switching
• Modular additions and channel count selection
• Hitless upgrades from LADs to WSS modules
• Support for alien wavelengths without incremental transponder cards
• Integrated channel monitors for automatic adjustment
• Optical layer for transponding and muxponding functions in conjunction with other Z-Series
modules
• The number of hops and total distance between regeneration points supported with WSS
ROADMs depend on several network-specific factors including distance between nodes,
optical module type (for example, 10G XFP or 100G coherent), performance of intermediate
amplifiers, and fiber type and condition. These factors affect the level of optical impairments
at the optical receiver module and ultimately determine the need for regeneration. Z-Series
ROADM networks support configurations as large as 2,000 km with coherent 100G optics.
Use Planet Design to determine the reach and assist in designing your optical network.
WSS-F2 DWDM Diagram
WSS-F4 DWDM Diagram
Figure 92: WSS-F4 Egress and Ingress Points
WSS-F8 DWDM Diagram
System Requirements
WSS-F2 and WSS-F4:
WSS-F8:
WSS Modules Paired with the AWG-96

To support more than 40 and up to 96 channels, each WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 module requires
an associated AWG-96 Array Wave Guide unit for add/drop traffic. Add or drop individual
wavelengths using the passive AWG-96 2 RU module.
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Modules support existing 40-Channel Networks

WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules can operate in an existing 40-channel (100 GHz spacing)
configuration within the same network and same node as the WSS-402 or WSS-404. When
configured for 40-channel support, WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules are compatible with the
AWG-40, L-AMP, 40-channel DCMs, and existing fixed and tunable XFP, SFP+, and SFP transceivers.
Interconnection between 40-Channel and 96-Channel ROADM Networks

WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules also support interconnection between 40-channel and
96-channel ROADM networks in the following cases:
1. Internodal line side of 40-channel module (WSS-402/404) to line side of 96-channel module
(WSS-F2/F4/F8) ROADM interconnection.
2. Internodal line side of 96-channel module (operating in 40-channel mode) to line side of
96-channel module ROADM interconnection.
It is not necessary to specify wavelength in these cases. However, If wavelength is specified, it must
be the whole ITU channel (channels 21 to 60, based on 100 GHz spacing). ITU channels 13.5 to 61.50
(based on 50 GHz spacing) are not supported by 40-channel modules or 96-channel modules
operating in 40-channel mode.
Due to optical incompatibility, it is not possible to optically express between a 40-channel ROADM
and a 96-channel ROADM.
For information on changing the module grid mode setting from 96- to 40-channel support, refer to
the topic, "WSS Modules" in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user guide.
The AWG-96 module provides the ability to mux and demux any of the 96 supported channels. The
AWG-96 connects to the WSS-F2 Add/Drop port or the WSS-F4 or WSS-F8 COM port through a fiber
jumper. Connect the individual channels on the AWG-96 module to the appropriate Z-Series line card
DWDM XFP transceiver or third-party equipment using a fiber jumper.
Figure 93: Z-Series Array Wave Guide (AWG-96)
You can use Dispersion Compensating Modules (DCMs) to support the WSS module. DCMs for the
Z-Series are based on Fiber Bragg Gratings (FBGs) and exhibit lower loss than standard fiber-based
DCMs. DCMs install in a standard LGX module, allowing the installation of three DCMs in a 1 RU LGX
bracket. Connect the DCMs to a WSS module Mid-Stage port using a fiber jumper.
Note: If a DCM is required with a WSS module, you must use a Fiber Bragg Grating
DCM. If a DCM is not required for your configuration, connect a 3 dB loopback
attenuator to the WSS Mid-stage port. The WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Fiber
Jumper Kits provide a loopback attenuator.
Note: The UPG port on the AWG-96 is an upgrade port for future use. This release
does not support the UPG port.
Two-Degree Switching
Two WSS-F2 modules are required to support a two-degree ROADM node. The Express ports are
interconnected with a single fiber pair to build express path connectivity.
The next diagram shows an example of WSS-F2 modules, AWG-96 modules, and DTM-8 line
cards in a two-degree, East/West connectivity configuration.
Figure 94: Z77 Shelf, WSS-F2, LME-10G10, and AWG-96 Two-Degree Configuration Example
ROADMs allow for the non-blocking control of all wavelengths through software. Unlike OEO
systems, no new equipment is required at intermediate nodes for express services. The next
graphic shows an example of the East/West optical AMP for transmit and receive with two
WSS-F2 modules through the LME-10G10 line card.
Figure 95: WSS-F2 AMP Optical RX and TX Paths
Four and Eight-Degree Optical Switching

WSS-404, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules enable you to control a wavelength automatically for routing
to any of the four directions of a multi-degree ROADM node. Four WSS modules are required to
support a four-degree optical switching configuration, which means one WSS module is required per
direction (East, West, North, and South).
WSS-F8 modules additionally enable you to route a wavelength to any of the eight directions of
a multi-degree ROADM node. Eight WSS-F8 modules are required to support an eight-degree
optical switching configuration, or one WSS module per direction.
OFX-4 in Planet Operate 3D View OFX-8 in Planet Operate 3D View
Inner fiber
connections
1 2 3 4 OFX ports 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Figure 96: OFX-4 and OFX-8 Modules – Optical Fabric Cross-Connects
ROADM Express Path

ROADM line cards optically express DWDM wavelengths received by one degree of the node out
onto a different degree. To tie these different degrees together, the WSS line card provides an
express path connection to every other ROADM line card.
As an example, the WSS-F4 line card provides three EXP egress points and three EXP ingress
points as shown in this diagram.
Figure 97: WSS-F4 Egress and Ingress Points
To simplify the fiber connectivity between WSS modules, the fiber mesh resulting from the
interconnection of WSS modules is housed in the OFX module. The OFX-4 module, an externally
connected optical mux, enables the card-to-card light path. Four MTP connectors (multi-fiber push
on connectors) on the OFX-4 front panel provide the transmit and receive fiber pairs. A multi-fiber
patch cord with MTP connectors interconnects each WSS module to the OFX module.
The next diagram illustrates the individual fiber pairs within the OFX-4 module and the four
MTP connectors.
Figure 98: OFX-4 Fiber Pairs and MTP Connectors
The following graphic shows the mapping information of each MTP connector that houses
multiple fibers. Inside the OFX-4 module, each fiber on each MTP port is mapped to another
fiber on another MTP port.
Figure 99: MTP Connector Mapping
The OFX-4 module is a passive device that inter-connects up to four WSS-F4 modules. The passive
OFX-8 module inter-connects up to eight WSS-F8 modules. OFX-4 and OFX-8 modules have an LGX
form factor. Up to three LGX modules can be installed in a single 1 RU LGX bracket. The OFX-4 and
OFX-8 modules contain the fiber mesh for interconnection of fibers between the supported WSS
modules. Each WSS-F4 or WSS-F8 has a direct point-to-point fiber connection to the other WSS
modules.
The next diagram shows the relationship of four WSS-F4 modules paired with AWG-96 modules
and express channels passing through the OFX-4 module. This configuration provides
four-degree optical switching.
Figure 100: WSS-F4 Four-Degree Optical Switching
This diagram shows the relationship of the eight WSS-F8 modules paired with AWG-96 modules
and express channels passing through the OFX-8 module. This configuration provides
eight-degree optical switching.
Figure 101: WSS-F8 Eight-Degree Optical Switching
Note: Up to four or eight compatible WSS-404/F4 and WSS-F8 modules can share OFX-4 and OFX-8
modules, respectively, installed in multiple shelves in a Multi Node Group (MNG). For example, Node
A of the MNG could have two WSS-F4 modules and Node B of the MNG could have two WSS-F4
modules with each of the WSS-F4 modules connected to a single OFX-4 Optical Fiber Switch. This
type of configuration can provide additional protection by allowing you to place different degrees
(directions) in multiple shelves. In the event of a failure in one of the shelves, the ROADM degrees in
the remaining shelf of the MNG continue to provide service.
For additional information on Multi-Node Groups, see "Creating and Managing Multi-Node Groups"
in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user guide.
The connection from the WSS-F4 Express port to the intended OFX-4 port or the WSS-F8 to the
intended OFX-8 port is dependent on your planned channel provisioning through Planet Operate.
You must coordinate your physical fiber connections with the Planet Operate channel provisioning.
For details on creating a multi-fiber connection using the WSS module, see the Planet Operate: Trails
and Services user guide.
For detailed instructions on installing WSS line cards, AWG modules, and OFX modules, see the Z22,
Z33, and Z77 installation user guides.
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 Optical Specifications

• 4.8 THz Spectrum
 96-Channel, 50 GHz Spacing, configurable for 40-Channel, 100 GHz Spacing
 ITU Channel Assignments: 13.5 – 61
 Frequency: 191.35 – 196.10 THz
 Flexible Grid with 12.5 GHz Increments
• Booster and Pre-Amp Specifications:
 Booster Attenuation Range: 0 – 5 dB
 Booster EDFA Gain: 16 dB min. (WSS-F2); 19 dB min. (WSS-F4); 26 dB min. (WSS-F8)
 Booster EDFA NF: 5.5 dB max.
 Booster EDFA Output Power 20.7 dBm max.
 Pre-Amp EDFA Gain: 10 – 30 dB adjustable
 Pre-Amp EDFA Input Power: –29.5 dB min.
 Pre-Amp EDFA NF: 5.5 dB at max. gain
 Pre-Amp EDFA Mid-State Loss: Yes
 Pre-Amp EDFA Output Power: +18 dBm max. (WSS-F2); +21 dBm max. (WSS-F4); +22 dBm
max. (WSS-F8)
• Module Insertion Loss: 5 dB typical
• Module Channel Attenuation: 0 – 15 dB
• Min. Channel Tx Launch Power: – 7 dBm
• Max. Channel Tx Launch Power: 0 dBm
• Link Budget: 8 – 28 dB
• DCM Loss: 1.5 – 4.5 dB
• Fiber Types Supported: NSDF (G.652), NZ-DSF (G.655)
• Duplex LC/UPC Connectors (passive AWG patch panel provides optical access)
• Mid-Stage Access for Fiber Bragg Grating Dispersion Compensation Modules (supports
channels 30–33, 35–38)
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 OSC Specifications

• Link Budget: 36 dB
Management
• SNMP v2
• CLI
• TL1
Physical
• WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 module • AWG-96 dimensions:
dimensions:  Depth: 10.1" / 256.6 mm
 Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm  Width: 19.0" / 482.6 mm
 Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm  Height: 3.47" / 88.1 mm, 2 RU
 Height: 13.8" / 350 mm • Weight: 10.0 lbs. / 4.5 kg
Power
• WSS-F2/F4/F8 power consumption: 60 watts typical, 75 watts maximum
The AWG-96 module is a passive device.
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS Compliant
OLA Modules
The Optical Line Amplifier OLA-200 and OLA-200 modules function as mid-span, bi-directional EDFA
optical amplifiers for up to 96-optical channels. The OLA-010 module utilizes Raman technology and
functions as an uni-directional RAMAN amplifier to provide all-band wavelength coverage for up to
96-optical channels.
Coupled with the Z-Series ROADM and DWDM modules the integrated OLA amplifiers support metro,
regional, and long-haul transport network applications. The OLA-201 and OLA-010 are optimized for
applications in regional/long-haul networks, while the OLA-200 is optimized for metro network
environments.
OLA-200 and OLA-201

The OLA-200 and OLA-201 EDFA modules extend the reach of an optical span by 28 dB and
provide amplification for the following modules:
• WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
• WSS-402 and WSS-404
• LAD-4A, LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8X, LAD-40E, and LAD-96E
• OLA-200, OLA-201, and OLA-010
OLA-010
The OLA-010 Raman module extends the reach of an optical span by 13.5 dB and provides
amplification for the following modules:
• WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
• WSS-402 and WSS-404
• LAD-8E, LAD-8X, LAD-40, LAD-40E, and LAD-96E
• OLA-200 and OLA-201
• L-AMP
The OLA-010 module provides the following optical port connections:
• NETWORK: The network optical port connects to the line fiber leaving the node.
• EQUIPMENT: The equipment optical port connects to the ROADM module (for example,
WSS-xx) or other Z-Series modules with integrated EDFA capability.
• MONITOR: The monitor optical port is a 20 dB network tap for monitoring traffic.
You can use the OLA modules in place of legacy L-AMP shelves. The high-performance OLA-201
module additionally offers an integrated Optical Channel Monitor (OCM) for automatic spectral
tilt adjustment, removing the previous four-hop restriction due to tilt, and extending the
node-to-node span capacity by more than 60% before regeneration compared to the L-AMP
shelf.
Figure 102: OLA Modules
The following graph shows the relative reach of the OLA-200 module and the OLA-201 module
compared to the L-AMP shelf, based on optical signal-to-noise (OSNR) ratio measurements.
Rules and Guidelines

OLA-010
• The OLA-010 module is uni-directional and you must pair with one of the ROADM or DWDM
modules listed previously.
• If you require gain in both directions (East and West) you must pair a second OLA-010
module with the paired ROADM or DWDM module.
OLA-200 and OLA-201

• You can connect a maximum of four (4) consecutive OLA-200 modules in the same span.
• You can connect a maximum of nine (9) consecutive OLA-201 modules in the same span.
• Longer spans require an O-O-O operation for channel leveling:
• For OLA-200 modules, include a WSS module after every fifth hop.
 For OLA-201 modules, include a WSS module after every tenth hop.
OLA System Requirements

OLA-200 and OLA-201
OLA-010
OLA Interfaces
OLA-200 and OLA-201 Optical Interfaces and Access
• Two optical lines (four optical fiber interfaces)
• Monitor ports (OLA-200 only)
OLA-200 and OLA-201 Optical Specifications

 40 C-band optical channels on 100 GHz ITU (1530.33 to 1561.42 nm) or 96 C-band optical
channels on 50 GHz ITU (1529.16 to 1566.72 to nm)
 Integrated 1510 nm Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) 100Base-FX Ethernet
• DWDM power output
 40 or 96 channels
 19.0 dBm (–1 dBm per channel)
• Laser Safety Class: 1
• Laser Shutdown\Restart: automatic, ITU-T G.664
• Dispersion compensation: External
• Maximum span of 28 dB, supports up to 28 dB of gain
• Mid-stage loss support for 0 – 5.0 dB

• Monitor ports (OLA-200 only)—approximately 20 dB lower than the respective TX and RX
Line port
• Optical channel monitoring (OLA-201 only)—real-time reporting of individual channel power
via software
OLA-010 Optical Interfaces and Access

• Two optical lines (Network and Equipment/four optical fiber interfaces)
OLA-010 Optical Specifications

 Raman gain across entire C-Band (1529.16 to 1566.72 to nm)
 Integrated 1510 nm Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) 100Base FX Ethernet
• Composite Raman Output: 680mW TYP
• Number of Raman Pump Lasers: 2
• 1455nm pump power: 500mW
• 1425nm pump power: 500mW
• DWDM Input Power Min: -48dBm (Raman pumps off)
• DWDM Input Power Max: 10dBm (Raman pumps on)
• Gain Flatness: 1dB
• G.652 NF at max gain: -0.6dB
• LEAF NF at max gain: -1.5dB
• Laser Safety Class: 1M
• Maximum Network span of 42 dB
Note: OLA-200 and OLA-201modules support manual gain tilt control. Gain tilt
can occur when channel gain is not flat upon reaching the optical amplifier. In
this situation, higher signals receive more power, while lower signals receive less
power.
OLA OSC Specifications

OLA-200 and OLA-201 OSC Specifications
• Maximum RX Power: –3 dBm
• OSC Link Budget: 32 dB
OLA-010 OSC Specifications

Network Port
• Data Format: 100Base FX Ethernet
• Minimum TX Power: 0 dBm
• Maximum RX Power: 4.5 dBm
• Minimum RX Power: –38.5 dBm
• OSC Link Budget (Pumps Off): 38.5 dB
Equipment Port
• Data Format: 100Base FX Ethernet
• Maximum TX Power: -5 dBm
• Minimum TX Power: -30 dBm
• Maximum RX Power: 5 dBm
• OSC Link Budget: >10 dB
OLA Features
OLA-200 and OLA-201 Features
• OLA modules fit in Z-Series Z77, Z33, and Z22 shelves
• 40 or 96-channel + OSC: 80 km amplifier
• Managed via OSC
• Mid-stage DCM access and monitoring
• Redundant power
OLA-010 Features
• OLA modules fit in Z-Series Z77, Z33, and Z22 shelves
• 40 or 96-channel + OSC
• Managed via OSC
• Redundant power
OLA Applications
Extended optical reach for DWDM and ROADM networks:
• The OLA-200 module is optimized for metro (short-haul) environments
• The OLA-010 and OLA-201 modules are optimized for regional (long-haul) environments
Min. Gain Max. Gain Output Power NF

Module Technology
(dB) (dB) (dBm) (at 20 dB span)
OLA-200 8.00 28.00 20.75 8.40 Single Pump EDFA
OLA-201 8.00 28.00 20.75 6.60 Dual Pump EDFA
OLA-010 8.00 13.5 N/A –1.00 700 mW Raman
The following graphic provides two example DWDM/ROADM networks equipped with Z22
shelves and using OLA-200, OLA-201, and OLA-010 modules for extended optical reach. The
example shows applications of OLA-200/OLA-201 EDFA modules and OLA-010 Raman module.
Z77 with Z77 with

LAD or WSS modules LAD or WSS modules
Z22 equipped with
one OLA-200 or OLA-201 module
up to 28 dB gain up to 28 dB gain
(112 km nominal) (112 km nominal)
Z77 with
Z77 with Z22 equipped with one OLA-200 LAD or WSS modules
LAD or WSS modules or OLA-201 module and and one OLA-010
one OLA-010 module
up to 28 dB gain up to 41.5 dB gain

(112 km nominal) (165 km nominal)
Figure 103: OLA-200/OLA-201 EDFA modules and OLA-010 Raman module application example
OLA Physical
OLA module dimensions:
• Depth: 11.6" / 295 mm
• Width: 1.2" / 30.5 mm
• Height: 13.8" / 350 mm
OLA module weight:
• OLA-200: 5.0 lbs. / 2.3 kg
• OLA-201: 5.9 lbs. / 2.7 kg
• OLA-010: 5.7 lbs. /2.6 kg
OLA Power
• OLA-200 power consumption: 35 watts typical, 50 watts maximum
Environmental
Compliance / Safety
• UL/CSA Listed
• RoHS Compliant
AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments

The following table lists the channel assignments for LAD-40/40E and WSS-402/404 modules,
as well as WSS-F2/F4/F8 modules configured for 40-channel grid mode.
LAD/WSS Wavelength ITU LAD/WSS Wavelength ITU

AWG-40 (nm) Channel AWG-40 (nm) Channel
21 1560.61 21 41 1544.53 41
22 1559.79 22 42 1543.73 42
23 1558.98 23 43 1542.94 43
24 1558.17 24 44 1542.14 44
25 1557.36 25 45 1541.35 45
26 1556.55 26 46 1540.56 46
27 1555.75 27 47 1539.77 47
28 1554.94 28 48 1538.98 48
29 1554.13 29 49 1538.19 49
30 1553.33 30 50 1537.40 50
31 1552.52 31 51 1536.61 51
32 1551.72 32 52 1535.82 52
33 1550.92 33 53 1535.04 53
34 1550.12 34 54 1534.25 54
35 1549.32 35 55 1533.47 55
36 1548.51 36 56 1532.68 56
37 1547.72 37 57 1531.90 57
38 1546.92 38 58 1531.12 58
39 1546.12 39 59 1530.33 59
40 1545.32 40 60 1529.55 60
Note: The channel numbering for the module and the AWG-40 follows the ITU channel numbering.
Card channel numbers display in Planet Operate in the Transport Resources > Physical Resources
tree under the OCh Group Port at the end of the optical channel AID, for example,
COM_OCH-1-1-3-21 and EXP_OCH-1-1-4-21.
AWG-96 Wavelength Assignments

The following table lists the wavelength assignments for LAD-96 and LAD-96E modules and for
WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules operating in 96-channel grid mode.
For wavelength assignments in 40-channel grid mode, see AWG-40 Wavelength Assignments
LAD/WSS Wavelength LAD/WSS Wavelength ITU

ITU Channel
AWG-96 (nm) AWG-96 (nm) Channel
135 1566.72 13.5 375 1547.32 37.5
140 1566.31 14 380 1546.92 38
145 1565.90 14.5 385 1546.52 38.5
150 1565.50 15 390 1546.12 39
155 1565.09 15.5 395 1545.72 39.5
160 1564.68 16 400 1545.32 40
165 1564.27 16.5 405 1544.92 40.5
170 1563.86 17 410 1544.53 41
175 1563.45 17.5 415 1544.13 41.5
180 1563.05 18 420 1543.73 42
185 1562.64 18.5 425 1543.33 42.5
190 1562.23 19 430 1542.94 43
195 1561.83 19.5 435 1542.54 43.5
200 1561.42 20 440 1542.14 44
205 1561.01 20.5 445 1541.75 44.5
210 1560.61 21 450 1541.35 45
215 1560.20 21.5 455 1540.95 45.5
220 1559.79 22 460 1540.56 46
225 1559.39 22.5 465 1540.16 46.5
230 1558.98 23 470 1539.77 47
235 1558.58 23.5 475 1539.37 47.5
240 1558.17 24 480 1538.98 48
245 1557.77 24.5 485 1538.58 48.5
LAD/WSS Wavelength LAD/WSS Wavelength ITU

ITU Channel
AWG-96 (nm) AWG-96 (nm) Channel
250 1557.36 25 490 1538.19 49
255 1556.96 25.5 495 1537.79 49.5
260 1556.55 26 500 1537.40 50
265 1556.15 26.5 505 1537.00 50.5
270 1555.75 27 510 1536.61 51
275 1555.34 27.5 515 1536.22 51.5
280 1554.94 28 520 1535.82 52
285 1554.54 28.5 525 1535.43 52.5
290 1554.13 29 530 1535.04 53
295 1553.73 29.5 535 1534.64 53.5
300 1553.33 30 540 1534.25 54
305 1552.93 30.5 545 1533.86 54.5
310 1552.52 31 550 1533.47 55
315 1552.12 31.5 555 1533.07 55.5
320 1551.72 32 560 1532.68 56
325 1551.32 32.5 565 1532.29 56.5
330 1550.92 33 570 1531.90 57
335 1550.52 33.5 575 1531.51 57.5
340 1550.12 34 580 1531.12 58
345 1549.72 34.5 585 1530.72 58.5
350 1549.32 35 590 1530.33 59
355 1548.91 35.5 595 1529.94 59.5
360 1548.51 36 600 1529.55 60
365 1548.11 36.5 605 1529.16 60.5
370 1547.72 37 610 1528.77 61
Note: The WSS-F2/F4/F8 and AWG-96 channel numbering convention is derived by multiplying the
ITU channel number by a factor of 10, for example, ITU channel 13.5 x 10 = 135. Card channel
numbers display in Planet Operate in the Transport Resources > Physical Resources tree under
the OCh Group Port at the end of the optical channel AID, for example, COM_OCH-1-11-3-135 and
EXP_OCH-1-11-4-135.
Channel, Wavelength, and Frequency Table

The following table provides XFP, SFP, and CFP channel, wavelength, and frequency (THz).
100 GHz and 50 GHz Spacing 50 GHz Spacing Only

(even channels) (odd channels)
Wavelength Frequency Wavelength Frequency

Channel Channel
(nm) (THz) (nm) (THz)
14 1566.31 191.4 13.5 1566.72 191.35
15 1565.50 191.5 14.5 1565.90 191.45
16 1564.68 191.6 15.5 1565.09 191.55
17 1563.86 191.7 16.5 1564.27 191.65
18 1563.05 191.8 17.5 1563.45 191.75
19 1562.23 191.9 18.5 1562.64 191.85
20 1561.42 192.0 19.5 1561.83 191.95
21 1560.61 192.1 20.5 1561.01 192.05
22 1559.79 192.2 21.5 1560.20 192.15
23 1558.98 192.3 22.5 1559.39 192.25
24 1558.17 192.4 23.5 1558.58 192.35
25 1557.36 192.5 24.5 1557.77 192.45
26 1556.56 192.6 25.5 1556.96 192.55
27 1555.75 192.7 26.5 1556.15 192.65
28 1554.94 192.8 27.5 1555.34 192.75
29 1554.13 192.9 28.5 1554.54 192.85
30 1553.33 193.0 29.5 1553.73 192.95
31 1552.52 193.1 30.5 1552.93 193.05
32 1551.72 193.2 31.5 1552.12 193.15
33 1550.92 193.3 32.5 1551.32 193.25
34 1550.12 193.4 33.5 1550.52 193.35
35 1549.32 193.5 34.5 1549.72 193.45
36 1548.52 193.6 35.5 1548.91 193.55
37 1547.72 193.7 36.5 1548.11 193.65
38 1546.92 193.8 37.5 1547.32 193.75
39 1546.12 193.9 38.5 1546.52 193.85
40 1545.32 194.0 39.5 1545.72 193.95
41 1544.52 194.1 40.5 1544.92 194.05
100 GHz and 50 GHz Spacing 50 GHz Spacing Only

(even channels) (odd channels)
42 1543.73 194.2 41.5 1544.13 194.15
43 1542.94 194.3 42.5 1543.33 194.25
44 1542.14 194.4 43.5 1542.54 194.35
45 1541.35 194.5 44.5 1541.75 194.45
46 1540.56 194.6 45.5 1540.95 194.55
47 1539.77 194.7 46.5 1540.16 194.65
48 1538.98 194.8 47.5 1539.37 194.75
49 1538.19 194.9 48.5 1538.58 194.85
50 1537.40 195.0 49.5 1537.79 194.95
51 1536.61 195.1 50.5 1537.00 195.05
52 1535.82 195.2 51.5 1536.22 195.15
53 1535.04 195.3 52.5 1535.43 195.25
54 1534.25 195.4 53.5 1534.64 195.35
55 1533.47 195.5 54.5 1533.86 195.45
56 1532.68 195.6 55.5 1533.07 195.55
57 1531.90 195.7 56.5 1532.29 195.65
58 1531.12 195.8 57.5 1531.51 195.75
59 1530.33 195.9 58.5 1530.72 195.85
60 1529.55 196.0 59.5 1529.94 195.95
61 1528.77 196.1 60.5 1529.16 196.05
Note: Provision the channel number in Planet Operate in the Transport Resources > Physical
Resources tree under the module XFP, SFP or CFP Slot General tab.
Ring Closure Modules

The Ring Closure Module (RCM) is a passive module located in an Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slot
of the Z77 shelf. The RCM provides connectivity without external patching between two 2.5G-LME4
modules, or two MSE-1482 modules, or two PME-412 modules or two PME-216i modules.
RCMs are required and must be installed in Z77 horizontal EFM slots to support the following
applications:
• ODU1 Express cross-connect (OC-48/STM-16 express) between a pair of 2.5G-LME4 modules
• Link aggregation using multiple ports between a pair of PME-412 modules or PME-216i
modules
• A TESI Express connection using a pair of PME-412 modules or PME-216i modules
• An unprotected Ethernet drop over a protected TESI using a pair of PME-412 modules or
PME-216i modules
• Cross-card connections and pass-through traffic between a pair of MSE-1482 modules
• FLX-216i dual module support—client-to-trunk or trunk-to-trunk port cross-connections
between FLX-216i modules
This table shows the required RCM placement in the Z77 EFM slots for each supported line
card.
Line Card Z77 EFM Slots
MSE-1482 slots 1 or 3
PME-412 slot 3
PME-216i slot 3
2.5G-LME4 slot 3
For RCM placement to support the FLX-216i dual module configuration, client-to-trunk or
trunk-to-trunk port cross-connects between FLX-216i line cards, see "Dual Mode Support" in
FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN Muxponder Module starting on page 191.
Note: Z22 or Z33 shelves do not require RCMs.
XC-2800 Switch Fabric Modules

The XC-2800 is a unified packet and Optical Transport Network (OTN) switch fabric for the Z77 shelf
(Z77 and Z77 shelf v2). The XC-2800 provides service versatility and increased switching capacity for
the Z77. The fully non-blocking design of XC-2800 switch-fabric provides 2.8 Tbps of capacity across
the Z77 backplane. Working in unison with currently available Z-Series high-performance service
interface modules, the XC-2800 can scale in excess of two billion packets-per-second (pps) of
line-rate traffic throughput.
The XC-2800 switch fabric module features and benefits include:
• Leverages a modular architecture of four individual switch fabric modules with no single
point of failure, providing support for 1:3 redundancy; increasing network availability
• Carrier-grade design provides investment protection by enabling in-service upgrades for
existing Z77 customers
• Maintains slot-to-slot connectivity across the backplane for Ethernet service modules and is
compatible with optical ROADM, WDM multiplexer, transponder and muxponder modules
• Supports the TSW-10G10 packet transport module providing 10 non-blocking, line-rate OTU2
or 10GbE ports (XFP/SFP)
• Allows TSW-10G10 line cards to aggregate and groom 10G rings, freeing up PME-412 and
PME-216i resources
• Supports the PSW-10G10 and PSW-618 packet modules (for details, see Packet Line Cards –
Compatibility and Interoperability starting on page 245)
• Supports most legacy applications supported by the Ring Closure Modules:
 ODU1 Express cross-connect (OC-48/STM-16 express) between a pair of 2.5G-LME4
modules
 Link aggregation using multiple ports between a pair of PME-412 or PME-216i modules
 A TESI Express connection using a pair of PME-412 or PME-216i modules
 An unprotected Ethernet drop over a protected TESI using a pair of PME-412 or PME-216i
modules
• Supports the MSE-1482 line card in a standalone muxponder configuration
• Supports FLX-216i dual modules—client-to-trunk or trunk-to-trunk port cross-connections
between modules
• Supports LME-10G10 dual modules—express cross-connections utilizing ten (10) ODU2
channels (for details, see LME-10G10 Signal and Card Interoperability starting on page
117)
Note: You can install MSE-1482 line cards in a Z77 shelf supported by the
XC-2800 switch fabric. The XC-2800 switch fabric module provides supports the
MSE-1482 in a standalone muxponder configuration. However, the XC-2800
switch fabric module does not support MSE-1482 card-to-card backplane
cross-connections or protection.
XC-2800 Switch Fabric Modules

installed in EFM slots 1 through 4
Figure 104: Z77 with XC-2800 (Rear View)
The following graphic shows the XC-2800 switch fabric module block diagram.
Figure 105: Z77 XC-2800 Block Diagram
System Requirements
XC-2800 Applications
• High-capacity aggregation and transport of Ethernet, OTN, and SONET/SDH services
• Delivery of deterministic, high-performance carrier Ethernet E-Line and E-LAN services
• Consolidated, multi-layer transport over DWDM in metro/regional hub networks
Capacity and Throughput

• Backplane capacity: 2.8 Tbps, fully non-blocking (200 Gbps/slot across 14 slots)
• Switching throughput: Scales to 2.1 billion packets per second in a fully loaded configuration
(full line-rate performance) with currently available service interface modules

• The XC-2800 consists of four individual switch-fabric modules in a 1:3 protected configuration
• No single point of failure
• Sub-100 millisecond (ms) protection switching
Physical
 Height: 1.7" / 43.2 mm
 Width: 18.1" / 460 mm
 Depth: 5.4" / 137 mm
• Weight: 4.19 lbs. / 1.9 kg
Power
• XC-2800 power consumption: 60 watts typical, 75 watts maximum per XC-2800 switch
fabric module
Optical Protection Groups

Planet Operate provides non-revertive 1+1 optical protection groups for DWDM/CWDM DTM-8,
DTM-100G, DTM-100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, SFT-8, and SFT-10G16 optical ports. Optical protection
groups, created in conjunction with the passive Transport Protection Module (TPM), provide reliable
protection for facility and hardware failures.
With non-revertive optical protection, when a failure occurs and the traffic switches from the working
port to the protect port, the traffic stays switched to the protect port until it is manually switched
back or if a higher priority failure occurs.
1+1 protection transmits a diversely routed copy of the traffic on working and protection channels.
The receiver determines which traffic signal to accept based on signal quality (signal degrade and
signal fail).
Z-Series optical protection groups support unidirectional switching mode that allows only the
affected direction of the transmission to switch.
Note: Only the FLX-216i supports non-revertive and revertive optical protection groups. Revertive
1+1 optical protection automatically switches the signal back to the working port when the working
port comes back online. Revertive 1+1 optical protection automatically switches the signal back to
the working port when the working port comes back online.
Note: Some of the early manufactured Transport Protection Modules are

labeled as "OPM."
Optical Protection Groups Equipment

Transport Protection Module
The Transport Protection Module (TPM) provides optical protection capabilities with the Z-Series
packet-optical transport platform. Working in conjunction with the Z-Series multi-port transponder
modules, the TPM provides facility and/or equipment protection for wavelength services, including
1G to 2.5G (GbE, OC-48/STM-16, 1/2G FC), 10G (10 GbE, OC-192/STM-64) as well as 100G (100 GbE)
optical services.
The TPM flexible optical protection capabilities make it ideally suited for applications when just a
single, unprotected-port is available on the client-side device (switch or router), including:
• Data center connectivity
• Enterprise sites
• Co-location facilities
The TPM fully passive design avoids the need for an active protection switch – eliminating a single
point of failure.
The TPM leverages the compact LGX form-factor, allowing up to three units to be housed in a 1 RU
high frame (shelf). For detailed information on installing the passive LGX frame, see the applicable
Z-Series shelf installation and safety guide.
Configuration Example
Optical protection groups require a single TPM connected to the client third-party device, one or two
DTM-8, DTM-100G, DTM-100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, SFT-8, or SFT-10G16 modules, and two
Z-Series transport modules.
The example optical protection group configuration in the next figure shows a single client
interface (third-party device) connected to the TPM add/drop port, the working DTM-100G
client port connected to the TPM West port, a protect DTM-100G client port connected to the
TPM East port, and DTM-100G associated trunk ports connected to their respective LAD-8i
transport modules. One LAD-8i module provides DWDM transport for the working path in the
West direction and the other LAD-8i module provides transport for the redundant protected
path in the East direction.
West East
LAD-8i LAD-8i
DTM-100G DTM-100G
TPM
Client
Third-Party
Equipment
Figure 106: Optical Protection Group Example
You can utilize any of the various Z-Series LAD modules (LAD-4/4A, LAD-8/8A/8E/8i/8X), the
LAD-40/LAD-40E/AWG-40, the LAD-96/LAD-96E/AWG-96, or the WSS/AWG-40 modules to provide
aggregation and transport for the optical protection groups. When CWDM optical protection groups
are created using DTM-8, DTM-100G, DTM-100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, SFT-8, or SFT-10G16
modules, the LAC-8 or LAC-4P modules provide aggregation and transport for optical protection
groups.
Note: An optical protection group does not protect third-party client equipment.
Supported Equipment Configurations

You can create optical protection groups with the following equipment configurations:
• Option #1
 One TPM
 One or two DTM-8, DTM-100G, DTM-100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, SFT-8, or SFT-10G16
modules
 Two transport modules (LAC-8, or LAC-4P, or LAD-4, LAD-4A, LAD-8, LAD-8i, LAD-8A,
LAD-8E, or LAD-8X)
• Option #2
 One TPM
modules
 Two WSS-402/WSS-404 transport modules, two WSS-F2/WSS-F4/WSS-F8 transport
modules (configured for 40-channel support), or two LAD-40/LAD-40E transport modules
 Two AWG-40 optical modules
• Option #3
 One TPM
modules
 Two WSS-F2/WSS-F4/WSS-F8 transport modules or two LAD-96/LAD-96E transport
modules
 Two AWG-96 optical modules
All of the options require identical equipment and software configurations at the near-end and
far-end.
For detailed information on provisioning optical protection groups, see the Planet Operate:
SONET/SDH and Optical Protection Groups user guide.
Optical Protection Groups – Rules and Guidelines

Planet Operate allows configuration of non-revertive 1+1 optical protection groups. The following
graphic provides an overview of optical protection capabilities; using the Transport Protection
Module (TPM) connected to a client third-party device, with the Z-Series packet-optical transport
platform.
Note: Only the FLX-216i line card supports non-revertive and revertive optical protection groups.
Figure 107: Optical Protection using Transport Protection Module
Use the following rules and guidelines when planning and provisioning optical protection
groups.
General
• DTM-8, DTM-100G/100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, and SFT-8/10G16 modules support optical
protection groups.
• Always provision an optical protection group instance at the near-end node and the far-end
node.
• 1+1 configurations are supported for optical protection groups. 1+1 protection transmits a
copy of the traffic on both the working and protect channels. The receiver determines which
traffic signal to accept based on the signal quality.
• OTN is the preferred signal type for network transport and optical protection groups. An
end-to-end OTN signal type provides the ability to monitor signal failures (SF), such as Loss of
Frame (LOF), Loss of Multiframe (LOM), Alarm Indication Signal (AIS), as well as Signal
Degrade (SD).
• With end-to-end OTN signal type the protection switch process selects SD over SF when both
are detected on the working and protect channel.
• Optical protection groups are unidirectional. For a unidirectional failure (a failure affecting
only one direction of the transmission), only the affected direction of the transmission is
switched to the protect channel.
• Planet Operate provides support for non-revertive optical protection. With non-revertive
optical protection, when a failure occurs and the traffic switches from the working port to the
protect port, the traffic stays switched to the protect port until it is manually switched back or
if a higher priority failure occurs. Only the FLX-216i supports non-revertive and revertive
optical protection. Revertive 1+1 optical protection automatically switches the signal back to
the working port when the working port comes back online.
Card Level
• DTM-8, DTM-100G/100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, and SFT-8/10G16 line cards participating in
an optical protection group must be collocated within the same card pair slots as follows:
 Z77 shelf, install card pairs in slots 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, 11/12, 13/14, and 15/16
 Z33 shelf, install card pairs in slots 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6
 Z22 –48V shelf, install card pairs in slots 1/2
Port Level
• An DTM-8, DTM-100G/100G2, FLX-216i, LME-10G10, or SFT-8/10G16 client port participating
in a fiber patch cannot be included in an optical protection group. Remove the fiber-patch
prior to creating the optical protection group.
The following table provides card/port specific protection group limitation and optimization
considerations:
Module Limitations Optimization
DTM-8, SFT-8, SFT-10G10 These modules have hardwired port Faster protection switching times occur
pairs as follows: 1/2, 3/4, 5/6… These when the working and protect ports are
port pairs are effectively not on the same module and when the
cross-connected to each other, forming port numbers are "identical."
a client-network relationship. One port For example: port 1 on an odd-slot
in the pair connects to a client signal, module with port 1 on an even-slot
and the other port connects towards module.
the transport network.
Because of this, the working and
protect ports cannot be selected within
the same port pair.
DTM-100G, DTM-100G2 Working and protect ports cannot be on Not applicable.

the same module. Working and protect
ports must be on port 2.
FLX-216i Working and protect ports must be All port combinations are equally
connected to an ODUk (k=0, 1, flex) optimized and will exhibit the same
from any of the two OTU2 ports located protection switching times.
on the odd-slot module, or any of the
two OTU2 ports located on the
even-slot module.
LME-10G10 Working and protect ports must not be Faster protection switching times occur
on the same module. One port must be when the working port number is
on the odd-slot module and the other identical to the protect port number.
must be on the even-slot module. For example: port 3 on a odd-slot
module with port 3 on an even-slot
module.
Transport Protection Module (TPM)

• When using a TPM to provide optical protection, always account for a 3 dB loss (plus
connector losses) on each signal, applicable in both forward and reverse directions.
Transport Fault Reporting/Laser Shutdown as FDI

• The Laser Shutdown as FDI check box is only activated and applicable when the supporting
module fiber port signal type is set to Ethernet. This feature is not applicable when using
OTN for network transport. Refer to the following table for a complete listing of the modules,
fiber ports, and signal types supporting the Laser Shutdown as FDI feature.
• When the Laser Shutdown as FDI check box is selected (enabled), it is set to report LOS per
ITU-T G.8021/Y.1341 Amendment 1 and the optical laser transmitter is effectively turned off.
• To forward transport faults (such as LOS, to the far end of an DTM-8, DTM-100G/100G2,
FLX-216i, or SFT-8/10G16 module optical protection group) select the Laser Shutdown as FDI
check box on the Advanced tab of the local and remote fiber ports participating in the optical
protection group; and the applicable fiber ports in all transit nodes (hops) in the network.
• During a signal fail condition of the incoming signal, the module sends a local fault sequence
as a replacement signal (per G.709). Additionally, if you select the Laser Shutdown as FDI
check box, the system shuts down the laser.
The following modules, fiber ports, and signal types support the Laser Shutdown as FDI
feature:
Modules Fiber Ports Signal Types
DTM-8 10G Eth/OTN/SONET/SDH • 10GE LAN

(ports 1 through 8)
DTM-8G 10GE/OTU2 (ports 6 and 8) • 10GE LAN
DTM-100G 100GE/OTU4 (port 2) • 100GE LAN
DTM-100G2 100GE/OTU4 (port 2) • 100GE LAN
FLX-216i Multi-rate Fix • 1GE

(ports 3 through 18)
LME-10G10 10G Multi-service • 10GE LAN

(ports 2 through 11)
PME-412 10GE (ports 3 and 4) • 10GE LAN
PSW-100G 100GE/OTU4 (port 1) • 100GE LAN
SFT-8 Fiber Port (ports 1 through 8) • N/A
SFT-10G16 Multi-rate (ports 1 through 16) • 10GE LAN

• 1GE
For information on upgrading a Z-Series node, see the "Service-Affected Line Cards" topic in the
Z-Series Troubleshooting and Maintenance Guide.
Note: You cannot edit TPM Optical Protection Groups. You cannot create an empty
group and add members later, or create a group with one member and add another
later, or delete members from a group. Planet Operate will allow this behavior to be
consistent with other protection groups in the Z-Series product, but the node behavior
is undefined.
Always include both working and protect members when creating an Optical
Protection Group. Delete and re-create an existing group when making changes to the
members of the group.
Line Card SYNC LED

A Z-Series line card SYNC LED indicates the state of the phase-locked loop (PLL) synchronization to
the shelf active controller card (Z77 BOSS/BOSS2 or Z22/Z33 CEMi). The line card PLL can be locked
to the clock coming from the active controller card or it can be in Hold-over or Free-run mode if a
BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card is not available.
The SYNC LED color assignments for the line cards are as follows:
• Locked: Solid BLUE
• Hold-over: Solid AMBER
• Free-run: Off
• Acquiring (tracking): Flashing BLUE
Note: Z-Series line cards control their SYNC LEDs even if the timing subsystem (TSS) is not
provisioned. For example, the TSS on the BOSS/CEMi cards can run in Free-run mode (indicated by
the BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi SYNC LED being OFF), but a line card SYNC LED is solid BLUE to indicate it is
locked to the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card clock.
MSE-1482 Line Card SYNC LED

MSE-1482 line card SYNC LED indications are slightly dissimilar from other Z-Series line cards due to
the differences in operation. MSE-1482 line cards are designed to operate in pairs where one
MSE-1482 line card is "active" and the other MSE-1482 line card in the pair is "standby." In this
configuration, the standby MSE-1482 line card recovers its clock from the active MSE-1482 line card.
The active MSE-1482 line card recovers its clock from the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card.
The SYNC LED on the active MSE-1482 line card indicates whether the active MSE-1482 line card is
locked to the active BOSS/CEMi card or in Hold-over or Free-run mode. When the active MSE-1482
line card PLL is locked to the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card, the active MSE-1482 line card SYNC LED
is solid BLUE.
The SYNC LED on the standby MSE-1482 line card indicates whether the standby MSE-1482 line card
is locked to the active MSE-1482 line card (its peer) or in Hold-over or Free-run mode. When the
standby MSE-1482 line card PLL is locked to the active MSE-1482 line card, the standby MSE-1482 line
card SYNC LED is solid BLUE.
Optical Protection Switch

The Optical Protection Switch (OPS) uses low-loss switching technology to provide protection against
fiber cuts and failures. It provides redundant path protection for telecommunication transmission
systems. The OPS operates independent of rate, format, and wavelength.
The OPS provides 1+1 protection. It continuously monitors optical power on both its primary and
secondary links. If received optical power on the active link drops below a configured threshold,
the OPS switches the optical signal to the standby link within 25 ms.
Deploy the OPS in pairs, one at each end of an optical link.
Control Module Switch Module Power Module
Figure 108: Optical Protection Switch
Each OPS contains three field-replaceable modules:

• OPS Interface Control Module
• OPS Switch Plug-In Module, LC/UPC Connectors
• OPS Dual Power Supply Module, –48 Vdc
1+1 Protection
At the transmit end of the optical trunk, a 50:50 optical splitter divides the signal for
transmission onto primary (T1) and secondary (T2) paths. At the receive end, the OPS selects
the signal according to the received optical power levels:
• If optical power on the active receive path falls below the configured alarm threshold, the
OPS issues an alarm.
• If optical power on the active receive path falls below the configured switch threshold, the
OPS switches to receive on the standby path.
Splitter Primary Path Switch
Switch Splitter
Secondary Path
OPS OPS
Z-Series Line Card Z-Series Line Card
S
(e.g., PME/WSS/LAD) (e.g., PME/WSS/LAD)
Figure 109: Optical Protection Switch 1+1 Protection
Switching Modes
The OPS supports the following switching modes:
• Automatic non-revertive switching: When Rx optical power on the active path falls below
the configured switch threshold, the OPS automatically switches traffic to the other path.
Traffic remains on the new active path until another switch occurs.
• Automatic revertive switching: When Rx optical power on the primary path falls below the
configured switch threshold, the OPS automatically switches traffic to the secondary path.
Traffic automatically reverts to the primary path when the Rx optical power rises above the
configured threshold. You can configure a reversion interval and a switch interval to control
behavior of this mode.
• Manual asynchronous switching: Allows the operator to specify the operational path, via
either SNMP command or front panel buttons (front panel buttons are operational only
when the OPS is in local mode).
Local or Remote Operation

Control and monitor the OPS in real time either locally, using buttons on the front panel, or
remotely, using SNMP v1. Set the OPS for local or remote operation using the Local/Remote
switch on the front panel of the control module:
• In local mode, the buttons on the front panel are active and the local operator can configure
the OPS. The SNMP user can monitor the device but cannot configure it.
• In remote mode, the buttons on the front panel are inactive. Only the remote SNMP user can
configure the device. The local user can monitor the device using the LEDs.
Local / Remote
Switch
Figure 110: Local/Remote Switch on Control Module
OPS Specifications
Operational Specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating Wavelength 1550 ±50
Insertion Loss T1 and T2 → Tx < 3.8 dB
Rx → R1 and R2 < 1.2 dB
Return Loss > 45 dB
Crosstalk > 55 dB
Wavelength dependent loss < 0.1 dB
Polarization dependent loss < 0.1 dB
Monitor operating range Tx: –30 to +25 dBm
Rx: –50 to +10 dBm
Monitor accuracy ±0.5 dB
Monitor resolution 0.1 dB
Switching speed < 25 ms
Switching type Latched when power off
Lifetime 1,000,000 cycles
Connectors LC/UPC
Dimensions 19-inch L: 483 mm W: 23 1mm H: 43.7 mm
Power Consumption <5W
Interface RJ-45 Ethernet
Environmental Specifications
Parameter Operational Specification Storage Specification

Temperature 0º to 50º C (32º to 122º F) 0º to 75º C (32º to 167º F)
Relative humidity </= 85% (at 25º C) </= 85%
Atmospheric pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Operational conditions No corrosive or solvent gas. n/a
No fly ash.
No strong electromagnetic field interference.
Power supply voltage Nominal –48 Vdc. Range –36 to –72 Vdc. n/a
Packet Line Cards – Compatibility and
Interoperability
This section describes Z-Series packet card-to-packet card Release 9.0 / 16.03 and higher
interoperability for the Z22, Z33, and Z77 shelves, as well as node-to-node interoperability. This
section also provides card-to-card connection examples, including PSW to PSW, PME to PSW, and
PSW to TSW modules that show the interoperability of packet line cards in G.8031 and G.8032
protected TESI configurations.
Important! — You must configure all PSW line cards in a Z-Series shelf with the
same transport technology setting—all PBB-TE.
In This Chapter
Packet Card-to-Packet Card Interoperability – Z77 ................................... 246
Packet Card Node-to-Node Interoperability – Release 6.0 and Higher .. 251
PME/PSW/TSW Packet Line Card Interoperability ..................................... 252
Packet Card-to-Packet Card Interoperability –

Z77
The following table shows the connectivity methods in regards to card-to-card compatibility
and interoperability of the Z-Series packet line cards for CyOS Release 10.0 and higher when
PME UNI PME NNI TSW NNI PSW UNI PSW NNI
Card Pair Card Pair

PME UNI with RCM with RCM Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper
or XC-2800 or XC-2800
Card Pair Card Pair

PME NNI with RCM with RCM Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper
or XC-2800 or XC-2800
TSW NNI Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper XC-2800 Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper
PSW UNI Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper XC-2800 XC-2800
PSW NNI Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper XC-2800 XC-2800
The XC-2800 switch fabric modules installed in a Z77 shelf provide fabric connections for the
PSW-to-PSW and TSW-to-TSW line card connections. The XC-2800 modules also provide the dual
10GE backplane connectivity for the PME-to-PME connection for PME line card pairs. There is no
fabric or backplane connectivity between different card types — you must use front fiber jumpers to
interconnect these line cards.
In a Z77 shelf, you must install PME-412 line cards or PME-216i line cards in slots 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10,
11/12, 13/14, or 15/16 to operate as a card pair. A PME-412 line card must NOT be collocated within
the same card pair with a PME-216i line card.
Ring Closure Modules (RCMs) installed in a Z77 shelf also provide the backplane connectivity for PME
line card pairs. RCMs are passive modules located in an Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slot of the Z77
shelf. RCMs provide connectivity without external patching between two PME-412 modules or two
PME-216i modules. RCM provide Link aggregation using multiple ports between a pair of PME-412
modules or PME-216i modules and A TESI Express connection using a pair of PME-412 modules or
PME-216i modules.
For packet card compatibility and interoperability information for releases prior to 7.0, as well as
connectivity and node-to-node examples for previously releases, see the release-specific versions of
the Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide and the Packet Switching User Guide.
Important! — For Release 10.0, an existing Z77 shelf in the field requires a power upgrade
prior to installing the PSW-100G2W line card. For details on upgrading the shelf power, see
the Z77 Power Upgrade Guide (450-3708-701) available online in the Ciena doc portal. After
the shelf power upgrade, the Z77 shelf can support up to eight PSW-100G2W line cards.
Packet Card-to-Packet Card Connection Examples

The following graphic illustrates a PSW UNI to PSW UNI card-to-card Z77 backplane connection
via the XC-2800 switch fabric module.
UNI connection
to client
Z77
PSW
UNI
XC-2800
PSW
UNI
UNI connection
to client
Figure 111: PSW UNI to PSW UNI Backplane Connection through the XC-2800
The next graphic illustrates a PME NNI to PSW NNI card-to-card connection using a fiber
jumper cable. The NNI to NNI fiber-jumper connection facilitates A-to-Z provisioning.
The PSW connects to the network / Z-Series cloud via an NNI interface. The PME connects to
the client via a UNI interface.
NNI connection to
Network / Z-Series cloud
Z77 NNI
PSW
NNI
Fiber jumper
connection
NNI
PME
UNI
UNI connection
to client
Figure 112: PME to PSW Connection
The following graphic shows an example of a fiber jumper connection between a PSW line card
and a PME line card in a 3D Z77 shelf view.
Figure 113: Fiber Jumper Connection - 3D Shelf View
The next graphic illustrates a PSW NNI to TSW NNI card-to-card connection using a fiber
jumper cable. Both line cards connect to the network / Z-Series cloud via NNI interfaces.
To Network /
Z-Series cloud
Z77 NNI
TSW
NNI
Fiber jumper
connection
NNI
PSW
NNI
To Network /
Z-Series cloud
Figure 114: PSW to TSW Connection

Z33
The following table shows the connectivity methods in regards to card-to-card compatibility
and interoperability of the Z-Series packet line cards for CyOS Release 10.0 and higher when
Card Pair Card Pair

PME UNI Backplane Backplane Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper
Card Pair Card Pair

PME NNI Backplane Backplane Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper
Mesh Mesh
PSW UNI Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Backplane Backplane
Mesh Mesh
PSW NNI Fiber Jumper Fiber Jumper Backplane Backplane
Notes:
• PSW-100G, PSW-10G10, PSW-10G20, PSW-100G2W, and PSW-618 line cards installed in Z33
slots 1 to 4 are designated Group 1.
• PSW line cards installed in Z33 slots 5 and 6 are designated Group 2. The system does not
allow flow domains or NNI services (including fiber patches) between cards in Group 1 and
Group 2.
• Due to power consumption, no more than two PSW-100G2W line cards can be installed in a
Z33 shelf. For details on upgrading the shelf power, see the Z33 Power Upgrade Guide
(450-3708-700) available online in the Ciena doc portal. After the shelf power upgrade, the
Z33 shelf can support up to two PSW-100G2W line cards.
• Z33 Gbps backplane capability:
 Group 1: The Z33 mesh backplane supports up to 100 Gbps between each pair of cards
in the mesh (not just 100 Gbps shared among all four line cards of Group 1). For
example, the backplane can support 100 Gbps between PSW cards placed in slots 1 and
3, while simultaneously supporting an additional 100 Gbps between PSW line cards
placed in slots 2 and 4.
 Group 2: The Z33 backplane supports up to 200 Gbps between PSW line cards in slots 5
and 6, limited only by the traffic termination capacity of the particular PSW line cards
involved. The PSW-10G20 line card can terminate up to 200 Gbps; other PSW line cards
can terminate up to 100 Gbps. Slot 6 does not support the PSW-100G2W line card.
• Do not use an NNI fiber jumper between PSW ports in Group 1 (slots 1 to 4) and PSW ports in
Group 2 (slots 5 and 6).
• You can use a UNI fiber jumper between PSW ports in Group 1 (slots 1 to 4) and PSW ports in
Group 2 (slots 5 and 6).
• Do not co-locate a PME line card with a PSW line card in slot pairs 1/2, 3/4, or 5/6.

Z22
The following table shows the connectivity methods regarding card-to-card compatibility and
interoperability of the Z-Series packet line cards for CyOS Release 10.0 and higher when
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PME UNI Backplane Backplane
Card Pair Card Pair
N/A N/A
PME NNI Backplane Backplane
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PSW UNI Backplane Backplane
Card Pair Card Pair

N/A N/A
PSW NNI Backplane Backplane
Notes:
• You can install PSW line cards in a Z22 shelf.
• Do not mix PSW and PME line cards in a Z22 shelf.
• Z22 –48V shelf — when installing PME line cards in slots 1 and 2, you must install PME line
cards of the same card type.
• Z22 +24V shelf — install only PME-216i line cards. You must install at least one PME-216i line
card in slot 1 or slot 2 to act as the shelf controller/manager.
Packet Card Node-to-Node Interoperability –

Release 6.0 and Higher
The following table shows the node-to-node interoperability of the Z-Series packet line cards for
Release 6.0 and higher.
PME UNI PME NNI TSW NNI PSW UNI PSW NNI
PME UNI X N/A N/A X N/A
PME NNI N/A X X N/A X1
TSW NNI N/A X X N/A X
PSW UNI X N/A N/A X N/A
PSW NNI N/A X1 X N/A X
X: Supported.
X1: Support for G.8032v2. Release 6.0 also supports G.8031 and G.8032v1.
Note: All PSW line cards support G.8031 protection switching in Release 6.0, and higher. The
TSW-10G10 line card does not support G.8031 protection switching. Keep in mind the following rules
for G.8031 TESIs:
• TESI endpoints must terminate on different switches, which function differently for PME and
PSW line cards:
 For PME line cards, when configuring a fully protected TESI, endpoints must terminate on
different line cards. For these line cards, a card pair functions as a single switch.
 For PSW line cards, when configuring a fully protected TESI, endpoints must terminate on
different nodes. For these line cards, a node functions as a single switch.
• You must create G.8031 protected TESIs across NNI ports only, not across UNI ports.
The next graphic illustrates a PME NNI to TSW NNI node-to-node connection.
Z22, Z33, or Z77 shelf Z77 shelf
NNI NNI
PME TSW
Figure 115: PME NNI to TSW NNI Node-to-Node Connection
PSW / PME G.8032 Ring Configuration Interoperability

The PME line cards do not interoperate in a two-node network G.8032 NNI ring with PSW line cards
because the PSW line cards utilize a per-node Backbone MAC address (B-MAC). In a two-node ring
configuration such as this, the PME line cards cannot operate with two TESI transport tunnels with
the same destination B-MAC and Backbone VLAN Identifier (B-VID).
Note that PME and PSW line cards interoperate on network G.8032 NNI rings when there are three
or more nodes in the ring. Additionally, PME and PSW line cards interoperate successfully on client
UNI rings when there are two or more nodes in the ring.
PME/PSW/TSW Packet Line Card

Interoperability
This section shows the interoperability of packet line cards in G.8031 and G.8032 protected
TESI configurations. Each table in this section represents packet line cards installed in nodes as
shown in the following graphics. The first graphic shows a linear G.8031 protected TESI
configuration.
G.8031 Protected TESI Configuration
Z-Series shelf Z-Series shelf Z-Series shelf
Working Packet
Packet Packet
Line Line Line
Card Card Card
Protect
A-End * Express Z-End
* Simple example only. A protectedTESI would typically

be provisioned in a different node.The working and
protect should not express through the same node.
Figure 116: Linear G.8031 Protected TESI Configuration
The next graphic shows a Network Ethernet Protection Ring (ERP) G.8032 protected TESI
configuration.
G.8032 Protected TESI NNI Ring Configuration
Z-Series shelf Z-Series shelf

A-End Ring Protection Link Z-End
Packet Packet
Line Line
Card Card
RPL Owner Add/Drop
Z-Series shelf
Packet
Line
Card
Express
Figure 117: Network ERP G.8032 Protected TESI Configuration
Packet Line Card Interoperability Guidelines

The guidelines listed here apply to G.8031 and G.8032 protected TESI configurations only.
• PSW line cards at a release later than or at 5.2 interoperate with other PSW line cards at a
release later than or at 5.2 with or without an express.
Note: PSW line cards at release 5.0 interoperate with other PSW line cards at release 5.0 with
or without an express.
• PSW line cards at a release earlier than 5.2 do not interoperate with any line cards when
there is an express between the A-End and the Z-End.
• PSW line cards at a release later than or at 5.2 and PSW line cards at a release earlier than 5.2
do not interoperate.
• PME line cards fully interoperate with other PME line cards. However, PME line cards must be
upgraded to release 5.2 or higher prior to installing PSW line cards into the same Z-Series
shelf.
• PSW line cards at a release earlier than 5.2 do not support protected TESIs.
Case 1
The next tables show packet line card interoperability with all nodes at a release later than 5.2
or at Release 5.2.
Protected TESIs Configuration
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 >= 5.2 >= 5.2
PME No Express PME Yes
PME PME Express PME Yes
PME PSW Express PME Yes
PME TSW Express PME Yes
PME No Express PSW Yes
PME PME Express PSW Yes
PME PSW Express PSW Yes
PME TSW Express PSW Yes
PSW No Express PSW Yes
PSW PME Express PSW Yes
PSW PSW Express PSW Yes
PSW TSW Express PSW Yes
ERP Legs Configuration
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 >= 5.2 >= 5.2
Case 2
These tables show packet line card interoperability with all nodes at releases earlier than 5.2.
A-d Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 < 5.2 < 5.2
PME No Express PSW No
PME PME Express PSW No
PME PSW Express PSW No
PME TSW Express PSW No
PSW No Express PSW No
PSW PME Express PSW No
PSW PSW Express PSW No
PSW TSW Express PSW No
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 < 5.2 < 5.2
Case 3
These tables show packet line card interoperability with the A-End and Express nodes at
releases earlier than 5.2, and the Z-End node at a release later than or at 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 < 5.2 >= 5.2
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 < 5.2 >= 5.2
Case 4
The tables here show packet line card interoperability with the A-End node at a release earlier
than 5.2, the Express node at a release later than or at 5.2, and the Z-End node at a release
earlier than 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 >= 5.2 < 5.2
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
< 5.2 >= 5.2 < 5.2
Case 5
The tables here show packet line card interoperability with the A-End node at a release earlier
than 5.2, and the Express and Z-End nodes at a release later than or at 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

< 5.2 >= 5.2 >= 5.2 Supported
A-End Express Z-End

< 5.2 >= 5.2 >= 5.2 Supported
Case 6
The tables here show packet line card interoperability with the A-End node at a release later
than or at 5.2 and the Express and Z-End nodes at a release earlier than 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 < 5.2 < 5.2
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 < 5.2 < 5.2
Case 7
The following tables show packet line card interoperability with the A-End node at a release
later than or at 5.2, the Express node at a release earlier than 5.2, and the Z-End node at a
release later than or at 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 < 5.2 >= 5.2
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 < 5.2 >= 5.2
Case 8
These tables show packet line card interoperability with the A-End and Express nodes at a
release later than or at 5.2, and the Z-End node at a release earlier than 5.2.
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 >= 5.2 < 5.2
A-End Express Z-End

Supported
>= 5.2 >= 5.2 < 5.2
Optical Link Design
This section describes optical link design for the Z-Series LAD and WSS modules.
In This Chapter
DWDM XFP Specifications with GFEC ....................................................262
LAD Modules ............................................................................................263
Dispersion Compensation Modules ......................................................269
DWDM XFP Specifications with GFEC

The following table shows a list of typical 80 km DWDM XFP specifications with OTU2 Generic
Forward Error Correction (GFEC) functionality. The error correction provided by GFEC improves
minimum Rx sensitivity by 3 dB, to –27 dBm from –24 dBm.
Parameter Max Min Notes
Transmit Power (TXP) +3 dBm –1 dBm
Rx Sensitivity (RXP) –7 dBm –27 dBm @ 10e-12 BER
Power Penalty (Po) 3 dB @ 80 km
Attenuation 23 dB 10 dB
Approximate Distance 80 km
Max Attenuation = TXP (min) – RXP (min) – Po

Min Attenuation = TXP (max) – RXP (max)
Approximate Distance = Max Attenuation / 0.2875 dB/km
Note: This section assumes the use of supported standard 80 km DWDM XFP
transceivers in all cases.
LAD Modules
LAD-2P and LAD-2G
This table summarizes the insertion loss introduced by the LAD-2P and LAD-2G for each port
individually and taken as an add-drop pair.
Card Type – Port Add Insertion Loss Drop Insertion Loss End-to-End Insertion Loss
LAD-2P – Ch. 30 2.8 dB 2.8 dB 5.6 dB
LAD-2P – Ch. 31 2.8 dB 2.8 dB 5.6 dB
LAD-2P – 1310 nm 1.2 dB 1.2 dB 2.4 dB
LAD-2G – Ch. 60 2 dB 2 dB 4 dB
LAD-2G – Ch. 61 2 dB 2 dB 4 dB
LAD-2G – 1550 nm 1.8 dB 1.8 dB 3.6 dB
These graphics show the block diagrams for the LAD-2P and LAD-2G modules.
LAD-2P
2
OADM 2
1 2 1 2
1 1
1310nm Drop Add 1310nm
Figure 118: LAD-2P Block Diagram
LAD-2G
OADM
Figure 119: LAD-2G Block Diagram
LAD-4/LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-8A/LAD-8E/LAD-8X
The following table summarizes the minimum and maximum supported span loss (or link
budget) for the LAD-4/8/i/A/E/X modules.
Maximum Span Distance

Card Type Minimum Span Loss Maximum Span Loss
@ 0.25 dB/km
LAD-4/LAD-8/LAD-8i 8 dB 16 dB 64 km
LAD-4A/LAD-8A 8 dB 24 dB 96 km
LAD-8E 8 dB 32 dB 128 km
LAD-8X 12 dB 40 dB 160 km
Note: The LAD-8E, at 128 km, and the LAD-8X, at 160 km, require dispersion compensation.
This table shows the insertion loss for the LAD-8 and LAD-8i modules.
Card Mux Demux Mux-Demux Pair

Type Insertion Loss Insertion Loss Insertion Loss
LAD-8 2.15 – 3.35 dB maximum 2.15 – 3.35 dB maximum 5.5 dB maximum
LAD-8i 2.5 – 4.5 dB maximum 2.5 – 4.5 dB maximum 6.7 dB maximum
LAD-4/8/i/A/E/X Safety Defaults

By default, the LAD-4A/LAD-8A TX Post-Amp attenuator is set to 10 dB, the LAD-8E/LAD-8X TX
Post-Amp attenuator is set to 18 dB. This setting limits the maximum reach, but allows for some
safety margin when initially turning up optical fiber spans. Under the default settings, you can safely
connect all LAD-4/LAD-8/LAD-8i, LAD-4A/LAD-8A, LAD-8E outputs to another module of the same
type with 10 dB of attenuation. Under the default settings, you can safely connect the LAD-8X to
another module of the same type with 12 dB of attenuation.
LAD-4/8/i/A/E/X Optical Control Points

Adjust the Z-Series LAD modules multiple gain control points by using the system management
software to optimize for the link optical characteristics.
The next diagram shows the location of the optical attenuation/gain control points for the LAD-8E
module.
LAD-8E Control Points
Figure 120: LAD-8E Variable Optical Attenuator (VOA) Control Points
The following diagram shows the location of the optical attenuation/gain control points for the
LAD-8X module.
LAD-8X Control Points
Figure 121: LAD-8X VOA Control Points
LAD-4/8/i/A/E/X Control Point Table

The following table shows the points of optical level control available on each LAD-4/8 module.
TX Pre-Amp TX Post-Amp RX Post-Amp

Card Type RX Amp Gain
Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator
LAD-4/LAD-8/LAD-8i
LAD-4A/LAD-8A
LAD-8E
LAD-8X
The TX Pre-Amp Attenuator allows control of optical levels at the input to the TX booster amplifier.
Use the TX Post Amp Attenuator to limit the maximum transmit power.
Control the RX Amp Gain to optimize the system gain for long spans in excess of 100 km.
Use the RX Post-Amp Attenuator to adjust the RX Power at the XFP transceiver.
Configuring the LAD-8A Gain Parameters
Note: Only adjust the default values after consulting a Customer Service
engineer to determine the proper settings.
LAD-8A TX Pre-Amp attenuation should be set to 12.5 dB. Do not change this value. This guarantees
a valid optical input to the TX Amplifier.
LAD-8A TX Post-Amp attenuation should be set based on span loss as shown in the next table.
TX Pre-Amp Attenuator TX Post-Amp Attenuator
12.5 Span Loss - 22
Configuring the LAD-8E Gain Parameters
Note: Only adjust the default values after consulting a Customer Service support
LAD-8E TX Pre-Amp attenuation should be set to 12.5 dB. Do not change this value. This guarantees a
valid optical input to the TX Amplifier.
LAD-8E TX Post-Amp attenuation and RX Amp Gain should be set based on span loss as shown
here.
TX Pre-Amp TX Post-Amp
Span Loss Attenuator Attenuator RX Amp Gain
Less Than 30 dB 12.5 30 – Span Loss 15

Greater Than or Equal to 30 dB 12.5 0 Span Loss - 15
Configuring the LAD-8X Gain Parameters
Note: Only adjust the default values after consulting a Customer Service support
LAD-8X TX Pre-Amp attenuation should be set to 7 dB. Do not change this value. This guarantees a
valid optical input to the TX Amplifier.
LAD-8X RX Post-Amp Attenuator should be set to 10 dB. Use this RX Post-Amp Attenuator to
fine-tune the RX Power at the XFP after you have made all other adjustments.
Set the LAD-8X TX Post-Amp attenuation and RX Amp Gain based on span loss as shown in this
table.
TX Pre-Amp TX Post-Amp RX Post-Amp

Span Loss Attenuator Attenuator RX Amp Gain
Attenuator
Less Than 32 dB 7 33 – Span Loss 22 10

Greater Than or
7 0 Span Loss - 10 10
Equal to 32 dB
LAD-40, LAD-40E, LAD-96, LAD-96E Link Budget

The next table summarizes the minimum and maximum attenuation (or link budget) for the
LAD-40, LAD-40E, LAD-96, and LAD-96E modules.
Maximum Span Distance

Card Type Minimum Span Loss Maximum Span Loss
@ 0.25 dB/km
LAD-40 0 dB 10 dB 40 km
LAD-96 0 dB 10 dB 40 km
Note: The LAD-40E and LAD-96E modules, at 112 km, require dispersion compensation.
LAD-40/LAD-96 and AWG Insertion Loss

• LAD-40/LAD-96 card insertion loss: 0.5 dB
• LAD-40/LAD-96 card pair insertion loss: 1 dB
• AWG-40/AWG-96 mux insertion loss: 5.5 dB minimum
• AWG-40/AWG-96 demux insertion loss: 5.5 dB minimum
• AWG-40/AWG-96 mux-demux pair insertion loss: 11 dB minimum
LAD-40E/LAD-96E Safety Defaults

By default, the LAD-40E and LAD-96E TX Post-Amp attenuator is set to 18 dB and the RX Pre-Amp
attenuator is set to 5 dB. This setting limits the maximum reach, but allows for some safety margin
when initially turning up optical fiber spans. Under the default settings, you can safely connect the
LAD-40E/LAD-96E output to another module of the same type with 10 dB of attenuation.
LAD-40E/LAD-96E Optical Control Points

The following diagram shows the location of the optical attenuation/gain control points for
LAD-40E and LAD-96E modules.
LAD-8X Control Points
Figure 122: LAD-40E/LAD-96E Location of Optical Attenuation/Gain Control Points
LAD-40, LAD-40E, LAD-96, and LAD-96E Control Point Table

The following table shows the points of optical level control available on each LAD-40, LAD-40E,
LAD-96, and LAD-96E module.
TX Pre-Amp TX Post-Amp RX Pre-Amp

Card Type RX Amp Gain
Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator
LAD-40
LAD-40E
LAD-96
LAD-96E
The TX Pre-Amp Attenuator allows control of optical levels at the input to the TX booster amplifier.
Use the TX Post Amp Attenuator to limit the maximum transmit power.
Control the RX Amp Gain to optimize the system gain for long spans in excess of 100 km.
Use the RX Pre-Amp Attenuator to control optical levels at the input to the RX amplifier.
Configuring the LAD-40E and LAD-96E Gain Parameters
Note: Only adjust the default values after consulting a Customer Service engineer
to determine the proper settings.
LAD-40E TX Pre-Amp attenuation should be set to 10 dB and the TX Post-Amp attenuation should be
set to 3 dB. Do not change these values. This guarantees a launch power of –1 dBm per channel.
Set the LAD-40E RX Pre-Amp attenuation and RX Amplifier gain according to the span loss, as
shown in the following table.
Span Loss RX Pre-Amp Attenuator RX Amp Gain
Less Than 13 dB 13 – Span Loss 15
Greater Than or Equal to 13 dB 0 Span Loss + 2
LAD-96E TX Pre-Amp attenuation should be set to 11 dB and the TX Post-Amp attenuation should be
set to 2 dB. Do not change these values. This guarantees a launch power of –1 dBm per channel.
Set the LAD-96E RX Pre-Amp attenuation and RX Amplifier gain according to the span loss as
shown in the following table.
Span Loss RX Pre-Amp Attenuator RX Amp Gain
Less Than 18 dB 18 – Span Loss 17
Greater Than or Equal to 18 dB 0 Span Loss -1
Dispersion Compensation Modules

Dispersion Compensation Modules (DCMs) provide various amounts of dispersion. Typically, optical
fiber spans with LAD-2P/LAD-4/LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-40/LAD-96 or LAD-4A/LAD-8A modules have
distances shorter than 95 km before regeneration, carry 10G waves, and do not need dispersion
compensation. Longer links provided by the LAD-8X, LAD-8E, LAD-40E modules, or
optical-optical-optical (OOO) links that are amplified optically, require dispersion compensation.
The following table shows a list of DCM units offered:
Distance Dispersion Max Loss Max PMD Size

Fiber Type
(km) (ps/nm) (dB) (ps) (1RU)
SMF-28 10 –164 2.1 0.30 0.5
SMF-28 20 –328 2.7 0.40 0.5
SMF-28 40 –656 4.1 0.50 0.5
SMF-28 60 –985 5.5 0.60 0.5
SMF-28 80 –1313 6.9 0.70 0.5
SMF-28 100 –1641 8.3 0.80 1.0
TW-RS 20 –90 2.9 0.21 0.5
TW-RS 40 –180 3.4 0.30 0.5
TW-RS 60 –270 3.9 0.37 0.5
TW-RS 80 –360 4.4 0.43 0.5
TW-RS 100 –450 4.9 0.48 0.5
LEAF 20 –76 3.9 0.30 0.5
LEAF 40 –153 4.8 0.50 0.5
LEAF 60 –229 5.6 0.60 0.5
LEAF 80 –305 6.5 0.70 0.5
LEAF 100 –382 7.3 0.80 0.5
Note: Install these DCMs in a 1 RU LGX rack-mount housing. All DCMs use LC connectors.
Fiber Bragg Grating DCMs for 40-Channel Configurations

You can use Fiber Bragg Grating (FBG) DCMs in the mid-stage on any of the DWDM modules (LAD-8X,
LAD-8E, LAD-40E, L-AMP, WSS-402/404, and WSS-F2/F4/F8 modules operating in 40-channel mode).
These FBG models support up to 40 channels with 100 GHz spacing. They exhibit lower loss and
latency than the standard fiber-based DCMs that allow them to be used with the amplifiers included
on the WSS modules. The WSS modules are not compatible with fiber-based DCMs due to their
excessive loss.
Install the FBG DCMs in a 1 RU LGX shelf. A shelf supports up to three modules. All modules
require a single slot. All DCMs use LC connectors.
Fiber Distance Dispersion Max Loss Max PMD Size

Channels Spacing
Type (km) (ps/nm) (dB) (ps) (1RU)
SMF-28 20 –328 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
SMF-28 40 –656 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
SMF-28 60 –985 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
SMF-28 80 –1313 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
SMF-28 100 –1641 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
TW-RS 80 –339 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
TW-RS 120 –509 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
TW-RS 160 –678 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
LEAF 80 –317 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
LEAF 120 –475 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
LEAF 160 –633 <3 <1 0.33 40 100 GHz
Fiber Bragg Grating DCMs for 89- and 96-Channel Configurations

You can use Fiber Bragg Grating DCMs in the mid-stage on the WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
modules.
The TrueWave (TM-RS) models support up to 89 channels with 50 GHz spacing and the SMF-28
models support up to 96 channels with 50 GHz spacing. They exhibit lower loss and latency than the
standard fiber-based DCMs that allow them to be used with the amplifiers included on the WSS-F2,
WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules. The WSS modules are not compatible with fiber-based DCMs due to
their excessive loss.
Install the FBG DCMs in a 1 RU LGX shelf. A shelf supports up to three modules. All modules
require a single slot. All DCMs use LC connectors.
Fiber Distance Dispersion Max Loss Max PMD Size

Channels Spacing
Type (km) (ps/nm) (dB) (ps) (1RU)
SMF-28 20 –328 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 40 –656 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 60 –985 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 80 –1313 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 100 –1641 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 120 –1970 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 140 –2298 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
SMF-28 160 –2626 <3 <1 0.33 96 50 GHz
TW-RS 160 –678 <3 <1 0.33 89 50 GHz
TW-RS 240 –1018 <3 <1 0.33 89 50 GHz
TW-RS 320 –1356 <3 <1 0.33 89 50 GHz
Application Configurations
This section describes various application configurations for the Z22, Z33, and Z77 platforms and
primary applications using Z-Series line cards and modules.
This table shows the Z-Series line cards and modules and a partial list of supported
applications.
DTM- DTM- SFT-

Applications LAD WSS LAC LME Pckt TSW MSE SFT-8 FLX
8/8G 100G 10G16
OC-192/STM-64
/ 1
10GbE DWDM
transport
OC-3/12/48/
STM-1/4/16
DWDM
transport
OC-48/STM-16
DWDM
transport
GbE Ethernet
over
SONET/SDH
(EoS)
Multi-service λ
transport
SONET/SDH
Transparent
Line
Packet
(100GbE,
10GbE and 2
1GbE)
aggregation
and transport
DTM- DTM- SFT-

Applications LAD WSS LAC LME Pckt TSW MSE SFT-8 FLX
8/8G 100G 10G16
FC-100/200/40
0/
ESCON
transport
FC-800/1200 1
transport
OC-3/12/48/
STM-1/4/16/
GbE transport
WDM private
line
connectivity for
10GbE
LAN/WAN,
OTN,
SONET/SDH
100GbE
transport
100GbE
Ethernet
service carried
over
OTU4/ODU4
OTU4 to OTU4
Note 1: LME-10G10 only.

Note 2: 1GbE only.
Note: Line card types represented in the previous table are as follows:
• "LAD" refers to all LAD modules: the LAD-2P/LAD-2G (I-Temp), LAD-4, LAD-4A, LAD-8, LAD-8i
(I-Temp), LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8X, LAD-40, LAD-40E, and LAD-96 modules.
• "WSS" refers to the WSS-402, WSS-404, WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8 modules.
• "LME" refers to the 2.5G-LME4 and LME-10G10 modules.
• "Packet" refers to the PME-412, PME-216i, PSW-10G10, PSW-10G20, PSW-100G2W, PSW-618,
and PSW-100G modules.
• "TSW" refers to the TSW-10G10 module.
• "MSE" refers to the MSE-1482 module.
• "FLX" refers to the FLX-216i module.
The applications described in this section are not exhaustive because there are a large number of
configurations. Capabilities of configurations not shown can be derived from line card capabilities
and other application configurations.
In This Chapter
Application 1: OC-192/STM-64/10GbE (10G λ) Transport Using LAD
Modules ....................................................................................................274
Application 2: OC-48/STM-16 Transport Using 2.5G-LME4 and LAD
Modules ....................................................................................................277
Application 3: Packet (10GbE and 1GbE) Transport and Switching ..278
Application 4: Multiservice Lambda Transport (OEO) Using PME,
2.5G-LME4, and LAD Modules ................................................................280
Application 5: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Functionality ...................282
Application 6: MSE-1482 Path Cross-Connect Functionality ..............284
Application 7: Ethernet over SONET (EoS) ............................................285
Application 8: WSS Network Configuration ..........................................286
Application 9: Ethernet Services and Transport ..................................288
Application 10: Collector Rings Using Z-Series Shelves with PME and
LAD Modules ............................................................................................289
Application 11: FLX-216i Configurations ...............................................290
Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations .........................................291
Application 1: OC-192/STM-64/10GbE (10G λ)

Transport Using LAD Modules
In this application, the Z33 shelf or the Z77 transports 10 Gbps signals. The system transponds the
OC-192/STM-64 or 10 GbE signals, maps to OTU2 and specific wavelengths using DWDM XFPs. In
intermediate sites, it provides optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration. The system would contain
the DTM-8 and LAD-4/A or LAD-8/A/E/i/X cards depending on the number of waves and distances
required. Its primary purpose is to transport 10G signals from point A to B.
All traffic is optical-electrical-optical and hence, the express traffic needs regeneration with the
DTM-8 module in a pass-through node. In a protected ring, OEO regeneration in a transit node can
use a single DTM-8 module (not a protected set) since the opposite side of the ring provides
protection.
This graphic shows an example of a four-wave 10G transport application using LAD-4 and/or
LAD-4A modules.
Typical configuration:
2 x LAD-4/LAD-4A
2 x DTM-8
Z33
4 network
10G waves
OTU-2 format
Z33
Z77
Z33
Figure 123: Four-Wave 10G Transport Application with LAD-4/LAD-4A
The next graphic shows an example of an eight-wave 10G transport application using LAD-8,
LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8i, and/or LAD-8X modules.
2 x LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-8A/LAD-8E/LAD-8X
4 x DTM-8
Z33
8 network
10G waves
OTU-2 format
Z33
Z77
Z33
Figure 124: Eight-Wave 10G Transport Application with LAD-8/A/E/i/X
10G Lambda Transport, OEO Application Feature Set

• Used in Z33 and Z77 shelves
• With LAD-4/A: 4-channel DWDM, 100 GHz spacing, front access — the XFP module
determines which wavelengths are accessed
• With LAD-8/A/E/i/X: 8-channel DWDM, 100 GHz spacing, front access — the XFP module
determines which wavelengths are accessed
• OEO configuration
• LAD-4, LAD-8 or LAD-8i: Link budget 16 dB (reach ~64 km), LAD-4A or 8A: Link budget 24 dB
(reach ~96 km), LAD-8E: Link budget 32 dB (reach ~128 km), LAD-8X: Link budget 40 dB (reach
~160 km)
• Quad 10G transponder cards (2 TDM+2 Ethernet)
• 3R functionality (re-time, re-shape, and re-transmit)
• Regeneration can be used for client as well as express traffic; express traffic can use 2 ports
of the same card
• Client port supports OC-192, 10GE LAN , 10GE WAN, and OTU2
• Optional integrated OTN mapping on all interfaces (OTU2)
• 100 Mbps DCN
• OC-192/STM-64, OC-48/STM-16, 10 GE, 1 GE alien wave capability
• No required synchronization
Application 2: OC-48/STM-16 Transport Using

2.5G-LME4 and LAD Modules
In this application, the Z33 shelf or the Z77 shelf transports OC-48/STM-16 signals. The system
transponds the OC-48/STM-16 signals and maps each to ODU1 inside the card and then
multiplexes four ODU1 signals into a single OTU2 signal. The OTU2 signal is mapped into a
specific wavelength using DWDM XFP transceivers. ODU1 add/drop capability is available. The
system would contain the 2.5G-LME4 and LAD-4/A or LAD-8/A/E/i/X line cards depending on
the number of waves and distances required. The primary purpose of this application is to
transport OC-48/STM-16 signals from A to B, but can also perform the add/drop capability.
2 x LAD-4, LAD-4 A or 2 x LAD-8, LAD-8i, LAD-8A, LAD-8E, LAD-8X
2 x 2.5G-LME4
Z33
OC-48/STM-16
1 O-E-O network
TDM
OTU-2 format
3/7 waves available for future expansion
Z33
Z77
Z33
Figure 125: OC-48/STM-16 Transport
Application 3: Packet (10GbE and 1GbE)

Transport and Switching
In this application, the Z22, Z33, or the Z77 shelf contains a pair of PME-412 modules or a pair of
PME-216i modules. The system provides packet aggregation and transport capabilities.
If PME modules are the only service cards in the Z33 shelf, as is the case in this application described,
install in slots 1 and 2 only.
The following graphic shows a Z-Series application example with a pair of PME-412 modules
with each PME module supporting two 10 GbE trunks.
PME-412 card pair
Z33
Z33
10 GbE 10 GbE 10 GbE
Z77
with PME 1 GbE, 10 GbE
Z33
Figure 126: Application with a Pair of PME Modules – Each PME Supports Two 10 GbE Trunks
In the next diagram, the Z33 shelf has a single PME-412 (or PME-216i) module. Each PME
module can support two 10 GbE trunks, one in each direction, but there is no card protection
in this configuration. The management plane is also non-redundant.
Single PME-412 card

(Both West and East optics
on this card.)
Z33
Z33
10 GbE
Z77
with PME 1 GbE, 10 GbE
Z33
Figure 127: Z-Series 10G Ring with a Single PME Module
Protected and Unprotected Configurations

• Using two PME-412 (or PME-216i) modules in a protected configuration:
 20 G protected ring (East/West)
 A total of 24 GbE client interfaces and 4 client 10 GbE interfaces on the PME-412 module
or a total of 32 GbE client interfaces on the PME-216i module
 Link aggregation supported between client ports of the two PME modules
• Using a single PME-412 (or PME-216i) module:

 10 G ring (East/West) with diverse facilities, but no equipment protection
 A total of 12 GbE client interfaces and 2 client 10 GbE interfaces on the PME-412 module
or a total of 16 GbE client interfaces on the PME-216i module
 Link aggregation supported between client ports of the PME module
Application 4: Multiservice Lambda Transport

(OEO) Using PME, 2.5G-LME4, and LAD Modules
In this application, the Z33 shelf or the Z77 shelf contains a pair of PME-412 (or PME-216i)
modules, a pair of 2.5G-LME4 modules, and a pair of LAD modules. The system delivers up to
three waves with packet and TDM traffic. The fourth wave is available for user non-protected
configurations or alien wave.
2 x LAD-4/LAD-4A
2 x PME-412 or 2 x PME-216i
2 x 2.5G-LME4
Z33
3 O-E-O network
TDM +2xPacket Z33
OTU-2 format
4th wave available for non-protected

configuration or alien wave OC-48, 1 GbE,
Z77 10 GbE
Z33
Figure 128: Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO
The Z77 shelf supports multi-degree configurations with multiple LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-8A,

LAD-8E, and LAD-8X modules.
n x LAD-8/LAD-8i/LAD-8A/LAD-8E/LAD-8X (1 LAD module per degree)
n1 x PME-412 or PME-216i
n2 x 2.5G-LME4
cards 14
Z33
Z33
8 O-E-O network 8 O-E-O network
TDM +2xPacket TDM +2xPacket
OTU-2 format OTU-2 format
Z77
OC-48, 1 GbE,
10 GbE Z33
Figure 129: Z77 Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO
Multiservice Lambda Transport OEO Application

Feature Set
• Used in Z33 and Z77 shelves
• 4-channel DWDM, 100 GHz spacing, front access — the XFP module determines which
wavelengths are accessed
• OEO configuration
• LAD-4/8: link budget 16 dB (reach ~64 km), LAD-8i: link budget 14 dB (reach ~64 km),
LAD-4/8A: link budget 24 dB (reach ~96 km), LAD-8E: link budget 32 dB (reach ~128 km),
LAD-8X: link budget 40 dB (reach ~160 km)
• All packet capabilities are the same as packet transport with the PME-412 or PME-216i
• Support of both SONET (OC-48) and SDH (STM-16) client interfaces
• OTU1 client interface
• OTU2 trunk interface
• ODU1 add/drop functionality
• Support of the RCM or XC-2800 in the Z77 shelf in conjunction with 2.5G-LME4 module for
ODU1 add/drop
• Clear-channel transport of all SONET/SDH overhead
• 100 Mbps DCN
• OC-192/STM-4, OC-48/STM-16, 10 GE, and 1 GE alien wave capability
Application 5: MSE-1482 Transparent Line

Functionality
In this application, the Z33 shelf or the Z77 shelf contains a pair of MSE-1482 line cards. Transparent
Line service provides transparent SONET/SDH transport for OC-3/STM-1, OC-12/STM-4,
OC-48/STM-16, and GbE client interfaces (downlinks) while preserving section and line overhead. This
feature allows service providers to aggregate multiple services by efficiently mapping and conserving
wavelength capacity.
The MSE-1482 line card provides line transparency for Line overhead including protection bytes and
Data Communications Channel (DCC). In Transparent Line SONET-over-SONET transport mode, STS
cross-connections are not allowed within the port signal.
The next two diagrams show examples of Transparent Line capabilities, functionality, and
route diversity of the MSE-1482 line card.
SONET/SDH
Ethernet
Equipment
Each MSE-1482 line card supports
the following interfaces: OC-48/STM-16
• 1 x OC-192 OC-12/STM-4
• 4 x OC-48 OC-3/STM-1
GbE
• 8 x OC-3/OC-12 (software selectable)
MSE-1482
MSE-1482
• 2 x GbE OC-192/STM-64
over OTU-2
Z-Series
Shelf
MSE-1482 MSE-1482
Z-Series
SONET/SDH
Z-Series
SONET/SDH
Shelf
Shelf
Ethernet Ethernet
Equipment Equipment
MSE-1482 MSE-1482
OC-48/STM-16 Z-Series OC-48/STM-16

OC-12/STM-4 Shelf OC-12/STM-4
GbE GbE
MSE-1482
MSE-1482
OC-48/STM-16
OC-12/STM-4
OC-3/STM-1
GbE SONET/SDH
Ethernet
Equipment
Figure 130: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Application
Protection provided by ADM

matching line interfaces:
OC-3/STM-1 -- OC-3/STM-1
OC-12/STM-4 -- OC-12/STM-4
OC-48/STM-16 -- OC-48/STM-16
Ring or Other Route Diverse Configuration

Z-Series Z-Series
Shelf Shelf
OTU-2
MSE-1482 Z-Series MSE-1482
ADM
Network
MSE-1482 MSE-1482
Tunneled DCC
Figure 131: MSE-1482 Transparent Line Functionality - Route Diversity
Application 6: MSE-1482 Path Cross-Connect

Functionality
The Z-Series MSE-1482 line card provides cross-connect capability at the STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, and
STS-48c levels. The system provides Path level connectivity so that subtending equipment with Path
level protection such as UPSR or SNCP can operate over the MSE-1482 line card. In this configuration,
the MSE-1482 line card does not transport the line overhead such as the Data Communication
Channel (DCC). The line card supports a 100 Mbps Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) that provides
the DCN connectivity to subtending SONET/SDH network elements.
The MSE-1482 line card supports UPSR/SNCP Path protection and unidirectional 1+1 Line
protection. The following diagrams show protection, the Path level application, and capabilities
of the MSE-1482 line card. In Path cross-connect mode, the interface is transported as a
cross-connect at the STS-1 level signal or STS-Nc as provisioned.
OC-3/12/48
Path Protection
OC-3/12/48
UPSR/SNC P UPSR/SNCP
OC-3/12/48
OC-3/12/48
UPSR/SNCP
Figure 132: MSE-1482 Path Cross-Connect Application
OC-3/12/48 OC-3/12/48
Ring or Other Path Diverse Configuration
MSE-1482 MSE-1482
ADM Z-Series ADM
OC-192/OTU2 OC-192/OTU2
Network
MSE-1482 MSE-1482
Z-Series Shelf Z-Series Shelf
100 Mbps DCN over OSC 100 Mbps DCN over OSC
Figure 133: MSE-1482 Path Level Capability
Application 7: Ethernet over SONET (EoS)

The Z-Series MSE-1482 line card provides two GbE interfaces. Pluggable 1000Base-F SFP transceivers
provide the GbE interfaces. Each GbE interface is mapped into SONET using Ethernet over SONET
(EoS).
Each GbE interface is mapped into a single Virtual Concatenation Group (VCG) using GFP mapping.
Each VCG consists of virtually concatenated STS-1 or STS-3c containers. Each MSE-1482 line card
supports two VCGs.
The Gigabit Ethernet capability of the MSE-1482 line card includes:
• GbE EoS mapped, GFP
• STS Virtual Concatenation (VCAT): STS-1-21v, STS-3c-7v
• Interfaces supported: OC-3, OC-12, OC-48
• Support for STS-1 25 microsecond applications
• MEF EPL service
The following figure shows an example of the MSE-1482 EoS capabilities. In this EoS application
example, the Z33 shelf or the Z77 shelf contains a pair of MSE-1482 line cards.
Backplane Z-Series Shelf Z-Series Shelf Z-Series Shelf

Inter-connect
MSE-1482 MSE-1482 MSE-1482 MSE-1482 MSE-1482 MSE-1482
OTU2 STS-1/Nc STS-1/Nc STS-1/Nc STS-1/Nc STS-1/Nc STS-1/Nc OTU2

For Ring Closure or
Cross- Cross- OTU2 Cross- Cross- OTU2 Cross- Cross-
Connect For Ring Closure or
Connect Connect Connect Connect Connect
Additional GbE Drops Additional GbE Drops
VCGs VCGs VCGs
EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS EOS
EOS Mapping into a VCG Two GbE (VCGs)

Up to 21xSTS-1 / 7xSTS-3c per MSE-1482 Line Card GbE GbE GbE GbE
GbE GbE GbE GbE GbE GbE GbE GbE
Figure 134: MSE-1482 Ethernet over SONET Application
Application 8: WSS Network Configuration

The following table describes some key requirements and features of WSS modules.
WSS-402 or WSS-F2 Modules WSS-404 or WSS-F4 Modules WSS-F8 Modules
Channels WSS-402: 40 ITU channels WSS-404: 40 ITU channels 96 ITU channels spaced at
spaced at 100 GHz in the spaced at 100 GHz in the 50 GHz in the C-band1
C-band C-band
WSS-F2: 96 ITU channels WSS-F4: 96 ITU channels
spaced at 50 GHz in the spaced at 50 GHz in the
C-band1 C-band1
Number of Two modules are required to Four modules are required to Eight modules are required
Modules support a two-degree support a four-degree ROADM to support an eight-degree
ROADM node (one per node (one per direction) ROADM node (one per
direction) direction)
Array Wave WSS-402 module(s) and WSS-404 module(s) and WSS-F8 module(s) and either
Guide (AWG) AWG-40 units, or WSS-F2 and AWG-40 units, or WSS-F4 and AWG-40 or AWG-96 units can
either AWG-40 or AWG-96 either AWG-40 or AWG-96 be installed in one to eight
units, can be installed in one units, can be installed in one separate Z-Series shelves in
to two separate Z-Series to four separate Z-Series an eight-degree ROADM
shelves in a two-degree shelves in a four-degree configuration.
ROADM configuration. ROADM configuration.
Individual wavelengths are added and dropped using the passive AWG 2 RU units. The AWG
provides the ability to multiplex and de-multiplex any of the 40 or 96 channels supported by
the WSS module. The AWG unit connects to the WSS COM port through a fiber jumper. The
individual channels on the AWG then connect to the appropriate Z-Series line card DWDM
XFP transceiver using a fiber jumper.
Note 1: You can configure the module optionally for 40-channel support.
The next diagram shows an example WSS regeneration configuration. Terminated channels
can use Z-Series service modules.
Same Migration
Path as Node B
A
WSS-402 Modules WSS-402 Modules
C
AWG-40
B
AWG-40
WSS-402 Modules
AWG-40
WEST EAST WEST EAST
Express Express
Prea mp Prea mp
RX RX
VOA Booster VOA Booster
WSS -402 Optica l RX Path TX TX
VOA
WSS -402 Optica l RX Path
1x2 WSS w/O CM 1x2 WSS w/O CM VOA
WSS -402 O ptical TX Path WSS-402 O ptical TX Path
WEST EAST
RX AWG TX AWG RX AWG TX AWG
Express
Pream p
DTM RX
Booster DTM
VOA
WSS-402 Optica l RX Path TX
1x2 WSS w/O CM VOA
WSS-402 O ptica l TX Path
RX AWG TX AWG
DTM
Figure 135: WSS-402 Network Configuration / Regeneration
Note: WSS-F2 and WSS-F4 modules can operate in an existing 40-channel (100
GHz spacing) configuration within the same network and same node as the
WSS-402 or WSS-404. When configured for 40-channel support, WSS-F2 and
WSS-F4 modules are compatible with the AWG-40, L-AMP, 40-channel DCMs, and
existing fixed and tunable XFP, SFP+, and SFP transceivers. For information on
changing the module grid mode setting from 96- to 40-channel support, refer to
"WSS Modules" in the Planet Operate: Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources
user guide.
Application 9: Ethernet Services and Transport

The Z22 shelf is optimized for access aggregation and edge deployments. The system provides a
combination of Ethernet aggregation switching with connection-oriented Ethernet (COE) transport,
OTN encapsulation, and DWDM in a single shelf.
The Z22 shelf extends high-performance Ethernet services and carrier-grade packet transport
deeper into the access network. The temperature-hardened Z22 system provides scalable
aggregation of broadband access platforms, fiber to the tower (wireless backhaul) applications, as
well as business Ethernet and residential deployments. The Z22 system supports standards-based
COE and G.8032 to provide guaranteed throughput for MEF certified E-Line and E-LAN services with
Ethernet protection switching.
Nx10 GbE COE

Transport over DWDM
Z77
10 G
b E of
Nx G
b E
xDSL or
PON
Access Node
Z22 Nodes Residential Broadband
Figure 136: Z22 - Aggregation, Transport, and Edge Access
Application 10: Collector Rings Using Z-Series

Shelves with PME and LAD Modules
The following figure shows an example of a temperature-hardened operation deploying I-Temp Z22
and Z33 nodes in aggregation collector rings and handing off the traffic to a Z77 termination node.
Each of the Z22 and Z33 node configurations, deployed in the remote locations, consist of I-Temp
PME-216i line cards and in-chassis I-Temp LAD-2P modules. The Z77 hand-off node configuration
consists of PME-216i and/or PME-412 line cards and an external LAD-2P DWDM LGX and/or LAD-2G
DWDM LGX add/drop module.
Cell tower services are backhauled from each tower site using a dedicated Z22 shelf deployed in
collector rings configured with G.8031 linear protection switching. Traffic routes to a Z33 shelf
configured as an aggregation ring node. Traffic then flows to the Z77 termination hand-off node.
Each Z33 aggregation ring node to the Z77 hand-off node supports a protected TESI.
Z77 Hand-off Node
Z33 Aggregation Ring Node
TESI
LAG
Z33 Aggregation Ring Node
Z22 Collector Ring Nodes
Figure 137: Z22, Z33, and Z77 Collector Rings
The next graphic shows the shelf components of the Z22 acting as a collector ring node.
Fan Module
PME-216i Modules
CEMi LAD-2 P Module
Figure 138: Z22 Collector Ring Node Configuration
Application 11: FLX-216i Configurations

This figure shows an example of using the FLX-216i line card to provide OTN-level multiplexing into
one or two OTU2 signals in a point-to-point configuration. LAD or WSS transport line cards provide
the optical layer. For a description of the supported signal types, refer to FLX-216i Multi-Rate OTN
Muxponder Module starting on page 191 and the following diagrams.
FLX-216i Point-to-Point Configuration
Z-Series Z-Series
GbE Shelf 1 or 2 OTU2 Signals Shelf GbE
(OTU2) 10G
OC-3/12, STM-1/4 OC-3/12, STM-1/4
OC-48, STM-16 Optical layer provided by LAD or WSS line cards,
A-to-Z circuit provisioning OC-48, STM-16
FC-100/200/400 FC-100/200/400
The next figure shows an example of a single FLX-216i line card installed in each Z-Series shelf
in a ring configuration providing aggregation and transport of supported signal types over the
same wavelength. LAD or WSS transport line cards provide the optical layer.
FLX-216i Ring Topolog y, Single-Card Configuration
Z-Series
Shelf
Z-Series Z-Series
GbE Shelf Shelf GbE
OTU2
OC-3/12, STM-1/4 OC-3/12, STM-1/4
(10G)
OC-48, STM-16 OC-48, STM-16
FC-100/200/400 FC-100/200/400
ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex

Aggregation
Z-Series
Shelf
Optical layer provided by LAD or WSS line cards

A-to-Z circuit provisioning
ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex

Add/Drop or Express
The following figure shows an example of two FLX-216i line cards installed in each Z-Series
shelf in a ring topology, providing aggregation and transport of supported signal types over the
same wavelength. The shelf backplane provides the interconnection of the FLX-216i line cards
in each shelf. LAD or WSS transport line cards provide the optical layer.
FLX-216i Ring Topolog y, Dual-Card Configuration
Z-Series
Shelf
GbE GbE
Z-Series 2 x OTU2 Z-Series
OC-3/12, STM-1/4 OC-3/12, STM-1/4
Shelf (20G) Shelf
OC-48, STM-16 OC-48, STM-16
FC-100/200/400 FC-100/200/400
ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex

Aggregation
Z-Series
Shelf
Optical layer provided by LAD or WSS line cards

A-to-Z circuit provisioning
ODU0, ODU1, ODUflex
Add/Drop or Express
Application 12: LME-10G10 Configurations

For a description of the LME-10G10 line card features and supported services, see LME-10G10
DWDM Muxponder Module starting on page 114 and the following diagrams.
Multiplexing ODU2-Circuits: 100G Direct Point-to-Point and ODU2 Express

Configurations
The next figure shows an example of using the LME-10G10 line card to provide OTN-level
multiplexing of ODU2-circuit client services into an OTU4 signal in a point-to-point
configuration. Use the Planet Operate A-to-Z provisioning tool to create an optical trail
between the LME-10G10 100G port in each shelf and create up to 10 client services.
LME-10G10 100G Direct Configuration
Z-Series Z-Series
10G Ethernet Shelf Shelf 10G Ethernet
OTU4 Signal
ODU2 ODU2
OC-192, STM-64 Optical layer, ODU4 auto-discovered (A-to-Z provisioning)
OC-192, STM-64
Up to 10 ODU2 circuit client trails (A-to-Z provisioning)
FC-800/1200 FC-800/1200
The following figure shows an example of using the LME-10G10 line card to provide OTN-level
multiplexing of ODU2-circuit client services across OTU4 signals through a Z-Series transit node
with ODU2 express cross-connections. (LME-10G10 modules in the transit node must be in
adjacent odd/even card pair slots.) Use the Planet Operate A-to-Z provisioning tool to create
optical trails from the LME-10G10 100G (trunk) port on each endpoint to the transit node, and
then create up to 10 client services spanning the transit node.
LME-10G10 100G ODU2 Express Configuration
1 Create optical layers (2) from each client endpoint to transit node (A-to-Z circuit provisioning).
Two sets of ODU4 trails auto-discovered.
Z-Series Z-Series Z-Series

OTU4 Signal Shelf OTU4 Signal
ODU2 ODU2
OC-192, STM-64 OC-192, STM-64
FC-800/1200 FC-800/1200
Add/Drop
Client Ports
2 Up to 10 ODU2-circuit client trails

(A-to-Z provisioning)
East-West ODU2 Express Connections

The next figure shows an example of LME-10G10 line cards installed in Z-Series nodes in a ring
configuration with DTM-100G lines cards providing transport. In Planet Operate, use the
Cross-Connections EMS panels to create fiber patches between the LME and DTM CFP ports. (Note
that the signal type on both ends of the fiber patch must be manually set to ODU4 from the default
100G Ethernet.) Use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to configure optical trails between East and West
DTM OTM ports to connect shelves. (ODU4 trails are auto-discovered between East-West DTM line
cards.)
Finally, use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to configure ODU2 trails between the supported line cards
(2.5G-LME4, DTM-8, FLX-216i, MSE-1482, PME, and PSW).
Note: For SFT-10G16 line cards, configure the port signal type and create the cross-connection using
the Transport Resources and Cross-Connects EMS panels.
LME-10G10 East-West ODU2 Express Configuration

1 In each shelf, fiber patches (2) connect
LME and DTM CFP ports
(Cross-Connections
EMS panel provisioning)
Z-Series
Shelf
al
n
E
sig
4
W
TU
O
OTU4 signal
E W
2 Optical trails from DTM OTM East
and West ports between nodes;
OTU4 signals area auto-discovered
(A-to-Z circuit provisioning)
W E
OT
U4
sign al
al sign *Supported ODU2 cards:
U4
OT
PME, PSW, LME4, DTM-8,
E W MSE, FLX, SFT-10G16
3 ODU2-circuit trail (A-to-Z provisioning)
Note: If LAD or WSS line cards are used between East-West DTM-100G connections in place of direct
DTM-100G connections in the above configuration, the OTU4 layer is auto-discovered during A-to-Z
provisioning.
Multiplexing Using DTM-100G for DWDM and LAD/WSS for Transport

The following figure shows an example of LME-10G10 line cards providing multiplexing of supported
client rates. DTM-100G line cards provide the DWDM capability and LAD or WSS transport line cards
provide the optical layer. In Planet Operate, use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to configure an optical
trail between LAD or WSS line cards and then configure ODU2 trails between LME-10G10 client ports.
Routing through the DTM-100G line cards is auto-discovered during provisioning.
Z-Series Z-Series
ODU2 ODU2
Optical trail between LAD /WSS
OC-192, STM-64 1 (A-to-Z circuit provisioning)
FC-800/1200 FC-800/1200
OTU4 signal, auto-discovered between LME-100G ports
2 Up to 10 ODU2-circuit client trails (A-to-Z provisioning)
Long-Range DWDM Using DTM-100G for Transport

The next figure shows an example of LME-10G10 line cards providing long-range multiplexing and
transport of supported client rates. DTM-100G line cards provide the DWDM capability. In Planet
Operate, use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to configure an optical trail between DTM-100G OTM ports,
create an optical trail between the LME-10G10 100G port and DTM-100G OTU4 fiber port on each
shelf, and configure ODU2 trails between LME-10G10 client ports.
LME-10G10 DWDM Configuration #2 (Long Range)
2 Optical trails, LME-100G to DM T OTU4 fiber ports (A-to-Z provisioning)
Z-Series Z-Series
10G Ethernet 10G Ethernet
Shelf Shelf
ODU2 ODU2
OC-192, STM-64 1 Optical trail between DTM OTM ports
OC-192, STM-64
FC-800/1200 FC-800/1200
3 Up to 10 ODU2-circuit client trails (A-to-Z provisioning)
Muxponding Up to 10 Waves Using DTM-100G and LAD/WSS for Transport

The following figure shows an example of LME-10G10 line cards installed to provide muxponding of
up to 10 wavelengths into a single wavelength. In Planet Operate, use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to
configure an optical trail between LAD or WSS line cards on both sides of the client nodes to the
transit nodes and create an optical trail between CFP ports on the DTM-100G line cards.
LME-10G10 Muxponding Configuration
OTU4 signal, auto-discovered after creating DTM optical trail

Z-Series Z-Series
Shelf Shelf
2 Optical trail between DTM-100G cards

1 Optical trail between LAD or WSS cards

Z-Series Z-Series *Supported ODU2 cards
Shelf Shelf • 2.5G-LME4
• DTM-8
• FLX-216i
• MSE-1482
• PME
• PSW
• SFT-10G16
3 ODU2-circuit trail (A-to-Z provisioning)
Multi-Node Group ODU2 Routing

The next figure shows an example of LME-10G10 line cards installed in Z-Series nodes in a
multi-node group (MNG) configuration with DTM-100G lines cards providing transport between
shelves and WSS line cards providing transport between MNGs. In Planet Operate, within the same
MNG, an ODU2 client trail can be provisioned without requiring a fiber connection between the
ODU2 line card and the LME-10G10 module. Use the A-to-Z provisioning tool to configure optical
trails between East and West DTM OTM ports to connect shelves. (ODU4 trails are auto-discovered
between East-West DTM line cards.)
LME-10G10 Multi-Node Group (MNG) Routing
Z-Series
l
na
Shelf MNG2
sig
4
TU
E
O
W
1 WSS, OTS Connection
between MNG1 and MNG2
OTU4 signal (A-to-Z provisioning)
W
E 2 ODU4Trail from LME-10G10 Eas

MNG1 port in MNG2 to LME-10G10 West
port in MNG1 (A-to-Z provisioning
W E
*Supported ODU2 cards:
3 10G Ethernet Client Layer (A-to-Z provisioning) 2.5G-LME4, DTM-8, FLX, MSE,
PME, PSW, SFT-10G16
System Power
This section provides system power information for Z-Series equipment.
Note: Use Planet Design as a guideline based on the total configured system current
draw. You must size fuses according to NEC standards or local site practice.
In This Chapter
Z22 Power .................................................................................................297
Z33 Power .................................................................................................298
Z77 Power .................................................................................................300
Fuses..........................................................................................................301
Z77 Fuse Positions and DC Feeds ..........................................................302
Z22 Power
The following table shows the typical and maximum power consumption for the Z22 system.
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
Shelf with Fans 15W 50W
CEMi 8W 10W
2.5G-LME4 55W 65W
DTM-8 75W 96W
DTM-100G 140W 165W
DTM-100G2 90W 100W
FLX-216i 100W 127W
LME-10G10 165W 200W
MSE-1482 90W 100W
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
OLA-010 65W 80W
OLA-200 35W 50W
OLA-201 60W 75W
PME-216i (+24V) 67W 97W
PME-216i (-48V) 67W 97W
PME-412 88W 126W
PSW-618 150W 180W
PSW-10G10 150W 180W
PSW-10G20 159W 168W
PSW-100G 150W 180W
PSW-100G2W 245W 265W
SFT-8 45W 50W
SFT-10G16 75W 80W
WSS-402 50W 65W
WSS-404 60W 65W
WSS-F2 60W 75W
WSS-F4 60W 75W
WSS-F8 60W 75W
Note: The CEMi module powers the LAD-2P and LAD-2G in-chassis modules with
negligible power consumption.
Z33 Power
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
Shelf with Fans 30W 155W
CEMi 8W 10W
2.5G-LME4 55W 65W
DTM-8 75W 96W
DTM-8G 85W 95W
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
DTM-100G 140W 165W
DTM-100G2 90W 100W
FLX-216i 100W 127W
LAC-8 10W 12W
LAD-4/8/8i/40/96 10W 12W
LAD-4/8A 15W 21W
LAD-8E/8X 30W 35W
LAD-40E/96E 28W 30W
LME-10G10 165W 200W
MSE-1482 90W 100W
OLA-010 65W 80W
OLA-200 35W 50W
OLA-201 60W 75W
PME-412 88W 126W
PME-216i 67W 97W
PSW-618 150W 180W
PSW-10G10 150W 180W
PSW-10G20 159W 168W
PSW-100G 150W 180W
PSW-100G2W 245W 265W
SFT-8 45W 50W
SFT-10G16 75W 80W
WSS-402 50W 65W
WSS-404 60W 65W
WSS-F2 60W 75W
WSS-F4 60W 75W
WSS-F8 60W 75W
Depending on your configuration, the Z33 shelf may require special equipment room cooling. Refer
to Planet Design for heat dissipation data or contact TAC for additional information.
Z77 Power
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
Shelf with BTM and Fans 120W 450W
BOSS/BOSS2 37W 45W
2.5G-LME4 55W 65W
DTM-8G 85W 95W
DTM-8 75W 96W
DTM-100G 165W 165W
DTM-100G2 90W 100W

FLX-216i 100W 127W
LAC-8 10W 12W
LAD-4/8/8i/40/96 10W 12W
LAD-4A/8A 15W 21W
LAD-8E/8X 30W 35W
LAD-40E/96E 28W 30W
LME-10G10 165W 200W
MSE-1482 90W 100W
OLA-010 65W 80W
OLA-200 35W 50W
OLA-201 60W 75W
PME-412 88W 126W
PME-216i 67W 97W
PSW-618 150W 180W
PSW-10G10 150W 180W
PSW-10G20 159W 168W
PSW-100G 150W 180W
PSW-100G2W 245W 265W
TSW-10G10 140W 175W
SFT-8 45W 50W
SFT-10G16 75W 80W
WSS-402 50W 65W
WSS-404 60W 65W
Typical Maximum
Equipment
Power Power
WSS-F2 60W 75W
WSS-F4 60W 75W
WSS-F8 60W 75W
Fuses
Use Planet Design as a guideline based on the total configured system current draw. You must size
fuses according to NEC standards or local site practice.
The following table shows the fuse quantity for each Z-Series shelf.
Shelf Quantity
Z22 (+24V model) 2
Z22 (-48V model) 2
Z33 2
Z77 8
Z77 Fuse Positions and DC Feeds

Z77 (shelf v2) Fuse Positions
This figure shows the eight DC feeds that are distributed across the sixteen Z77 (shelf v2) line
card slots and the two fan modules in a redundant fashion.
Figure 139: Fuse Assignment for Two Fan Modules
This table shows the DC feeds and their associated Z77 (shelf v2) line card slots.
DC Feeds A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Slots 1–4 5–8 9 – 12 13 – 16 1, 5, 9, 13 2, 6, 10, 14 3, 7, 11, 15 4, 8, 12, 16
The next table shows the DC feeds and their associated redundant fan modules.
Fan Module #1 Fan Module #2
DC Feed B4 B4
DC Feed B3 B3
DC Feed A2 A2
DC Feed A3 A3
This table shows the DC feeds and their associated Z77 (shelf v2) Electrical Fabric Module (EFM)
slots.
EFM 1 EFM 2 EFM 3 EFM 4
DC Feeds A1, B1 A1, B2 A4, B4 A4, B2
Z77 Shelf Fuse Positions

The following figure shows the eight DC feeds distributed across the sixteen Z77 shelf line card
slots and the three fan modules in a redundant fashion.
Figure 140: Fuse Assignment for Three Fan Modules
The following table shows the DC feeds and their associated Z77 line card slots.
DC Feeds A1 A2 A3 A4 B1 B2 B3 B4
Slots 1–4 5–8 9 – 12 13 – 16 1, 5, 9, 13 2, 6, 10, 14 3, 7, 11, 15 4, 8, 12, 16
The next table shows the DC feeds and their associated redundant fan modules.
Fan Module #1 Fan Module #2 Fan Module #3
DC Feed A3 A3 A2
DC Feed B4 B3 B3
This table shows the DC feeds and their associated Z77 Electrical Fabric Module (EFM) slots.
EFM 1 EFM 2 EFM 3 EFM 4
DC Feeds A1, B1 A1, B2 A4, B4 A4, B2
Management Network Configuration
Guidelines
This section describes the Z-Series Data Communications Network (DCN) architecture. It provides
use cases for deploying Z-Series nodes with the Planet Operate in an IP DCN network. The use cases
provide recommendations for configuring external routers. For additional information, see the
Z-Series Data Communications Network Planning and Configuration Reference Guide located online in the
Ciena technical documentation library.
In This Chapter
Management Overview ...........................................................................305
Single Physical LAN ..................................................................................307
Multiple Physical LANs ............................................................................310
Multiple Physical LANs and the Same IP Sub-Network ......................317
Network and Host Routes ......................................................................323
Management Overview
The Z-Series DCN architecture is based on the ITU-T G.7712 standard supporting IP-based
communication with OSPF routing. All Z-Series nodes require a unique IP address.
Note: Each Z-Series node in the network must have a unique IP address
provisioned. When commissioning Z-Series equipment the following IP
addresses are not supported:
• 192.168.0.1 – 192.168.0.255 Subnet 255.255.255.0
• 192.168.1.0 – 192.168.1.255 Subnet 255.255.255.0
• 192.168.2.0 – 192.168.2.255 Subnet 255.255.255.0
• 192.168.3.0 – 192.168.3.255 Subnet 255.255.255.0
• 172.16.0.1 – 172.16.0.255 Subnet 255.255.255.0
• 169.254.0.1 – 169.254.254.254 Subnet 255.255.255.0
Place Z-Series and L-AMP nodes in various configurations based on how they are physically
connected and logically divided into IP sub-networks. Physical connectivity falls into one of the
following scenarios:
• All Z-Series nodes connected directly using the same physical LAN segment.
• Z-Series nodes separated into different physical LAN segments.
Note: For instructions on provisioning OSPF routing and proxy ARP using Planet
Operate, see the Planet Operate Nodes, Modules, and Transport Resources user
guide.
This section also describes recommended configuration options based on the physical connection of
the Z-Series nodes.
Based on the physical connectivity of Z-Series nodes and the Planet Operate server, Z-Series
networks can be divided into two classes:
• Single Physical LAN starting on page 307
• Multiple Physical LANs starting on page 310
Based on the physical location of the Planet Operate server in relationship to the Z-Series
gateway node, configurations are divided into two classes:
• Collocated Planet Operate server
A Planet Operate server is referred to as "collocated" if the Planet Operate server and one of
the Z-Series gateway nodes share the same physical LAN and there is no third-party device
between the Planet Operate server and the Z-Series gateway node.
• Non-collocated Planet Operate server
A Planet Operate server is referred to as "non-collocated" if the Planet Operate server and
the Z-Series gateway node do not share the same physical LAN and there is a third-party
device (for example, a router) between the Planet Operate server and the Z-Series gateway
node.
Single Physical LAN

In this network configuration example, all of the Z-Series nodes share the same physical LAN as
shown in the following diagram.
Figure 141: Single Physical LAN Example
In this type of network configuration, Ciena recommends that all Z-Series nodes have their IP
addresses assigned from the same IP sub-network.
Shown here are Network configuration examples with a single physical LAN for a collocated Planet
Operate server and a non-collocated Planet Operate server.
Collocated Planet Operate Server

In this network configuration example, the Planet Operate server shares the same LAN as the
Z-Series nodes.
Figure 142: Collocated Planet Operate Server Example
In this network configuration, the IP sub-network assigned to the Z-Series nodes must be the same
sub-network as the Planet Operate server. You do not need to configure any additional parameters
for the Planet Operate server to communicate with the Z-Series nodes.
Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server

In this network configuration example, one or more routers separate the Planet Operate
server and Z-Series nodes.
Figure 143: Non-Collated Planet Operate Server Example
For this type of network configuration, Ciena recommends that the Planet Operate server have
a default/specific route to the Z-Series nodes with the router designated as the gateway as
follows:
• 10.0.1.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.20.30.1
— or —
• 0.0.0.0 / 0.0.0.0 / gw 10.20.30.1 (default route)
Multiple Physical LANs

In this network configuration example, all of the Z-Series nodes are separated from a LAN
perspective and there is more than one physical LAN.
Figure 144: Multiple Physical LANs Example
In this type of network configuration, Ciena recommends that you give each LAN segment a unique
IP sub-network. Each Z-Series node obtains its IP address from a separate block of the IP
sub-network.
Provided next are Network configuration examples with multiple physical LANs for a collocated
Planet Operate server and a non-collocated Planet Operate server.

In this network configuration example, the Planet Operate server shares the same LAN as the
gateway Z-Series node. The example diagram shows OSPF enabled on the Planet Operate
server and the Z-Series gateway node (see option #1).
Figure 145: Collocated Planet Operate Server Sharing Same LAN as the Gateway Z-Series Node
Option 1 – Complete OSPF network:

• Configure the Planet Operate server to run OSPF on the LAN that connects it to the router.
• Enable OSPF on the Z-Series gateway node.
Option 2 – Complete Static routing:

• In this scenario, the Planet Operate server can reach the Z-Series gateway node without any
additional configuration. However, to reach the other Z-Series nodes, the router must be
configured with static routes as follows:
 10.0.2.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
 10.0.3.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
 10.0.4.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
• Disable OSPF on the Z-Series gateway node.
Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

The following diagram shows an example of a network configuration with two Z-Series gateway
nodes.
Figure 146: Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes
Static routes alone are not sufficient to provide redundancy. Configuring multiple Z-Series
gateway nodes, as shown in the previous diagram, provides redundancy and protection.
• Enable OSPF on both Z-Series gateway nodes (10.1.1.3 and 10.1.1.4 in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on the Planet Operate server.

In this network configuration example, one or more routers separate the Planet Operate
server and the gateway Z-Series node.
Figure 147: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server and Gateway Node Separated by One or More Routers

• Configure the Planet Operate server to run OSPF on the LAN that connects it to the router
(LAN A in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on the router on both of the LANs that it is sharing with the Z-Series gateway
node and Planet Operate server (LAN A and LAN B in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on the Z-Series gateway node (10.1.1.2 in the previous diagram).
Option 2 – Partial OSPF network:
• Configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the Z-Series nodes.
In the example configuration above, static routes in the Planet Operate server should be set
up as follows:
 10.1.2.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.3.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.4.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
— or —
 0.0.0.0 / 0.0.0.0 / gw 10.2.1.1 (default route)
• Enable OSPF on the router on the LAN that it is sharing with the Z-Series gateway node
(LAN B in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on the Z-Series gateway node (10.1.1.2 in the previous diagram).
Option 3 – Complete Static routing:
• Configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the Z-Series nodes. In the
previous example configuration, static routes in the Planet Operate server should be set up
as follows:
 10.1.2.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.3.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.4.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
— or —
 0.0.0.0 / 0.0.0.0 / gw 10.0.1.1 (default route)
• In this scenario, the router can reach the Z-Series gateway node without any additional
configuration. However, to reach the other Z-Series nodes, you must configure the router
with static routes. In the previous example configuration, static routes in the Planet Operate
server should be set up as follows:
 10.1.2.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
 10.1.3.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
 10.1.4.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.1.1.2
Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

The following diagram shows an example of a network configuration with two Z-Series gateway
nodes.
Figure 148: Non-Collocated Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

• Configure the Planet Operate server to run OSPF on the LAN that connects it to the router
(LAN A in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on the router on the LANs that it is sharing with the Planet Operate server and
the Z-Series gateway node (LAN A and LAN B in the previous diagram).
• Enable OSPF on both of the Z-Series gateway nodes (10.1.1.2 and 10.1.1.3 in the previous
diagram).

• Configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the Z-Series nodes. In the
previous example configuration, static routes in the Planet Operate server should be set up
as follows:
 10.1.2.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.3.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.4.0 / 255.255.255.0 / gw 10.2.1.1
— or —
 0.0.0.0 / 0.0.0.0 / gw 10.2.1.1 (default route)
• Enable OSPF on the router on the LAN that it is sharing with the Z-Series gateway node
(LAN B in the previous diagram).
diagram).
Multiple Physical LANs and the Same IP

Sub-Network
Sometimes it may not be possible to obtain multiple blocks of IP sub-networks for the Z-Series nodes
even if they do not share the same physical LAN segments. In such cases, it is possible to assign IP
addresses from the same logical IP sub-network to Z-Series nodes and have them communicate with
the Planet Operate server.
This section describes the various options available for configuring the DCN based on the location of
the Planet Operate server.

The following diagram shows a collocated Planet Operate server and Z-Series nodes.
Figure 149: Collocated Planet Operate Server and Z-Series Nodes
Consider the following options for the previous network configuration example shown.
• Proxy ARP (recommended option)
Enabling proxy ARP support on the gateway Z-Series node enables the Planet Operate server
to communicate with the other Z-Series nodes without any additional configuration in the
router or the Planet Operate server.
Important! — When enabling proxy ARP in a network, make sure to enable

only one gateway node with the proxy ARP option. In some cases, having
multiple Z-Series nodes enabled with proxy ARP can cause routers to detect
a form of ARP spoofing incorrectly.
• Static routes
You can configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the non-gateway
Z-Series nodes. In the previous network configuration example, the following routes would
enable the Planet Operate server to communicate with all Z-Series nodes:
 10.1.1.4 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.1.1.3
 10.1.1.5 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.1.1.3
 10.1.1.6 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.1.1.3
• OSPF routing
Enable OSPF on the Planet Operate server and the Z-Series gateway node for the Planet
Operate server to learn all of the routing information.
Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

Using static routes alone are not sufficient to provide redundancy. Configuring multiple
Z-Series gateway nodes, as shown in the following diagram, provides redundancy and
protection.
Figure 150: Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes
Recommended configuration:
example).
• Enable OSPF on the Planet Operate server.

The next diagram shows the Planet Operate server and Z-Series nodes separated by a router.
Figure 151: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server and Z-Series Nodes Separated by a Router
Consider the following options for the previous network configuration example shown:
• Proxy ARP (recommended option)
Enable proxy ARP support on the gateway Z-Series node to allow the Planet Operate server
to communicate with the other Z-Series nodes without any additional configuration to the
router or Planet Operate server.
• Static routes
You can configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the non-gateway
Z-Series nodes. In the previous network configuration example, the following routes would
enable the Planet Operate server to communicate with all Z-Series nodes:
 10.1.1.4 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.1.5 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.1.6 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
• Partial OSPF routing
Enable OSPF on the router and the gateway Z-Series node. This allows the router to learn
about the other Z-Series nodes.
Add static routes to the Planet Operate server to reach the Z-Series nodes. In the previous
network configuration example, the following routes will enable the Planet Operate server to
communicate with the other Z-Series nodes:
 10.1.1.4 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.1.5 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
 10.1.1.6 / 255.255.255.255 / gw 10.2.1.1
• OSPF routing
Enable OSPF on the Planet Operate server and the Z-Series gateway node for the Planet
Operate server to learn all of the routing information.
Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

The network configuration example in the following below shows a non-collocated Planet
Operate server with redundant Z-Series gateway nodes.
Figure 152: Non-Collocated Planet Operate Server with Redundant Z-Series Gateway Nodes

• Configure the Planet Operate server to run OSPF on the LAN that connects it to the router.
• Enable OSPF on the router on the LAN that it is sharing with the Z-Series gateway node.
• Enable OSPF on both of the Z-Series gateway nodes.
• Configure the Planet Operate server with static routes to reach the Z-Series nodes.
• Enable OSPF on the router on the LAN that it is sharing with the Z-Series gateway node.
• Enable OSPF on both of the Z-Series gateway nodes.
Network and Host Routes

The Z77 Broadband Operating System Supervisor (BOSS/BOSS2) shelf controller cards support
the following number of network routes and host routes:
• BOSS: 256 network routes, 1,000 host routes
• BOSS2: 512 network routes, 1,000 host routes
In a network with a large number of IP/OSPF routes, exceeding either or both of the network routes
and host routes supported by the BOSS card can cause other processes, such as service
provisioning, to delay in varying degrees in its execution.
Additionally, a Z77 node might lose its connectivity and report a COMM Fail alarm when participating
in a large network with several network routes and host routes that exceeds the limit supported by a
Z77 BOSS shelf controller card.
If you are using proxy ARP or static routing, there should be no affect unless you have 256 or more
Z-Series nodes in a single network.
Shelf management cards for non-Z77 Z-Series shelves – including the Z22, Z33 and L-AMP shelves –
provide up to 512 network and 1,000 host routes combined for each shelf. Exceeding the upper
routes limit in a non-Z77 shelf can cause other processes, such as service provisioning, to delay in
varying degrees in its execution.
For large networks with a significant number of IP/OSPF routes, limiting the number of routes
injected into the Z-Series network will avoid excessive network routes and host routes.
Appendix A: DWDM Network
Architecture Options and OSNR
Specifications
This section describes optical network architecture options, optical network design guidelines, optical
impairments, and additional optical specifications for Z-Series LAD and WSS modules.
Optical Network Design Guidelines

In the design of the optical network, the system adheres to the following general guidelines to
provide a reliable optical network:
• The optical signal condition at the receiver (for example, pluggable XFP, 100G coherent) must
have sufficient quality to allow recovery with a correctable rate of BER < 10 –15. The following
list shows the main optical impairments affecting the recovery of the signal at the optical
receiver:
 Received signal level (receiver sensitivity)
 Optical Signal to Noise (OSNR)
 Chromatic Dispersion (CD)
 Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)
 Non-linearity
• PMD is typically a concern at the 100G rate and is compensated using integrated Digital
Signal Processing (DSP) as is chromatic dispersion. The Z-Series uses lower optical TX levels
and avoids non-linearity affects.
The following table shows the general specifications for Z-Series 10G and 100G optical
modules:
Receiver CD
Module OSNR CD PMD Notes
Sensitivity Penalty
10G XFP 16 dB –23 dBm –200 to +1600 Up to 3 dB n/a FBG DCM compensates CD.
ps/nm Optimal correction is to +700
ps/nm and avoids the 3 dB
penalty.
100G 15 dB –23 dBm +/– 40,000 Up to 1 dB 50 ps On-board DSPs electronically

Coherent ps/nm compensate CD and PMD.
Depending on the received optical signal level and OSNR, noise or the receive signal level may
limit the receiver:
• Noise limited case: OSNR has reached its limit but the receive signal level is still above the
receiver sensitivity. Since noise from amplifiers is the main source of noise and the resulting
reduction is OSNR, they occur in large networks, such as ROADM networks, where there are a
large number of optical pass-throughs (O-O-O as opposed to regeneration in each node,
O-E-O) with a large number of amplifiers in the TX to RX path of the optical modules.
Additionally, OSNR is often the limiting factor in long spans that require multiple amplifiers.
• Power limited: The receiver sensitivity is reached due to the low level of receiver signal, but
OSNR is still above the threshold. Typically, power limiting is the limit for maximum reach of
non-amplified or lightly amplified spans.
The optical network elements between the optical TX and RX, such as ROADM (for O-O-O capability),
terminal multiplexers (O-E-O), and amplifiers provide valuable network functions such as optical
add-drop, signal amplification, and DWDM muxing. However, from an optical impairments point of
view, these NEs insure that the parameters between TX and RX are met, as shown in the preceding
table.
Optical Network Architecture Options

The Z-Series offers two optical network architectures depending on the specific application:
1. O-E-O: Traffic regenerates after each span. These are ideal for low-cost point links or with
add/drop traffic at each node. Single-slot LAD modules provide 2, 8, 40, and 96 waves with
different levels of amplification for different reaches.
2. O-O-O: ROADM technology optically passes through traffic. The Z-Series offers a family of 2, 4,
and 8degree, 40 and 96-channel ROADMs: the Z-Series WSS-402, WSS-404, WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and
WSS-F8 single-slot ROADM modules.
The following table shows the number of DWDM channels, maximum reach, span regen, and related
optical information for Z-Series LAD and WSS modules. Specifications are approximate; use Planet
Design to assist with designing your specific network configuration. For additional information, see
Optical Link Design starting on page 262, LAD Modules starting on page 80, WSS-402 and WSS-404
Wavelength Selective Switch Modules starting on page 195, and WSS-F2, WSS-F4, and WSS-F8
Wavelength Selective Switch Modules starting on page 205 in this user guide.
Number of
Number of Max. Spans
Equipment Integrated
Module Type DWDM Span Supported Notes
Category Amplifiers
Channels Reach1 Before
Regen
2
DWDM terminal
LAD-2P O-E-O plus 1 (one) None 16 dB 1 Power limited
mux/demux
1310 nm
2
DWDM terminal plus 1 (one)
LAD-2G O-E-O None 16 dB 1 Power limited
mux/demux 1550 nm
gray
DWDM terminal
LAD-8 O-E-O 8 None 16 dB 1 Power limited
mux/demux
8
DWDM terminal
LAD-8i O-E-O plus 1 (one) None 14 dB 1 Power limited
mux/demux
1310 nm
DWDM terminal
LAD-8A O-E-O 8 Booster 24 dB 1 Power limited
mux/demux
DWDM terminal Pre-amp + Noise (OSNR)
LAD-8E O-E-O 8 32 dB 1
mux/demux Booster limited
LAD-8X O-E-O 8 40 dB 1
DWDM terminal
mux/demux
LAD-40E O-E-O 40 28 dB 1
DWDM terminal
mux/demux
2-degree Pre-amp + Noise (OSNR)
WSS-402 O-O-O 40 28 dB
ROADM Booster limited
WSS-404 O-O-O 40 28 dB
2-degree Pre-amp + See Note 2 Noise (OSNR)
WSS-F2 O-O-O 96 28 dB
ROADM Booster below. limited
Note 1: DWDM reach based on Integrated EDFA only and can be extended with addition of a RAMAN
amplifier.
Note 2: The number of spans before regeneration depends on several factors, including the optical
model type (10G XFP or 100G Coherent), FEC type, span distances, and amplifier type and quality.
Optical links up to 2,000 km or longer can be supported with 100G coherent optics before
regeneration.
Appendix B: IGMP Snooping
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping enables support of IPTV services on DSLAMs
or other video delivery access devices with low capacity uplinks. With this feature, CyOS validates
that you can enable IGMP on an E-LAN or E-VLAN flow domain. Using Planet Operate, you can enable
or disable IGMP on a per flow domain basis.
A switch floods multicast traffic to all the ports in a VLAN flow domain by default, and can cause an
unnecessary load on host devices. Internet Group Management Protocol snooping is a Layer 2
method enabling a switch to listen in on IGMP query/join/leave conversations between hosts and
router ports. The switch learns the router/port associated to a multicast (MC) group, and forwards
traffic only to MC groups soliciting the traffic. This prevents hosts on a local network from receiving
traffic for a multicast group they have not joined. The IGMP snooping feature is useful for
bandwidth-intensive IP multicast applications such as IPTV.
The system provides the following options via Planet Operate:
• Enable or disable the IGMP router interface on a per UNI flow point basis.
• Ability to associate user-defined or system-created IGMP snooping profile on a flow domain.
• Ability to create and delete a user-defined IGMP snooping profile.
• Retrieve and view snooped or group addresses on a per flow domain basis.
• Ability to flush and refresh the group addresses table.
• Ability to view IGMP message statistics on a flow point under the Ethernet Statistics panels
when you have enabled the On-Demand Statistics setting.
Important! — You can enable IGMP snooping on one flow domain only on a Z-Series node.
Due to hardware resource limitations, you cannot enable IGMP snooping and hierarchical
policing at the same time. Also note that you must perform a hardware reboot of the line card to
switch between IGMP snooping and hierarchical policing. Typically, hierarchical policing is
enabled by default on the interface. If hierarchical policing is enabled, you must perform a
hardware reboot to enable IGMP snooping.
If hierarchical policing is not enabled on the first attempt to enable IGMP snooping, the system
raises an alarm and sets a flag so that the next hardware reboot swaps the hardware resources
from hierarchical policing to IGMP snooping. After the hardware reboot, the same conditions
apply in reverse if hierarchical policing is enabled.
If hierarchical policing is enabled, the system denies the operation to enable IGMP snooping and
displays a message that that features are not compatible. You must clear the hierarchical policing
setting prior to enabling IGMP snooping and performing the hardware reboot.
Performing a hardware reboot without enabling IGMP snooping (or vice versa) does not change
the hardware setup. The next hardware reboot sets up the hardware for whichever feature was
las attempted to be enabled. The attempt to enable sets the flag for the next hardware reboot.
Therefore, if you have Release 10.0 with hierarchical policing set as the default and you enable
IGMP snooping, the system raises an alarm and sets the flag. If you then disable IGMP snooping,
the system removes the alarm, but leaves the setting for IGMP snooping enabled. At the next
hardware reboot, the system will change the hardware to support IGMP snooping.
For additional information on IGMP snooping and provisioning IGMP snooping system profiles, see
the Packet Switching User Guide.
The following graphic illustrates an example broadband network design using Z-Series nodes that
support IGMP snooping.
IPTV headend
Video servers
Distrobution Router
Data traffic
over EVPLs
10G rate 1G rate

10G DSLAM 1G DSLAM
Figure 153: Broadband Network Design Example with IGMP Snooping
Appendix C: Multi-Chassis LAG and
Dual-Node Resiliency
This feature provides the ability to support dual nodes with node redundancy in hub locations with
connectivity to Broadband Node Gateways (BNGs) using Multi-Chassis (MC-LAG) protocol. The
primary objective is to add network resiliency in large hub locations where significant amounts of
traffic are hubbed, by protecting against chassis failures. The MC-LAG configuration is active/standby
where active or standby state is communicated over LACP protocol from the BNGs to the Z-Series
nodes. This feature is supported by the PSW family of cards.
In a typical configuration, the Z-Series network topology is ring or multiple rings (physically, but
logically can be different such as star or linear), that collect traffic from several distribution nodes on
the ring and aggregate and transport to the dual hub nodes. On the Z-Series network (physical rings),
the system supports ITU G.8031 and G.8032 protection.
To allow chassis redundancy with G.8031 protection, the Z-Series supports multi-chassis dual-homed
linear protection. This allows for traffic from a single distribution node to terminate on two chassis in
the hub location. This functionality together with the multi-chassis LAG feature on Z-Series nodes
facing the Broadband Network Gateways, provide for dual-node resiliency to customer networks.
Dual-homed linear protection can be viewed as point-to-point protected TESI from one endpoint to
two other endpoints that resides in two different nodes. In this type of configuration, a protected
TESI will have two different DMAC addresses. The system uses G.8031 signaling between the
protected upstream node and the far-end node and communicates via an internal packet service
across a TESI channel between the working upstream and the protected upstream hub nodes. The
system creates this packet service automatically when the interlink TESI is assigned between the
multi-node protection groups.
G.8032 protection is naturally a multipoint-to-multipoint protocol. Hence, terminating the traffic from
one destination to two terminating hub nodes required to support chassis redundancy is inherently
supported by the protection protocol.
In Release 10.0/17.08 and higher, Planet Operate supports PSW dual-homed linear G.8031 protection
(for Z-Series nodes connected in a linear optical ring) and multi-chassis LAGs in the broadband
network gateway (BCN) network between Z-Series nodes and BNG routers, to provide dual-node
resiliency to customer networks.
The following graphic illustrates the concept. The multi-chassis LAG feature also requires
configuration of standard UNI LAGs between BNG router A and Z-Series node 1, and between BNG
router B to Z-Series node 2. The BNG LAGs are set up as "master" and control LAG active/standby
switching between networks.
Figure 154: Dual-Homed Linear Protection and Multi-Chassis LAG
For details on provisioning multi-chassis LAG and dual-node resiliency, see the Packet Switching User
Guide.
Appendix D: Z-Series Fan Module
Alarm, Fan, Filter, and ACO LED
Detail
Fan module alarm, fan, and filter LEDs indicate status as described in the following tables.
Fan Module Alarm LED LED Status LED Status Description

Critical CRITICAL Solid RED
Major MAJOR Solid RED
Minor MINOR Solid AMBER
Fan Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
Fan normal operation Solid GREEN

Fan failure, or communication
Solid RED
to the fan module is down
Fan in maintenance mode
FAN
Note: The service button (Z77
and Z33 only) was used to Flashing AMBER
initiate temporary fan shutdown
to allow filter replacement.
Filter Status LED LED Status LED Status Description

Filter is okay OFF
FILTER
Filter service required Solid AMBER
The Z33 and Z77 fan module Alarm Cut-off (ACO) LED indicates status as described in the
following table.
ACO Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
No alarms, or ACO not

OFF
activated
ACO
ACO activated to acknowledge
Solid AMBER
standing alarms
Appendix E: Card (POWER, ACTIVE,
ALARM, SYNC) Boot-up Status and
LED Sequence
All Z77, Z33, Z22 cards (including the BOSS, BOSS2, CEM, CEMi, LAC, and LAD) and the L-AMP
shelf display the same (Power, Active, Alarm, Sync) LED sequence pattern to indicate boot
status, as described in the following table. Any exceptions are noted in the Boot-up Status
column.
Boot-up Status LED LED Status LED Status Description

Starting boot-up Flashing AMBER
(All cards except CEM, CEMi, POWER (five times a second
LAC, and LAD) for about 90 seconds)
ACTIVE OFF
ALARM OFF
SYNC OFF
Stuck in boot-up Flashing AMBER
(All cards except CEM, CEMi, POWER (five times per second
LAC, and LAD) for longer than 90 seconds)
ACTIVE OFF
ALARM Solid RED
SYNC OFF
Starting kernel Flashing AMBER
POWER
(All cards except CEM, CEMi, (one time per second)
LAC, and LAD)
ACTIVE OFF
ALARM OFF
SYNC OFF
Software boot-up Flashing AMBER

POWER
Note: This is normal unless (two times per second)
the Power LED continues to ACTIVE OFF
cycle.
ALARM OFF
Boot-up Status LED LED Status LED Status Description

(All cards except CEM, CEMi,
SYNC OFF
LAC, and LAD)
Software loading and Flashing GREEN

POWER
starting (two times per second)
ACTIVE OFF
ALARM OFF
SYNC OFF
Auto software upgrade POWER OFF

in-progress
ACTIVE OFF
Flashing BLUE
ALARM
(one time per second)
Flashing BLUE
SYNC
Auto Firmware upgrade Flashing BLUE

in-progress POWER
(five times per second)
(All cards except CEM, CEMi,
Flashing BLUE
LAC, and LAD) ACTIVE
Flashing BLUE
ALARM
Flashing BLUE
SYNC
Transition from boot-up to Solid AMBER

POWER
in-service (for one second)
(BOSS, BOSS2, and service Solid AMBER
cards only) ACTIVE
(for one second)
Solid AMBER
ALARM
(for one second)
Solid AMBER
SYNC
(for one second)
Appendix F: Card (POWER, ACTIVE,
ALARM, SYNC) Operational Status
and LED Sequence – Release 8.0 and
Higher
All Z77, Z33, Z22 cards (including the BOSS, BOSS2, CEM, CEMi, LAC, and LAD) and the L-AMP
shelf display the same (Power, Active, Alarm, Sync) LED sequence pattern to indicate
operational status, as described in the following table. Any exceptions are noted in the
Operational Status column.
Operational Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
Card in-service, POWER Solid GREEN

but communications link to
Flashing GREEN
the active controller card is ACTIVE
(two times per second)
down
ALARM Not applicable
SYNC Not applicable

no alarms
ACTIVE Solid GREEN
(all cards, except the
standby controller card) ALARM OFF
SYNC Solid BLUE

with alarm condition
ACTIVE Solid GREEN
Solid AMBER or RED
ALARM
(depending on alarm severity)
SYNC Solid BLUE
Card operational, POWER Solid GREEN

but in maintenance mode
ACTIVE Solid AMBER
ALARM Not applicable
SYNC Not applicable
Operational Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
Card operational, POWER Solid GREEN

but in maintenance mode
Flashing AMBER
and communications link ACTIVE
(two times per second)
to the active controller
card is down ALARM Not applicable
SYNC Not applicable
Card is not supported in Flashing MAGENTA

POWER
this slot, reinstall the card (one time per second)
in the correct slot
Flashing MAGENTA
ACTIVE
Flashing MAGENTA
ALARM
Flashing MAGENTA
SYNC
Note: The standby controller card, when operational, does not operate on the ACTIVE LED. The
ACTIVE LED remains OFF. The solid GREEN power LED indicates the card is operational and in-service.
Appendix G: Line Card SYNC LED
Sequence during PLL
Synchronization to the Active
Controller Card
A Z-Series line card SYNC LED indicates the state of the phase-locked loop (PLL) synchronization to
the shelf active controller card (Z77 BOSS/BOSS2 or Z22/Z33 CEMi). The line card PLL can be locked
to the clock coming from the active controller card or it can be in Hold-over or Free-run mode if a
BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card is not available.
Line Card SYNC LED color assignments during PLL synchronization to the shelf active controller
card are as follows:
SYNC Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
Locked Solid BLUE
Hold-over Flashing AMBER

SYNC
Free-run OFF
Acquiring (tracking) Flashing BLUE
Note: Z-Series line cards control their SYNC LEDs even if the timing subsystem (TSS) is not
provisioned. For example, the TSS on the BOSS/CEMi cards can run in Free-run mode (indicated by
the BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi SYNC LED being OFF), but a line card SYNC LED is solid BLUE to indicate it is
locked to the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card clock.
MSE-1482 Line Card SYNC LED

MSE-1482 line card SYNC LED indications are slightly dissimilar from other Z-Series line cards due to
the differences in operation. MSE-1482 line cards are designed to operate in pairs where one
MSE-1482 line card is "active" and the other MSE-1482 line card in the pair is "standby." In this
configuration, the standby MSE-1482 line card recovers its clock from the active MSE-1482 line card.
The active MSE-1482 line card recovers its clock from the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card.
The SYNC LED on the active MSE-1482 line card indicates whether the active MSE-1482 line card is
locked to the active BOSS/CEMi card or in Hold-over or Free-run mode. When the active MSE-1482
line card PLL is locked to the active BOSS/BOSS2/CEMi card, the active MSE-1482 line card SYNC LED
is solid BLUE.
The SYNC LED on the standby MSE-1482 line card indicates whether the standby MSE-1482 line card
is locked to the active MSE-1482 line card (its peer) or in Hold-over or Free-run mode. When the
standby MSE-1482 line card PLL is locked to the active MSE-1482 line card, the standby MSE-1482 line
card SYNC LED is solid BLUE.
Appendix H: Line Card Port Status
and Alarm LEDs
Line card port status and alarm LEDs (for line cards with one LED per port and line cards with
two LEDs per port) are defined in the following table:
Port Status LED LED Status LED Description

One LED per Port
In service
No alarms Solid GREEN
Minor alarm(s) PORT Solid AMBER
Major/Critical Alarm(s) Solid RED
Out-of-service OFF
Two LEDs per Port
In service
In maintenance
or ACTIVE (ACT)
Autonomous (AU) and Solid AMBER
automatic in-service
(AINS)
Disabled OFF
In-service
Minor alarm(s) ALARM (ALM) Solid AMBER
Major/Critical Alarm(s) Solid RED
Out-of-service OFF
Appendix I: Active Shelf
Controller Card Node Status and
LED Sequence
The active shelf controller card LED sequence pattern indicates node commissioning status, as
described in the following table:
Node Status LED LED Status LED Status Description
In commissioning mode Flashing BLUE

POWER
Flashing BLUE
ACTIVE
Flashing BLUE
ALARM
Flashing BLUE
SYNC
Commissioning failed Flashing RED

POWER
Flashing RED
ACTIVE
Flashing RED
ALARM
Flashing RED
SYNC
Appendix J: Z-Series Node-Level
RADIUS Support
Z-Series nodes provide node-level Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) support.
RADIUS is a networking protocol that provides centralized Authentication, Authorization, and
Accounting (AAA) management for computers to connect and use a network service. Your system
administrator can configure a Z-Series node as a client of a RADIUS server. Z-Series nodes provide
user information to a designated RADIUS server. The RADIUS server receives user login requests and
authenticates the user to prevent unauthorized access of the intended Z-Series node.
A Z-Series node RADIUS client is standards-based and should work with all RFC compliant servers
(defined in IETF RFC 2865 and IETF RFC 2866). Z-Series nodes have been tested with FreeRADIUS
http://wiki.freeradius.org/.
When you configure a Z-Series node as a RADIUS client, the registration of usernames, passwords,
and permissions reside only in the RADIUS server and are controlled by the RADIUS server. The local
Z-Series database stores the information shown in the following table.
When you select RADIUS as the AAA provider, you must configure the Z-Series node with
additional parameters. The node CLI interface (or TL1) prompts you for appropriate values for
the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Primary RADIUS server address The IP address or hostname of the primary RADIUS server to use.
RADIUS secret The shared secret used by the primary RADIUS client and server. The RADIUS
(primary RADIUS server) secret is a text string that serves as a password. The secret must match the
secret value on the primary RADIUS server. The secret is standard
alphanumeric and special characters, and is case sensitive.
Secondary RADIUS server The IP address or hostname of the secondary RADIUS server to use.
address
RADIUS secret The shared secret used by the secondary RADIUS client and server. The
(secondary RADIUS server) RADIUS secret is a text string that serves as a password. The secret must
match the secret value on the secondary RADIUS server. The secret is
standard alphanumeric and special characters, and is case sensitive.
RADIUS NAS IP address The Network Access Server (NAS) IP address or hostname.
RADIUS NAS identifier The RADIUS NAS identifier is a text string that identifies the RADIUS client to
the RADIUS server. It must match the value on the RADIUS server and must
be unique in the scope of the RADIUS server. In order to enable RADIUS
authentication, you must specify the NAS identifier.
Limitations of RADIUS
Configuring a Z-Series node as a RADIUS client has the following effects on the management of
user definitions and user passwords:
• Do not add, delete, or change user definitions through the Z-Series node. All editing of user
definitions must be done through the RADIUS server or the remote service that the RADIUS
server is connected to, such as LDAP or Active Directory.
• Editing user passwords must be done through the RADIUS server or the remote service that
the RADIUS server is connected to, such as LDAP or Active Directory.
Role Definition
The user role is limited to Administrator.
The following syntax is an example, specific to FreeRADIUS, of setting up the user configuration
file to assign a single admin role for a user:
CyanInc-User-Roles := "Administrator"
Note that the syntax may be different for other RADIUS implementations.
The following is an example of the admin user configuration on the RADIUS server:
Cleartext-Password := "adminpw"
CyanInc-User-Roles = Administrator
Configuring RADIUS
To configure RADIUS AAA for Z-Series node, follow this procedure.
Step Procedure
1 Connect your PC laptop to the Ethernet craft port of the intended Z-Series shelf via an Ethernet cable.
2 Start your CLI session.
3 If this is your initial database configuration of this Z-Series node, log in as follows:
• User: admin
• Password: adminpw
4 Configure the primary RADIUS server:
CyCli []> config equip node NE-ROOT primaryRadiusServer serverIp <99.99.99.99>
secret <yoursecret>
5 Configure the secondary RADIUS server (if needed):

CyCli []> config equip node NE-ROOT secondaryRadiusServer serverIp <99.99.99.99>
secret <yourothersecret>
6 Configure the RADIUS NAS IP address:

CyCli []> config equip node NE-ROOT radiusNasIpAddress <99.99.99.99>
7 Configure the RADIUS NAS identifier:

CyCli []> config equip node NE-ROOT radiusNasIdentifier <TheNasProxyName>
8 Exit your CLI session.
To display node information, enter the following CLI command:

CyCli []> show equip node NE-ROOT extensive
Additional RADIUS Information

• The number of authentication request attempts to a RADIUS server is set to 3, with a retry
timeout interval of 5 seconds. The maximum authentication request attempt time per server
is 15 seconds. You cannot configure the number of request attempts or the time intervals.
• You can configure a secondary RADIUS server without configuring a primary RADIUS server.
• When configuring a Z-Series node as a RADIUS client using TL1, log in through the TL1 port
(3081).
Appendix K: Best Practices for
Network Configurations
This section describes the best practices for Z-Series network configurations. Recommendations
include slot assignments, packet line card pair placement, LAD and WSS link connections, and fiber
patches for LAD and WSS transport cards.
Slot Assignments
LAD and WSS Modules Service Line Card Modules
Install LAD and WSS cards from the top down in Z33 Install service line cards from bottom to top in Z33 shelves
shelves and right to left in Z77 shelves. and left to right in Z77 shelves.
If a Z33 shelf is populated with WSS cards only, at least Be aware of card pairs and odd and even slot assignments
one WSS line card must be installed in slot 1 or 2 because when installing line cards. When installing a single line
WSS cards also act as controller cards. In this case, all Z33 card of a particular type in an odd slot, if that line card can
shelves in a ring or chain configuration that have WSS function in a card pair, consider whether to populate the
cards should have at least one WSS card installed in slot 1 adjacent even slot or to leave the even slot open for future
or 2. expansion or card protection.
If deploying the in-chassis LAD-2P or LAD-2G module, you
must install the module in slot B.
Packet Line Cards—Card Pair Placement
Important! — Observe and follow these packet card placement rules.
Z77 Shelf—Card Placement Rules

• You must install packet card pairs of the same card type in slots 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/10, 11/12,
13/14, and 15/16.
• You can mix PSW line card types within the same card pair.
• You cannot mix TSW and PME, TSW and PSW, PSW and PME, or PME-412 and PME-216i line
cards in the same card pair.
Z33 Shelf—Card Placement Rules

• You must install PME-412 card pairs or PME-216i card pairs in slots 1/2, 3/4, and 5/6.
• PSW line cards installed in Z33 slots 1 to 4 are designated Group 1.
Note: The PSW-10G20 line card is not supported in slots 1 to 4.
Note: Due to power consumption, no more than two PSW-100G2W line cards can be
• PSW line cards installed in Z33 slots 5 and 6 are designated Group 2. The system does not
allow flow domains or NNI services (including fiber patches) between cards in Group 1 and
Group 2.
Note: Slot 6 does not support the PSW-100G2W line card.
• The Z33 shelf provides 100 Gbps backplane throughput among the PSW line cards within a
group at all frame sizes.
• You cannot mix PSW and PME line cards in the same card pair.
Z22 –48V Shelf—Card Placement Rules
• You must install packet card pairs of the same card type in slots 1/2.
• You cannot install a PSW and a PME line card in the same Z22 shelf.
Z22 +24V Shelf—Card Placement Rules
• This shelf only supports PME-216i line cards. You must install at least one PME-216i line card
in slot 1 or 2 to act as the shelf manager.
LAD and WSS Link Connections

In a ring configuration, connect LAD and WSS odd slot fibers to even slot fibers in a clockwise
direction. For example, a LAD transmit fiber in a Z33 shelf in slot 5 should be connected to a receive
fiber in the adjacent Z33 shelf in slot 6.
In a linear chain configuration, connect LAD and WSS odd slot fibers to even slot fibers in the
adjacent shelf in a left to right direction.
Important! — If using an attenuator, place it on the Receive (RX) port of the LAD/WSS card.
Do NOT place it on the Transmit (TX) port.
Network Configuration Examples

The next figure shows six examples of slot and line card assignments in linear chain networks.
All of the examples follow the basic recommendation of installing LAD and WSS cards from the
top down in Z33 shelves and right to left in Z77 shelves. Additionally, install the "transmit"
transport LAD or WSS card in an odd slot and the "receive" transport card in an even slot.
Note that the Z33 shelf at Site 2 in Example 4 only has WSS cards installed. Since WSS cards
have controllers built in (LAD cards do not), you can place WSS cards in Z33 slots 1 and 2 to
also act as intelligent shelf managers.
Figure 155: Linear Chain – Slot and Line Card Assignments
The next figure shows a typical Z33/Z77 ring configuration with odd to even slots connected in
a clockwise direction. Z33 LAD and WSS cards are installed top down. Install Z77 LAD and WSS
cards right to left.
Figure 156: Typical Z33 and Z77 Ring Configuration
This figure shows an example of another typical Z33/Z77 ring configuration with odd to even
slots connected in a clockwise direction. In this example, Site 2 has only WSS cards installed in
a Z33 shelf. In this shelf, you must install the WSS-402 cards in slots 1 and 2 to act as shelf
manager cards. The WSS cards in the Z33 shelf at Site 3 are also installed in slots 1 and 2 to
match the slots at Site 2.
Figure 157: Ring Configuration with WSS-402 Cards Only in a Node Site
Fiber Patches
Connect Add/Drop fiber patches on LAD, LAD/AWG, or WSS/AWG ports from even card slots to
even card slots and from odd card slots to odd card slots.
On multi-port line cards (for example, PME-412, PME-216i, DTM-8, MSE-1482, SFT-8, or SFT-10G16),
connect Add/Drop fiber patches from even ports to even LAD or WSS slots and from odd ports to
odd LAD or WSS slots.
Appendix L: ROADM: 40-Channel
vs. 96-Channel Interoperability
Guidelines
With the introduction of the Wavelength Selective Switch (WSS)-F series 96-channel ROADM solution,
customers are able to increase the capacity of their existing optical networks. However, there are a
number of requirements to consider when planning the transition of an existing 40-channel network
to a 96-channel solution.
The fundamental difference between these two solutions is their differing ITU channel plan. The
WSS-F series supports 96-channels with a 50 GHz channel spacing while the WSS-402/404 modules
utilize 100 GHz.
The WSS-F series supports 40-channel mode, and if configured in this mode, can interoperate with
WSS-402/404 networks. However, when the network requires more than 40 channels and/or
requires 50 GHz spacing, network designers need to understand the differences between these two
solutions fully.
These guidelines focus on the Z-Series ROADM platform and considerations when planning the
transition to a 96-channel ROADM network.
40-Channel vs. 96-Channel Interoperability Topics

Topics included in these interoperability guidelines are:
• 40-channel and high-capacity 96-channel modules
• Limitations and requirements to consider
• Channel spacing
• Replacement of 100 GHz with 50 GHz-Spaced Optics
• Hardware interoperability
 DCM and AWG
 Amplifiers
• WSS-F to WSS-402/404 express channel configurations
• WSS-F 40-channel to 96-channel mode cross-connects
ROADM and Terminal DWDM Mux/Demux Modules

These guidelines focus on increasing the capacity of optical networks equipped with a
combination of 40-channel ROADM and DWDM modules and high-capacity 96-channel
modules. ROADM and DWDM modules are:
• 96-Channel
 96-channel ROADM WSS-F2/F4/F8 modules (also referred to in this document as WSS-F
modules)
 96-channel terminal DWDM mux/demux LAD-96/96E modules (also referred to in this
document as LAD-96 modules)
• 40-Channel
 40-channel ROADM WSS-402 and WSS-404 modules
 40-channel terminal DWDM mux/demux LAD-40/40E modules (also referred to in this
document as LAD-40 modules)
• 8-Channel
 8-channel terminal DWDM mux/demux LAD-8/8i/8A/8E/8X modules (also referred to in
this document as LAD-8 modules)
Limitations and Requirements to Consider

Network designers need to consider the following limitations and requirements when making
the transition to a ROADM/DWDM 96-channel network:
• A single ROADM node needs to be either 40-or 96-channel for all degrees. There is no ability
to express between an existing 40-channel ROADM and a 96-channel ROADM module
optically.
• The EDFA Lambda Amplifier (L-AMP) shelf only supports 40-channels. EDFA Optical Line
Amplifier OLA-200/201 modules are required for 96-channel amplification.
• Existing 100 GHz-spaced XFP and SFP+ optics need to be replaced with 50 GHz-spaced optics
when moving from a 40-channel (WSS 402/404, LAD-40 network) to a 96-channel network.
• Wavelength count of Dispersion Compensating Modules (DCMs) and Array Wave Guides
(AWG) modules must match the network wavelength count.
• Delete and reconfigure all existing 40-channel WSS-F cross-connects when transitioning from
40- to 96-channel mode.
These guidelines further define these limitations and requirements.
Channel Spacing
Channel spacing is based on 100 GHz or 50 GHz spacing. WSS-402/404 modules support
40-channel, 100 GHz spacing, 192.10 to 196.00 THz, ITU channels 21 to 60 (40 x 100 GHz = 4
THz total spectrum).
Channels supported by WSS-F2/F4/F8 modules include:
• 40-channel mode, 100 GHz spacing, 192.10 to 196.00 THz, ITU channels 21 to 60
(40 x 100 GHz = 4 THz total spectrum)
• 96-channel mode, 50 GHz spacing, 191.35 to 196.10 THz, ITU channels 13.5 to 61
(96 x 50 GHz = 4.8 THz total spectrum)
• Flexible grid mode, 4 THz total spectrum, 12.5 GHz spacing (not currently supported by
WSS-F modules)
Replacement of 100GHz with 50GHz-Spaced Optics

To expand from a 40-channel network with WSS-402/404 modules to a 96-channel configuration
requires replacement of 100 GHz-spaced fixed-channel XFP and SFP+ optics with 50 GHz-spaced
optics.
Supported optical transceivers for WSS-F modules used in 96-channel configurations include:
• Tunable XFP, 96-channel variant (part number: 280-0459-00)
• Tunable SFP+ (part number: 280-0451-00)
• Tunable CFP (part numbers: 280-0498-00 and 280-0497-00)
• Fixed channel SFP, even channels of 21 to 60 only
Optical transceivers not supported by WSS-F modules in 96-channel configurations include:
• Older tunable XFPs (part number: 280-0088-00)
Note 1: WSS-F modules operating in 96-channel mode support odd and even channels from
21 to 60 (21,0, 21.5, ... 59.5, 60.0).
Note 2: Part number: 280-0459-00 supersedes these XFPs and supports all 96 channels.
• Fixed-channel 100 GHz SFP+
• Fixed-channel 100 GHz XFP
See the Optical Modular Transceiver Interoperability Table starting on page 354 for a full listing
of transceivers with support for 96-channel networks and the capability of each.
Hardware Interoperability
When planning to transition to a 50 GHz-spaced ROADM network, consider channel modes used for
DCM, AWG, and amplifier hardware.
DCMs and AWG Modules
DCM and AWG module channel modes need to match the channel mode used for the
WSS-402/404, WSS-F, LAD-8, and LAD-40 modules.
• 96-Channel
 96-channel WSS-F2/F4/F8 and LAD-96/96E modules require AWG-96 modules and
96-channel (50 GHz) DCMs.
• 40-Channel
 40-channel WSS-402/404 and LAD-40/40E modules require AWG-40 modules and
40-channel (100 GHz) DCMs.
 WSS-F2/F4/F8 modules (configured for 40-channel mode) operate with AWG-40 modules
and 40-channel (100 GHz) DCMs.
• 8-Channel
 8-Channel LAD-8/8i/8A/8E/8X modules require 100 GHz DCMs. An AWG module is not
required as LAD-8 modules have integrated optical mux/demux capability.
EDFA Amplifiers
A L-AMP shelf supports 40-channel configurations only. The EDFA-based OLA-200/201 modules
support both 40-channel and 96-channel configurations.
Raman Amplifiers
A Raman-based OLA-010 module supports both 40 and 96-channel configurations.
See the Hardware Interoperability Table starting on page 355 for a full listing of Z-Series hardware
with support for 96-channel networks and the capability of each.
WSS-F to WSS-402/404 Express Channel Considerations

Another consideration when transitioning to a 96-channel ROADM network are existing WSS-F
to WSS-402/404 express channels; as it is not possible to optically express between a
40-channel ROADM and a 96-channel ROADM.
• WSS-F2/F4 modules configured for 40-channel mode can express to WSS-402/404 modules.
• WSS-F modules configured for 96-channel mode cannot express to WSS-402/404 modules.
See the ROADM and LAD Interoperability Table starting on page 356 for a summary by WSS and
LAD module: providing function, capability, and any qualifications for support of 96-channel
networks.
WSS-F 40-Channel to 96-Channel Mode Cross-Connects

Transitioning the WSS-F series modules from 40-channel to 96-channel mode requires deletion of all
existing cross-connects prior to making the change to 96-channel mode. You must rebuild all
cross-connects once the WSS-F module is configured for 96-channel grid mode operation.
Optical Modular Transceiver Interoperability

The following table provides a full listing of transceivers with support for 96-channel networks
and the capability of each.
Figure 158: Optical Module Transceiver Interoperability Table
Hardware Interoperability
The following table provides a full listing of Z-Series hardware with support for 96-channel
networks and the capability of each.
Figure 159: Hardware Interoperability Table
ROADM and LAD Interoperability

The following table provides a summary by WSS and LAD module; function, capability, and any
qualifications for support of 96-channel networks.
Figure 160: ROADM and LAD Interoperability Table
Appendix M: Z-Series Packet Line
Card Migration
Planet Operate and the Z-Series CyOS do not support service migration between packet line card
types. Migrating services from a PME line card to a PSW line card, or conversely a PSW line card to a
PME line card, is not supported. To migrate packet line cards, you must delete all provisioning on the
line card and then recreate the provisioning on the target line card. Using Planet Operate to
deprovision services from one line card type, leaving the services in a routed state, and then
reprovisioning the services on the new line card type is not supported.
If needed, you can engage Ciena Professional Services to migrate the line card provisioning for you
to ensure operational success. Contact your Ciena account representative for information.
Appendix N: Software Upgrades:
Service-Affected Line Cards
An Operating System software upgrade is service affecting for Z-Series line cards listed in the
following matrix.
Important! — This section provides specific PSW line card upgrade information. Review these
guidelines and considerations prior to upgrading PSW line cards. The PSW upgrade information
in this section follows the service-affecting line card matrix shown below.
Service-Affecting Line Card Matrix
From TO CyOS Release …

CyOS
Release 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.2 5.0
10.0 and DTM-8/8G 1

higher DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2
PME-412 2
9.0 and DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1
higher 5 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2
PME-412 2 PME-412 2
8.0 and DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1
higher 4 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2
PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2
7.0 and DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1
higher 3 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2
PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2
DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1
6.0.06 and DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
higher PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2
PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2
From TO CyOS Release …

CyOS
Release 10.0 9.0 8.0 7.0 6.0 5.2 5.0
DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1

DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2
PME-216i 2
PME-216i 2
PME-216i 2
PME-216i 2
6.0.01 to
PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2
6.0.05
PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10
PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618
PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G
DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1

DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1
PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2
PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2
5.2 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10
PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618
PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G PSW-100G
TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10
XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800
DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 DTM-8/8G 1 FLX-216i
DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 DTM-100G 1 PME-216i 2
FLX-216i FLX-216i FLX-216i FLX-216i FLX-216i PME-412 2
PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PME-216i 2 PSW-10G10
5.0 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PME-412 2 PSW-618
PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 PSW-10G10 TSW-10G10
PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 PSW-618 XC-2800
TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10 TSW-10G10
XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800 XC-2800
1Software upgrades of DTM-8/8G and DTM-100G line cards to CyOS Release 6.0 or 7.0 are service affecting
when the cards participate in a TPM protection configuration.
2 Software upgrades of PME line cards are service affecting when supporting LAG with active or passive LACP.
3 PSW line cards participating in an NNI ring and upgraded to CyOS Release 7.0.09 or higher require a manual
service-affecting hardware reboot to enable the FPGA firmware and the PSW ERP loop detection and
interruption feature.
4A new version of the LME-10G10 line card (LME-10G10d) is available in CyOS Release 8.0 and higher. If a new
version LME-10G10d line card (with part number 800-0138-02 or later) is upgraded to CyOS Release 8.0 or
higher, then a manual service-affecting hardware reboot is required to configure the OSPF in-band
management via the general communications channel (GCC) feature.
5 For a FLX-216i line card upgraded to CyOS release 9.0 or higher, a manual service-affecting hardware reboot is
required before including it in a TPM protection group.
PSW Upgrade Guidelines and Considerations

The Broadcom SDK reorders switch chip internal table entries on PSW line cards when:
• Provisioning on the PSW line card occurs requiring an entry in the internal table;
and
• There is insufficient free space in the internal table to add the entry, so the SDK moves
entries to create additional space (scale related).
Re-ordering sets the stage for a traffic impact, but does not actually impact traffic.
Re-ordering can impact traffic if:
• There are ERPs terminating on the PSW line card where re-ordering has occurred;
and
• A ring switch occurs requiring the FPGA on the PSW line card to write to the switch chip to
block/unblock;
and
• The entry being written by the FPGA has been moved elsewhere.
In summary, for CyOS Releases 6.0 and higher, the problem is limited to a PSW line card when:
• There is significant existing provisioning (scale);
• Additional provisioning is received causing a reorder;
and
• There are one or more ERPs terminating on the PSW line card, and there is an event causing
a ring switch to occur.
or
• An ERP V2 RPL blocking port remains blocked during a signal failure (SF) event. Release 9.0.06
corrects the problem if only ERP V2 is on the affected line card. However, if V1 and V2 are
both provisioned on the same line card and the card is the RPL owner for both a V1 and a V2
ring, the problem could occur. Release 10.0 corrects this issue completely.
A cold boot of PSW line cards is required to pick up the FPGA change that accompanies fixes in the
software. Following an upgrade to CyOS 8.0.08 or 9.0.03 and higher, users will receive an alarm
notifying them that a cold boot of PSW line cards is required. For additional information, see Field
Service Bulletin 101-2016-023.
Releases 8.0.08 and 9.0.03 and higher, PSW line cards will raise an alarm with a warning severity
whenever the FPGA image on disk differs from that loaded into the FPGA program memory. Because
an FPGA firmware update with ERP fixes/improvements is included with 8.0.08 and 9.0.03 and
higher, this alarm is raised for every PSW line card following an upgrade activation. The alarm will
clear after a cold boot of the line card.
To avoid requiring a Planet Operate upgrade to recognize this additional alarm, the text of an
existing alarm category is reused. The alarm Additional Information field displays, "Equipment
degraded - Requiring a cold restart to support new features."
Users may dismiss these alarms at their own discretion. To do so, select one or more alarms and
mark them as “acknowledged,” then filter the Planet Operate alarm list to display “unacknowledged”
alarms only.
Manual Hardware Reboot of PSW Modules in CyOS 8.0 or Higher

PSW line cards upgraded to CyOS Release 8.0 or higher require a manual service-affecting
hardware reboot (cold boot) in order:
• For Link Fault Propagation to function properly for EPL services
• To provision E-Tree services on a PSW line card
With the Z-Series node selected in the Network view tab, from the main menu select Node > Reset
Modules. From the slot list, select the intended line card to reset. Select the Hardware Reboot radio
button and click Reset.
Note 1: Performing a hardware reboot of the line card serves to enable the FPGA firmware and the
PSW Link Fault Propagation for EPL and E-Tree features.
Note 2: If a hardware reboot of installed PSW line cards is not performed after upgrading to
CyOS Release 8.0 or higher, the FPGA firmware for E-Tree services is not enabled and the
system generates the following message:
Firmware does not support this feature.
Perform a hard reboot to enable the FPGA firmware upgrade.
Manual Hardware Reboot of PSW Modules in CyOS 7.0.09 or Higher

Loop Detection and Interruption Feature
For PSW line cards participating in a NNI ring and upgraded to CyOS Release 7.0.09 or higher, a
manual service-affecting hardware reboot is required to enable the FPGA firmware and the PSW ERP
loop detection and interruption feature.
Performing a hardware reboot of the line card serves to enable the FPGA firmware and PSW ERP
loop detection and interruption feature.
Note 1: If a hardware reboot of installed PSW line cards is not performed after upgrading to
CyOS Release 7.0.09 or higher, the FPGA firmware is not enabled, and the loop detection and
interruption feature will fail and the system generates the following message:
Note 2: If the loop detection and interruption feature is pre-provisioned "without a PSW line
card in the slot," and a PSW line card is installed later with an older CyOS version, the PSW line
card will automatically upgrade to CyOS Release 7.0.09. However, you must still perform a
hardware reboot of the installed PSW line card to enable the FPGA firmware. If the hardware
reboot is not performed on the installed PSW line card, the loop detection and interruption
feature will fail, and the system generates the following alarm:
Source Type: PSW-xxx module
Probable Cause: Equipment Fail
Qualifier: ERP Loop Detection Not Supported
Resolution of Protection and Configuration Issues
For PSW line cards upgraded to CyOS Release 7.0.09 or higher, a manual, service-affecting
hardware reboot is required to resolve the following protection and configuration issues:
• In some cases, PSW line cards used in an ERP configuration were not providing blocking for
both shaped and non-shaped services on the same ring that could result in loops and traffic
disruption.
• In a PSW NNI network ring configuration, when the PSW port on one leg of the main ring was
in a Locked to Disable admin state, on a reboot of the line card, both ports of the main ring
were blocked.
• PSW line cards did not recognize a link fail status in a G.8032 protection configuration. This
issue caused disruption of traffic.
• When sending a Continuity Check Messages (CCM) immediately after sending Ring Automatic
Protection Switching (R-APS), the CCM was corrupted. The corruption occurred when the
R-APS, sent every 5 seconds, and CCMs, sent every 3.3 ms, infrequently lined up.
• For PSW line cards operating in the PBB-TE protocol, the ring initialized with all ports
unblocked in the Pending protection state after ring creation. This condition persisted until
the Wait-to-Restore (WTR) timer expired and then the protection state moved from Pending
to Idle. At that point, the ring corrected itself and automatically blocked the RPLO.
• For PSW line cards in a network ERP and cross-card configuration, when the RPLO was locked
and unlocked, both ports in the cross-card configuration in a non-RPLO node were blocked
and not allowing traffic to flow. The port in the lower slot number of the cross-card
configuration should have unblocked while in the Pending protection state.
CyOS Upgrades of PSW and TSW-10G10 Line Cards and XC-2800 Switch Fabric Modules
Note the following:
• Upgrading PSW-10G10, PSW-618, PSW-100G, and TSW-10G10 line cards and XC-2800 switch
fabric modules from CyOS Release 6.0.06 (or a higher 6.0 release) to Release 7.0 is a
non-service affecting ("hitless") operation. Support for non-service affecting upgrades starts
with software updates from CyOS release 6.0.06 and higher to a higher release.
• Upgrading from CyOS Release 6.0.01 through 6.01.05 to the latest available GA version of
release 6.0 is service affecting for all PSW line cards, but is non-service affecting for
TSW-10G10 line cards and XC-2800 modules.
• CyOS Release 6.0.06 and higher supports non-service affecting upgrades for PSW line cards
participating in a Link Aggregation Group. However, when a PSW line card participates in a
LAG or other protection scheme configuration, the system does not perform a protection
switch or warm reset during a software upgrade.
Manual Hardware Reboot of the FLX-216i Modules in CyOS 9.0 or Higher

For a FLX-216i line card upgraded to CyOS release 9.0 or higher, a manual service-affecting hardware
reboot is required before including it in a TPM protection group.
button option and click Reset.
Performing a hardware reboot of the line card is required to upgrade the firmware and enabling the
sub-50 ms optical protection switchover feature.
If a hardware reboot of the line card has not been performed after upgrading to CyOS release
9.0, creating a new protection group will fail with the following message:
ResErrProtectNotSupported:
createPg, Protection not supported:
FAC <card AID> Card must be present with CLPD version 16 or higher.
Insert card or perform a hard reboot to upgrade.
Manual Hardware Reboot of LME-10G10d Modules in CyOS 8.0 or Higher

A new version of the LME-10G10 line card (LME-10G10d) is available in CyOS Release 8.0 or higher. If
the new version LME-10G10d line card (with part number 800-0138-02 or later) is upgraded to CyOS
Release 8.0, then a manual service-affecting hardware reboot is required in order to configure the
OSPF in-band management via the general communications channel (GCC) feature. (With the
Z-Series node selected in Network view tab, from the main menu select Node > Reset Modules. In
the slot list, select the card to reset. Select the Hardware Reboot option button and click Reset.)
Performing a hard reboot of the LME-10G10d line card serves to activate the OSPF in-band
management via the GCC channel feature.
Manual Hardware Reboot of LME-10G10 Modules in CyOS 7.0 or Higher

For an LME-10G10 line card upgraded to CyOS Release 7.0 or higher, a manual, service-affecting
hardware reboot is required before including the line card in a TPM protection group.
Performing a hardware reboot of the line card serves to activate the sub-50 ms switchover timing
feature in this release.
Note: If a hardware reboot of the line card has not been performed after upgrading to CyOS Release
7.0 or higher, creating a new protection group will fail with the following message:
Manual Hardware Reboot of DTM-100G Modules in CyOS 6.0 or Higher

For a DTM-100G line card upgraded to CyOS Release 6.0 or higher, a manual, service-affecting
hardware reboot is required before including it in a TPM protection group.
button option and click Reset.
Performing a hardware reboot of the line card serves to activate the improved, sub-50 ms switchover
timing feature in this release.
If a hardware reboot of the line card has not been performed after upgrading to CyOS Release
6.0 or higher, creating a new protection group will fail with the following message:
Manual Hardware Reboot of DTM-8 Modules in CyOS 6.0 or Higher

For a DTM-8 line card upgraded to CyOS Release 6.0 or higher from a release lower than Release 6.0,
a manual, service-affecting hardware reboot is required before including it in a TPM protection
group.
option and click Reset.
Performing a hard reboot of the line card serves to activate the improved, sub-50 ms switchover
timing feature in this release.
If the line card has not been rebooted after upgrading to CyOS Release 6.0 or higher, creating a
new protection group will fail with the following message:
Appendix O: Acronyms and
Z-Series Terminology
ACO Alarm Cut-Off
ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer
AID Access Identifier
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown — The ALS protocol is used to turn off the optical output
power of remote transmitters if an optical link is broken.
AMB Air Management Board — Z-Series Air Management Boards are essential to proper
cooling of the shelf assembly. Air Management Boards must be installed over all unused
slot openings to prevent damage from overheating.
ARP Address Resolution Protocol
Attenuation A loss in signal strength along an electrical or optical cable. In optical fibers, attenuation is
the reduction in signal strength. The higher the signal loss, the higher the attenuation.
Dispersion, absorption and light scattering cause attenuation. Attenuation is typically
referenced in decibels per length of medium in kilometers (dB/km).
AUI Attachment Unit Interface
AWG Arrayed Wavelength Grating

– or –
Array Wave Guide
– or –
American Wire Gauge
B-MAC Backbone MAC address — B-MAC is an individual MAC address associated with a Provider
Instance Port and used in creating the MAC header of I-tagged frames transmitted across
a Provider Backbone Bridged Network.
B-VID Backbone VLAN Identifier — B-VIDs are used in PBB-TE as part of the 3-tuple that
identifies a TESI path. The valid B-VID range is 1 through 4089.
BE Bit Error
BER Bit Error Ratio
Blue Planet Blue Planet is a software-defined network (SDN) system built specifically for service
provider networks. Blue Planet lets service providers of all types virtualize their networks,
flatten legacy cost structures, make more efficient use of network assets, and accelerate
service delivery.
Blue Planet is composed of three distinct elements: an open SDN platform, SDN apps,
and element adapter apps facilitating control over a wide range of third-party network
devices.
BNG Broadband Network Gateway
BOSS Broadband Operating System Supervisor — The BOSS card provides common shelf
control functionality to Z77 nodes.
BTM BOSS Termination Module — The BTM houses the Z77 physical connectors for
management and timing interfaces.
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit
CAC Connection Admission Control — CAC is used for Traffic Engineering configuration and
helps to control congestion in a connection-oriented network such as Carrier Ethernet.
CAC is used during the setup of a connection to determine if the Quality of Service (QoS)
is valid for the connection request and to verify that there are sufficient resources
available to allow a new connection. The QoS of the new connection cannot affect the
QoS of existing connections.
CBS Committed Burst Size — The Committed Burst Size is a bandwidth profile parameter. CBS
limits the maximum number of bytes available for a burst of service frames sent at the
UNI speed to remain CIR conformant.
CCM Continuity Check Messages — CFM Continuity Check Messages are multicast heartbeat
messages exchanged periodically among MEPs. CCMs allow MEPs to discover other MEPs
in a domain and allow MIPs to discover MEPs.
CDF Client Data Frame
CE • Customer Equipment
• Carrier Ethernet
• Customer Edge
• Circuit Emulation
CEM Common Equipment Module
CFI Canonical Format Indicator
CFM Connectivity Fault Management — Connectivity Fault Management is an IEEE 802.1ag

end-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet OAM protocol. CFM provides connectivity
monitoring, fault verification, and isolation for carrier networks. CFM uses standard
Ethernet frames.
CIR Committed Information Rate — The Committed Information Rate is a bandwidth profile
parameter. CIR defines the average bits per second of service frames up to which the
network delivers service frames and meets the performance objectives defined by the
Class of Service (CoS) service attribute.
CIST Common and Internal Spanning Tree identifies the regions in a network and administers
the CIST root bridge for the network, the root bridge for each region, and the root bridge
for each spanning-tree instance in each region.
CoS Class of Service

Service frames delivery and performance levels agreed to by the service provider.
CPE Customer Premises Equipment
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSV Comma-Separated Values
C-VID Customer VLAN Identifier
C-VLAN Customer VLAN
CWDM Coarse Wave Division Multiplexing

CWDM uses the center wavelengths from 1271 nm to 1611 nm with a channel spacing of
20 nm.
DAPI Destination Access Point Identifier
DCI Data Center Interconnect
DCM Dispersion Compensating Module
DCN Data Communication Network
Decibel Decibel (dB) is a logarithmic scale used as a measurement of relative power.
DEI Drop Eligible Indicator

A Drop Eligible Indicator indicates the drop eligibility of a frame.
DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol — DHCP allows a computer to connect to an
IP-based network without having a pre-configured IP address.
DM Delay Measurement
DNS Domain Name System — DNS is used to convert human-friendly host names and domain
names into numerical IP addresses.
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
DSR Digital Signal Rate
DTE Data Terminating Entity
DTM Digital Transmission Module — The Z-Series 8-port DTM-8 and DTM-8G provide
multiservice 10G transponder and regenerator functions. The DTM-8 and DTM-8G
encode Ethernet and SONET/SDH client-side signals into a standard G.709 OTN optical
channel (OTU2 DWDM) for DWDM drop and insert services in the Z-Series multi-layer
transport platforms.
The Z-Series DTM-100G is a 100 Gbps dual-slot transponder module with configurable
OTU4 mapping and forms the DWDM interfaces for the Z22 (–48V), Z33, and Z77 100
Gbps transponder solutions.
The DTM-100G module receives a C Form-Factor Pluggable (CFP) based 100 GbE or OTU4
signal and generates a 100 Gbps ITU grid wave with OTU4 embedded wrapping.
DVM Delay Variation Measurement
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing — DWDM is the transmission of multiple signals
over closely spaced wavelengths in the 1550 nm region on a single fiber of fiber pair.
EA Element Access
EBS Excess Burst Size — The Excess Burst Size is a bandwidth profile parameter. EBS limits
the maximum number of bytes available for a burst of service frames sent at the UNI
speed to remain EIR conformant.
EDFA Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier — EDFA is a device used to amplify optical signals. Unlike
regenerators, EDFAs directly amplify an optical signal. EDFAs do not convert it to electrical
before increasing the signal. With EDFA, optical fibers are doped with erbium, which can
amplify light in the 1550 nm region when it is pumped by an external laser.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EFP Ethernet Flow Point
Egress Frame A service frame sent from the service provider to the CE.
EIR Excess Information Rate — The EIR is a bandwidth profile parameter. EIR defines the
average rate in bits per second of service frames up to which the network can deliver
service frames, but without any performance objectives.
E-LMI Ethernet Link Management Interface
EMS Element Management System
E-LAN An Ethernet service type that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC.
E-Line An Ethernet service type based on a point-to-point Ethernet Virtual Connection. EPL and
EVPL are E-Line services. E-Line supports Class of Service (CoS) and VLAN tagging.
E-NNI External Network-to-Network Interface
EoS Ethernet over SONET/SDH
EPL Ethernet Private Line — EPL provides a point-to-point Ethernet connection between a pair
of dedicated User-Network Interfaces (UNIs). EPL service is specified using an E-Line
service type. EPL is implemented as a point-to-point EVC.
EP-Tree Ethernet Private Tree
ERP Ethernet Ring Protection EP-Tree (Ethernet Private Tree)— As specified in ITU-T G.8032,
ERP provides E-LAN and E-VLAN service protection for ring configurations through the
protocol protection switching mechanisms for Ethernet rings.
EVP-Tree Ethernet Virtual Private Tree
ESMC Ethernet Synchronization Messaging Channel — The ESMC, provided by a

SyncE-provisioned Z-Series PME-412 or PME-216i 10G port, supplies the clock quality level
value from node to node. It sends and receives Synchronization Status Messages (SSM) to
maintain the timing synchronization chain and allow external equipment to retrieve Line
timing from the PME 10G port.
ESP Ethernet Switched Path — ESP is a provisioned traffic-engineered unidirectional
connectivity path between two or more subscriber backbone ports that extends over a
Provider Backbone Bridge Network.
EtherType A field in the Ethernet frame that indicates which protocol is encapsulated in the payload.
ETYn ITU-T Ethernet Physical Section Layer of order n:

• n=1 (10Base)
• n=2 (100Base)
• n=3 (1000Base)
• n=4 (10GBase)
• n=5 (100GBase)
EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line — EVPL is another E-Line service that provides a
point-to-point Ethernet connection between two Ethernet UNIs. EVPL allows a single
physical connection (UNI) to customer premises equipment for multiple virtual
connections.
EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection — An association of two or more UNIs that limits the
exchange of frames to UNIs in the Ethernet Virtual Connection.
FCAPS Fault, Configuration, Administration, Performance, and Security
FCAPS is the ISO Telecommunications Management Network model for network
management.
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FD Flow Domain — Represents a connectionless sub-network and is defined by a set of flow

points that are available for the purpose of transferring information. An Ethernet flow
domain represents a logical Ethernet Bridge with flow points representing logical ports
on the bridge.
FDI Forward Defect Indication
FEC Forward Error Correction
FIB Forwarding Information Base — Also referred to as Forwarding Table, it provides

optimized information of destination addresses in network bridging and routing.
FLX The Z-Series FLX-216i is a flexible multi-rate OTN muxponder I-Temp module. The
FLX-216i module is a highly scalable OTN switching and muxponder optimized for
deployments in network transport applications. The environmentally hardened FLX-216i
module provides end-to-end packet and TDM/OTN transport.
FP Flow Point — An Ethernet flow point is a reference point that represents a location of
transfer of connectionless traffic units between topological components. A flow point can
represent a location of a physical port or individual sub-flow within a physical port such
as a VLAN.
FPP Flow Point Pool — The termination of a link is called a flow point pool. The FPP describes
configuration information associated with an interface, such as a UNI or NNI.
Frame Short for Ethernet frame
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
FWM Four-Wave Mixing — FWM can occur in WDM systems when multiple wavelengths
combine to form new wavelengths. FWM can decrease channel spacing of wavelengths
and have high signal power levels.
GARP Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
Gbps Gigabits per second
GE Gigabit Ethernet
GFEC Generic Forward Error Correction
GFP Generic Framing Protocol
GMRP GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GUI Graphical User Interface
GVRP GARP VLAN Registration Protocol
HALT Highly Accelerated Life Testing
IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) snooping provides greater bandwidth
efficiency for intensive multicast applications such as IPTV. IGMP snooping reduces
bandwidth consumption to avoid flooding the network with mutlicast packets that nodes
do not need to receive. Starting in Release 10.0, Ciena PSW line cards support IGMP
snooping.
ILA In-Line Amplifier
I-SID Service Instance Identifier — The I-SID is assigned for a service. The service ID is part of
the payload in provider backbone bridges per IEEE 802.1ah. I-SIDs provide additional
network security. I-SID is a unique identifier used to ensure that users only receive traffic
and services for their respective subscription agreements.
IP Internet Protocol — Data packets are forwarded from node to node based on the
four-byte destination IP address.
IPMI Intelligent Platform Management Interface
Ingress Frame A service frame sent from the CE to the service provider network.
IS In Service
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication standards sector
Kbps Kilobits per second
LAC Lambda Aggregator CWDM — The Z-Series Lambda Aggregator CWDM terminal
multiplexer module provides up to eight CWDM wavelengths for use in the Z-Series
multi-layer transport platforms. Each LAC provides optical multiplexing and
demultiplexing capability in the 1470 nm to 1610 nm band with 20 nm spacing.
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is a method of bundling several physical ports
together to form a single logical channel.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol Data Unit — Two devices exchange LACPDUs in the
process of forming a LAG.
LAD Lambda Add/Drop — The Z-Series LAD lambda add/drop DWDM terminal multiplexer
modules are available in four or eight 10G wavelength models for use in the Z-Series
multi-layer transport platforms. Each LAD provides optical add/drop multiplexing
capability in the 1550 nm band across predefined ITU channel designations with 50 or
100 GHz spacings.
LAG Link Aggregation Group — Link Aggregation Group allows for the grouping of Ethernet
interfaces to form a single link layer interface. LAGs provide a logical aggregation of
bandwidth and link redundancy (fault tolerance).
Lambda A wavelength used to carry one or more data channels in a WDM or DWDM system.
L-AMP Lambda Amplifier — The Z-Series L-AMP is a self-contained 1 RU module that functions as
a bi-directional mid-span optical amplifier / repeater. Each 4-port L-AMP supports
bi-directional physical layer amplification of multiple DWDM wavelengths where
node-to-node spans are greater than 80 kilometers.
LAN Local Area Network
LBM Loopback Message – A Loopback Message is used to verify bidirectional connectivity

between the two maintenance entities. A MEP may send one or more LBMs to a specific
Maintenance Point (MEP or MIP).
LBR Loopback Response — When an LBM is received by a remote MEP/MIP that matches its
address, an LBR is generated. The LBR returns the information, if any, that was
transmitted in the LBM.
LER Label Edge Router
LGX Light-Guide Cross-connects
Link Links represent a connection between two nodes.
LM Loss Measurement
LME Lambda Multiplexer Element — The Z-Series 2.5G-LME4 is a 4-port muxponder

(multiplex-transponder) module with integrated OTN encoding for efficient 10G
wavelength transport in the Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms. Each module
accepts any combination of up to four 2.5G OC-48, STM-16 and OTU-1 signals which are
encoded/translated into discrete ODU-1 layers and then multiplexed into a 10G OTU2
wavelength for managed DWDM transport.
The Z-Series LME-10G10 multiservice 100G OTN muxponding module is optimized for
network transport applications. The LME-10G10 can be paired with the Z-Series DTM
100G coherent transponder module to deliver a complete end-to-end packet and OTN
transport solution. The module is supported across all Z-Series platforms.
LOS Loss of Signal
LSA Link State Announcements
LSP Label Switched Path
LSR Label Switch Router
LTM Link Trace Message — LTMs are multicast frames that a MEP transmits to follow the path
(hop-by-hop) to the target MEP.
LTR Link Trace Reply
MA Maintenance Association
MAC The Media Access Control address is a unique hardware number that is assigned to each
Ethernet device by the manufacturer.
MAU 802.3 Medium Attachment Unit
Mbps Megabits per second
MD Maintenance Domain
ME Metro Ethernet
MEF Metro Ethernet Forum
MEN Metro Ethernet Network
MEP Maintenance End Point

MEPs are edge nodes where flows originate and terminate.
MIB Management Information Base
The MIB contains managed objects that the user can access through a network
communication protocol such as SNMP.
MIP Maintenance Intermediate Points
MPO Multi-Fiber Push On connector
MS Multiplex Section
MSE Multiservice SONET/SDH Element — The Z-Series Multiservice SONET/SDH Element

(MSE-1482) is an advanced SONET/SDH aggregation and transport module, with
integrated OTN transport supporting both the Z-Series multi-layer transport platforms.
The MSE-1482 module provides a full 10G transport of SONET, SDH and Ethernet services
with non-blocking STS cross-connect for aggregation and grooming (including hair-pin
capability) across a wide range of SFP/XFP pluggable interfaces.
MSO Multiple Service Operator
MSPP Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
MST Multiple Spanning Tree
MSTI Multiple Spanning Tree Instance
MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol — As defined in IEEE 802.1Q, provides simple and full
connectivity for frames assigned to any given VLAN throughout a bridged LAN comprising
arbitrarily interconnected bridges, each operating MSTP, STP, or RSTP. MSTP allows
frames assigned to different VLANs to follow separate paths, each based on an
independent Multiple Spanning Tree Instance (MSTI), within Multiple Spanning Tree (MST)
Regions composed of LANs and or MST Bridges. These Regions and the other Bridges and
LANs are connected into a single Common Spanning Tree (CST).
MTNM Multi-Technology Network Management
MTP MTP is a high performance multi-fiber push on connector used in the Z-Series OFX-4 and
OFX-8 modules. MTP connectors comply with all MPO standards including EIA/TIA-604-5
FOCIS 5 and the IEC-61754-7.
MTU Maximum Transmission Unit
Multiplex Combining multiple signals for simultaneous transmission across a single physical
channel.
Muxponder Multiplexed transponder
NE Network Element
NEBS Network Equipment Building Systems
NMS Network Management Station

– or –
Network Management System
NNI Network-to-Network Interface — An interface used to interconnect network elements.
NTP Network Time Protocol
OADM Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OAMPDU OAM Protocol Data Units are link-layer OAM messages transmitted in untagged slow
protocol frames. Per IEEE 802.3ah, OAMPDUs are normal Ethernet frames that use a
specific multicast destination address and EtherType. OAMPDUs contain control and
status information needed to monitor and troubleshoot OAM-enabled links.
OCh Optical Channel
OCM Optical Channel Monitor – The OCM provides optical performance monitoring by
measuring channel power, wavelength, and optical signal-to-noise ratio (OSNR) for each
DWDM channel.
OCP Open Compute Project
ODU Optical Data Unit
ODTU Optical channel Data Tributary Unit — An ODTU is an ODU with justification overhead
that includes the framing bytes.
OEO Optical-Electrical-Optical
OLA Optical Line Amplifier — The Z-Series OLA-200 and OLA-201 modules feature an
integrated Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) for both East and West directions. The
OLA-200 and OLA-201 modules provide amplification for the LAD-40E, LAD-96E, and all
WSS modules operating in either 40-channel or 96-channel mode; and OLA-200, and
OLA-201 modules.
The OLA-010 module utilizes Raman technology and functions as an amplifier to provide
all-band wavelength coverage for up to 96 optical channels. The OLA-010 module
provides amplification for the LAD-8E, LAD-8X, LAD-40E, LAD-96E, all WSS modules, and
OLA-200, and OLA-201 modules.
OMS Optical Multiplex Section
ONIE Open Network Install Environment
OOO Optical-Optical-Optical
OOS Out of Service
OPS Optical Protection Switch — The Z-Series Optical Protection Switch (OPS) uses low-loss
switching technology to provide protection against fiber cuts and failures. It provides
redundant path protection for telecommunication transmission systems. The OPS
operates independent of rate, format, and wavelength.
The OPS provides 1+1 protection. It continuously monitors optical power on both its
primary and secondary links. If received optical power on the active link drops below a
configured threshold, the OPS switches the optical signal to the standby link within 25
ms.
OPU Optical channel Payload Unit — Per ITU-T G.709, The OPUk is the information structure
used to adapt client information for transport over an optical channel. It comprises client
information together with any overhead needed to perform rate adaptation between the
client signal rate and the OPUk payload rate and other OPUk overhead supporting the
client signal transport. This overhead is adaptation specific. OPUk capacities for k=1, k=2,
k=3 are defined.
The client signal is mapped into the OPUk. The OPUk is mapped into an ODUk and the
ODUk is mapped into an OTUk. The OTUk is mapped into an OCh.
OSC Optical Supervisory Channel — In order to supervise all network elements in the network,
without relying on an external DCN, Z-Series systems provide an Optical Supervisory
Channel (OSC). Each Z-Series shelf connects to its neighbors via a 100 Mbps Ethernet
channel carried in-band over the optical network.
The system provides an embedded OSC that is resident in each Z-Series network
element. These select Z-Series optical interfaces insert a 100 Mbps OSC on 1510 nm and
provide transparent links between each Z-Series NE in the network. The OSC is a separate
channel that carries overhead information for network management purposes that is
added and dropped at each network element. It does not affect traffic.
OSNR Optical Signal to Noise Ratio
OSP Outside Plant
OSPF Open Shortest Path First
OSS Operations Support System
OTM Optical Transport Module
OTN Optical Transport Network
OTS Optical Transport Section
OTU Optical Transport Unit
OUI Organizational Unique Identifier
OXC Optical cross-connect
Packet A formatted unit of data carried on a network.
PBB Provider Backbone Bridging
PBBPG Provider Backbone Bridged Protection Group
PBBN Provider Backbone Bridged Network
PBB-TE Provider Backbone Bridging with Traffic Engineering

PBB-TE provides carrier-class Ethernet switching and transport, allowing a separation of
the service layer from the transport layer.
PBT Provider Backbone Transport
PCP Priority Code Point is a 3-bit field storing the priority level for an Ethernet frame.
PDFAP Power Distribution, Fuse and Alarm Panel
PDU Protocol Data Units
PE Provider Edge
PEB Provider Edge Bridge
PEM Power Entry Module
PHY Ethernet Physical Layer entity
PIR Peak Information Rate — Per the MEF, the PIR is the rate up to which the network will
attempt to deliver Ethernet service frames before they are discarded. The PIR equals the
CIR plus the EIR set in the bandwidth profile and applied to the flow point. PIR represents
the maximum bandwidth for the flow point.
PLL Phase-Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
PME Packet Multiplexer Element — The Z-Series PME-412 and PME-216i modules are
high-capacity Ethernet switches providing MEF-compliant services with optional carrier
Ethernet transport. PME-412 and PME-216i modules are supported in the Z-Series
multi-layer transport platforms for 10G transport using OTN over DWDM or 10GbE.
Point-to-Point EVC An EVC with exactly two UNIs.
Priority Tagging Allows the user to set a field within the Ethernet packet so that it can have a higher (or
lower) priority than other packets in the same network.
PSW Packet Switch module — Z-Series PSW modules are optimized for high-capacity Ethernet
aggregation and end-to-end packet transport solutions.
PW Pseudowire
Q-in-Q A provider bridge extension in 802.1Q VLAN tag. Also referred to a "stackable VLANs."
QoS Quality of Service
R-APS Ethernet Ring Automatic Protection Switching — The R-APS protocol manages the
protection of all nodes on the ring. R-APS coordinates protection switching on and off of
the RPL link.
RCM Ring Closure Module
RDI Remote Defect Indication
RFC Request For Comment (IETF standards tracking documents)
RHEL Red Hat Enterprise Linux
ROADM Reconfigurable Optical Add Drop Multiplexer
RPG Ethernet Ring Protection Group
RPL Ring Protection Link
RPM Red Hat Package Manager

– or –
RPM Package Manager
RPR Resilient Packet Ring
RS Regeneration Section
The Regeneration Section provides supervision of segments between optical
regenerators.
– or –
Reed-Solomon
Reed-Solomon codes are linear block codes that can detect and correct burst errors.
G.975 uses an RS code to produce redundant information that gets concatenated with
the signal to be transmitted. This additional information is used on the receive interface
to help identify and correct transmission errors. The RS encoding provides significant
correction capability and low error burst sensitivity.
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol — As defined in IEEE 802.1D-2004, configures full, simple
and symmetric connectivity throughout a bridged LAN that comprises individual LANs
interconnected by bridges. RSTP supersedes Spanning Tree Protocol (STP). RSTP
interoperates with STP to facilitate migration. RSTP provides faster spanning tree
recovery (convergence time) after a topology change.
RU Rack Unit
One rack unit is 1.75 inches in height. Racked equipment is specified to be mounted in
increments of RUs in height.
RX Receive
SAN Storage Area Network
SAP Service Access Point
SAPI Source Access Point Identifier
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEP Subnetwork Edge Point
Service Frame An Ethernet frame transmitted across the UNI toward the service provider or an Ethernet
frame transmitted across the UNI toward the subscriber.
Service A UNI attribute in which the UNI can be in more than one EVC instance.
Multiplexing
Service Provider The organization providing voice, data, video, and Ethernet service(s).
SFP Small form-factor pluggable
SFT SFP Transponder — The Z-Series 8-port SFP Transponder (SFT-8) is a multi-rate module
capable of supporting drop or insert or express traffic in the Z-Series multi-layer
transport network platform. The module provides transponding for Gigabit Ethernet and
OC-3/12/48 SONET STM-1/4/16 SDH services. The module also offers 3R regeneration
(re-timing, re-shaping, re-transmitting) of up to 2.5G transmit signals.
The SFT-10G16 is a high-density, multi-rate transponder module for the Z-Series
packet-optical transport platforms (P-OTPs) that addresses a broad range of service
requirements. The SFT-10G16 performs 3R signal regeneration (re-time, re-transmit,
re-shape) and wavelength conversion in CWDM and DWDM applications.
The multi-protocol architecture of the SFT-10G16 extends the reach of client signals such
as Fiber Channel, Ethernet, SONET/SDH and Optical Transport Network (OTN) at data
rates ranging from 1.0 to 11.3 Gbps. The SFT-10G16 provides 16 SFP/SFP+ client or
line-side ports.
SLA Service Level Agreement
The agreement between the subscriber and service provider that specifies the service
level.
SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNMP is the standard management protocol for TCP/IP networks.
SONET Synchronous Optical Network
SSL Secured Socket Layer
SSM Synchronization Status Messaging
STP Spanning Tree Protocol — As defined in IEEE 802.1D-1998, is a link management protocol
that provides path redundancy and ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged LAN.
STP defines a tree structure by allowing bridges to communicate with each other to
discover physical loops in the network.
STS Synchronous Transport Signal
Subscriber The organization or customer purchasing or using voice, data, video, and Ethernet
services.
Alternate term: Customer
S-VID Service VLAN Identifier
S-VLAN Service VLAN
TAC Technical Assistance Center
TC Traffic Class
TCA Threshold Crossing Alert
TDM Time Division Multiplexing
TESI Traffic Engineered Service Instance

A TESI refers to a PBB-TE service instance.
TIM Trail trace Identifier Mismatch
TL1 Transaction Language One
TLS Transparent LAN Services
TLV Type, Length, and Value
TPID Tagged Protocol Identifier

By default, the VLAN tag uses the TPID field to identify the protocol type of the tag.
TPM Transport Protection Module
Transponder Optional device in a DWDM system that provides the conversion of one optical
wavelength to a precision narrow band wavelength.
TSW The TSW-10G10 transport switching module, designed for Z77 deployments, provides
grooming and aggregation of TESIs across 10G rings and add/drop capabilities. The
TSW-10G10 serves to eliminate existing fiber patches between PME (PME-412 or
PME-216i) line cards used for aggregation; freeing up multiple PME ports for Ethernet
services.
The TSW-10G10 provides four XFP ports and SFP+ ports. OTU2 and OTU2e with FEC are
supported on every TSW-10G10 port, as well as 10GbE LAN.
TTI Trail Trace Identifier
TTP Trail Termination Point
TX Transmit
T-VLAN Tunneling VLAN — Refers to IEEE 802.1Q Ethertype 0x9100, the Q-in-Q tunneling
Ethertype.
UAC User Access Control
UDP User Datagram Protocol — UDP is Internet standard network layer, transport layer, and
session layer protocols that provide basic datagram services.
UNI User-to-Network Interface — Per the MEF, the User Network Interface is the interface
used to interconnect a subscriber to its service provider. The UNI also provides a
reference point for demarcation between the network operator equipment that enables
access to the network services and the subscriber access equipment. The UNI represents
the demarcation point that indicates the location where the responsibility of the service
provider ends; and the responsibility of subscriber begins.
VCAT Virtual Concatenation
VCG Virtual Concatenation Group
VCP Virtual Container Path
VLAN Virtual LAN
VLAN ID VLAN Identifier
VNTM Virtual Network Topology Manager
VOA Variable Optical Attenuator
VPN Virtual Private Network
WDM Wave Division Multiplexing
WSS Wavelength-Selective Switching — The Z-Series WSS modules provide

wavelength-selectable switching and re-configurable optical add/drop multiplexing
(ROADM) capabilities with automated provisioning, power balancing, and monitoring.
WTR Wait to Restore
XAUI 10 Gigabit Attachment Unit Interface
XC-2800 The XC-2800 is a unified packet and Optical Transport Network (OTN) switch fabric for the
Z77 shelf (Z77 and Z77 shelf v2). The XC-2800 provides service versatility and increased
switching capacity for the Z77. The fully non-blocking design of XC-2800 switch-fabric
provides 2.8 Tbps of capacity across the Z77 backplane. Working in unison with currently
available Z-Series high-performance service interface modules, the XC-2800 can scale in
excess of two billion packets-per-second (pps) of line-rate traffic throughput.
XFP 10-Gbps Small Form-Factor optical transceiver

700-0023-10-00 - (Z-Series R10.0 Engineering and Planning Guide) - Issue - 1.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

700-0023-10-00 - (Z-Series R10.0 Engineering and Planning Guide) - Issue - 1.1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

700-0023-10-00 - (Z-Series R10.0 Engineering and Planning Guide) - Issue - 1.1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ciena Z-Series

Packet-Optical Transport Networking Platform

Z-Series Engineering and Planning Guide

700-0023-10-00 – Issue 1.1

Copyright© 2018 Ciena® Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Legal Notices, Copyright, and Trademark

Copyright© 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved

Customer technical support/warranty

In North America 1-800-CIENA24 (243-6224)

In Europe, Middle East, and Africa 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-243-6224-7)

In Asia-Pacific 800-CIENA-24-7 (800-243-6224-7)

Sales and General Information North America: 1-800-207-3714 E-mail: sales@ciena.com

In Europe +44-207-012-5500 (UK) E-mail: sales@ciena.com

In Asia +81-3-3248-4680 (Japan) E-mail: sales@ciena.com

In India +91-22-42419600 E-mail: sales@ciena.com

In Latin America 011-5255-1719-0220 (Mexico City) E-mail: sales@ciena.com

Training E-mail: learning@ciena.com

Important! — Information that must be seriously considered.

Note: Special suggestions, advice, or information that should be

Safety Symbols and Labels

Laser Equipment Present

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Sensitive Equipment

Safety and Compliance Information

Warning IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Caution Keep all ventilation openings clear and unobstructed.

Caution To prevent damage, do NOT install or remove XFP/SFP transceivers with

Caution Use copper conductors only.

Caution This equipment is suitable for installation in Network Telecommunications Facilities,

Caution This equipment is intended to be grounded to a Common Bonding Network per

Note This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 10

L-AMP Shelf Pinouts ................................................................................................................................ 63

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 11

LAD Module Wavelength Assignments................................................................................................. 92

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 12

Management .......................................................................................................................................... 113

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 13

Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 134

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 14

Interfaces ................................................................................................................................................ 153

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 15

System Requirements ........................................................................................................................... 172

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 16

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 17

OLA Interfaces........................................................................................................................................ 220

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 18

PME/PSW/TSW Packet Line Card Interoperability ................................................................................. 252

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 19

Appendix A: DWDM Network Architecture Options and OSNR Specifications ..........................324

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 20

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 21

Figure 27: LAD-8A Block Diagram ................................................................................................................... 86

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 22

Figure 60: PSW-100G Functional Block Diagram ........................................................................................ 155

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 23

Figure 93: Z-Series Array Wave Guide (AWG-96) ........................................................................................ 209

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 24

700-0023-10-00 Issue 1.1 © 2018 Ciena® Corporation – All Rights Reserved. P a g e 25